Yearbook—1976

Title Page/​Publishers’ Page

1976 Yearbook of Jehovah’s Witnesses

Containing Report for the Service Year of 1975

Also Daily Text and Comments

WATCH TOWER BIBLE AND TRACT SOCIETY OF PENNSYLVANIA

OFFICERS

N. H. KNORR, President

F. W. FRANZ, Vice-President

GRANT SUITER, Secretary-Treasurer

WATCHTOWER BIBLE AND TRACT SOCIETY OF NEW YORK, INC.

OFFICERS

N. H. KNORR, President

F. W. FRANZ, Vice-President

GRANT SUITER, Secretary-Treasurer

INTERNATIONAL BIBLE STUDENTS ASSOCIATION

OFFICERS

N. H. KNORR, President

A. PRYCE HUGHES, Vice-President

J. E. BARR, Sec.-Treas.

GRANT SUITER, Asst. Sec.-Treas.

Index of Countries

Page

24 1975 Service Year Report, 210 Countries

Acts of Jehovah’s Witnesses in Modern Times in:

34 Luxembourg

47 Newfoundland

67 South Africa and Neighboring Territories

242 Sri Lanka

260 Yeartext for 1976

261 Daily Text and Comments

1976 Yearbook of Jehovah’s Witnesses

World wide Jehovah’s witnesses have been rejoicing because of “the undeserved kindness of God which brings salvation to all sorts of men.” (Titus 2:11) The 1975 service year report reveals that 295,073 men, women and children from all nations dedicated their lives to do the will of Jehovah God. These individuals have associated with Jehovah’s witnesses in their 38,256 congregations around the world and have kept themselves very busy telling others about the things they have learned.

What have they learned? That God’s kingdom is the only hope for mankind. Therefore, these newly baptized persons are studying the Bible diligently along with other witnesses of Jehovah in their Kingdom Halls. They are putting on new personalities. Yes, they are acting upon the fine counsel of the apostle Paul when he urged: “You should be made new in the force actuating your mind, and should put on the new personality which was created according to God’s will in true righteousness and loyalty.”​—Eph. 4:22-24.

Jehovah God sees to it that these individuals are given a lot of assistance from the older men or elders in the congregation. Centuries ago, the apostle Paul left Titus in Crete so that he might correct things that were defective and make appointments of older men in city after city. This was done so that the proper lead might be given. As Titus visited the various congregations, he kept on speaking things suitable for healthful teaching. With good guidance by the elders, benefits would be enjoyed by those in the congregation. That was Paul’s wish, for he wrote: “Let the aged men be moderate in habits, serious, sound in mind, healthy in faith, in love, in endurance.” Encouragement was given to those who were older in the truth and in age. They were to set a fine example for those just coming into the truth and associating with Jehovah’s organization. In Titus chapter two Paul advised this elder to “keep on exhorting the younger men to be sound in mind, in all things showing yourself an example of fine works; showing uncorruptness in your teaching, seriousness, wholesome speech which cannot be condemned; so that the man on the opposing side may get ashamed, having nothing vile to say about us.”​—Titus 2:1, 2, 6-8.

Paul was very interested in everyone in the congregation, and Titus was to have similar concern. The apostle desired that the aged women be reverent in behavior so that they might recall the young women to their senses. Then, among other things, these young women would show love for their husbands and children. They too would be “sound in mind, chaste, workers at home.”​—Titus 2:3-5.

In those days, some slaves also associated with the congregations, and Titus was not to ignore them. Paul’s counsel was: “Let slaves be in subjection to their owners in all things, and please them well, not talking back, not committing theft, but exhibiting good fidelity to the full, so that they may adorn the teaching of our Savior, God, in all things.”​—Titus 2:9, 10.

This fine elder appointed by the apostle Paul to look after the congregations in Crete was to be interested in everyone in the congregation. So it should be today. All the elders should be interested in everyone associated with Jehovah’s organization, young and old. At the same time, the elders themselves should set a fine example in good works, also in the use of wholesome speech. A Christian’s language shows what kind of an individual he is. His conduct at home and in the congregation tells much about him. In every way, a Christian’s habits must be exemplary, if he is to help others and “adorn the teaching of our Savior, God.” The New English Bible puts it this way: “For in all such ways they will add lustre to the doctrine of God our Saviour.”

The Christian’s way of life, as observed by others, will make the Word of God brilliant. Why? Because people see what God’s Word has done for that individual in putting on the “new personality.” Certainly, the study of God’s Word, the appreciation of the doctrine that God, our Savior, has given to us, really produces changes in the lives of Christians. Others can easily see this, if we allow the Word of God to control our lives and make them over.

The Word of God is not meant for persons in only one part of the world. Jehovah’s witnesses feel the importance of preaching this good news in all parts of the earth. From around the world hundreds of experiences have been submitted by the Watch Tower Society’s branch offices. Let us look at just a few countries. Those that we can cover here are listed alphabetically.

AUSTRALIA: The branch overseer writes: “In an effort to enlarge our love for any who will hear God’s Word, 1,121 ships were worked at various ports. . . . Many seamen from countries where the work of Jehovah’s witnesses has been banned have been able to get literature in this way.”

In this vast country, many brothers and sisters witness by letter. One sister, upon reading about a couple whose young son was killed when thrown from his pony, wrote to the parents concerning the resurrection hope. Some time passed without a reply, but around Christmastime the sister received a greeting card from the mother, expressing gratefulness and asking her to write again. After this the woman’s husband died and further letters containing Bible truths were sent to her. Six months passed without a word. But you can imagine the sister’s joy when she received a letter one day informing her that the woman and her oldest son were being baptized, and that the son had the pioneer work as his goal in life. Later this woman’s mother also accepted the truth.

AUSTRIA: Some young brothers desiring a certain secular job had to attend a special training school for eight weeks of the year. As one of the brothers left home, his parents admonished him: “Never forget that you are one of Jehovah’s witnesses.” This young brother told the engineer that he would not be able to take part in some school ceremonies because of being one of Jehovah’s witnesses. While his schoolmates said that this young man was narrow-minded, they soon changed their opinion. One day the teacher said that they would have a free discussion on religion. The young brother then talked to the entire class for about an hour concerning confession, Jesus Christ, the holy spirit and the organization with which he is associated. Fellow students now had a different opinion of this young man. He knew his Bible, and, in addition, his conduct at the school added luster to his beliefs.

Love for Jehovah gave this young brother the opportunity to speak with others about the truth during this period of his special training. He was able to have a daily Bible reading with his roommate. Soon one of his school colleagues went along to the congregation meetings with him. How fine it was that this young man never forgot those words of his parents: “Never forget that you are one of Jehovah’s witnesses.”

BARBADOS: Basically, the people on this island are conservative and do a lot of thinking before they decide to do something about the truth. During the past year a faithful sister presented a copy of Kingdom News to a certain man who responded by inviting her into his house, saying that he wanted to talk to one of Jehovah’s witnesses.

Once inside, he said: “I want to be one of Jehovah’s witnesses. What must I do to become one?” The sister, of course, highlighted knowledge and association, and invited him to attend meetings at the Kingdom Hall. After attending his first meeting, he remarked: “Never have I felt so happy in all my life.” Within eight months the man and the woman with whom he had been living were legally married, and were preparing to undergo baptism. The Word of God changed their whole life and, in turn, enabled them to engage in good conduct that adorned the Word of God.

BELGIUM: The excellent attitude of one of Jehovah’s witnesses helped a certain man to embrace true worship. One of Jehovah’s witnesses was associated with a group of bricklayers, some of whom could not stand even the sight of the Witnesses. It so happened that one of these bricklayers, new at this kind of work, was unable to fix the corner of a wall. Naturally, he did not want to ask one of Jehovah’s witnesses to help him. He became more and more nervous and angry, perspiring freely as the wall went from bad to worse. The Witness saw what was taking place, left his work and asked this man if he could rectify the situation. After correcting the work, this brother came over to the man about every two hours to give him some help. During the weeks that followed he gave this new man some very useful suggestions.

The hatred that this bricklayer had for Jehovah’s witnesses could not possibly continue after such expressions of consideration. Moreover, he noticed that the brother showed the same attitude toward all the workers on the job. If they needed help, the Witness was willing to teach them. He did not loiter at his work either. Nor did he steal anything from the building site. While this new man was working on the job, he realized that Jehovah’s witnesses possessed the truth. The attitude of this witness of Jehovah encouraged him to study the Word of God. Finally, this man himself accepted the truth. The good conduct of the brother had ‘added luster to the doctrine of God.’

BOLIVIA: Much effort was lovingly expended during the service year by “roving special pioneers.” They worked in isolated territory for four months. Consequently, twenty unworked provinces in Bolivia received the Kingdom good news for the first time. Due to this good work, much progress has been made in some mining towns. Many humble Bolivian miners made big changes in their lives after learning the truth. These miners’ lives are steeped in pagan superstition, and because they work in the cold, high in the mountains, it is common for them to chew cocoa leaves to deaden the pangs of hunger and extreme cold.

While some of these special pioneers were visiting the congregation at Chorolque, seventeen thousand feet in elevation, a man who was studying the Bible with Jehovah’s witnesses was contacted. He emphasized how difficult it was to drop the pagan ways, because of the fear of man. The Bolivian miner leads a close community life with his fellow workers, and the pressure to conform to tradition is deeply rooted. Many miners feel that if they do not make a sacrifice to Pachamama (their goddess of the earth) before entering the mine, they will have an accident, or may even lose their lives because of offending this goddess. To stand alone takes real courage and God’s spirit. In this area, a small group of Jehovah’s witnesses are making over their personalities to follow God’s way.

In the vicinity of another mining town, San Vicente, there were only four baptized brothers. Little did the pioneers realize that in the ten-month period between visits the Kingdom truth would flourish there, until there were twenty-one baptized publishers. One never knows where God’s “sheep” will be found.

Nor can we tell in advance just what a piece of literature containing God’s message will do, or where it will go. The Society’s pocket-sized books have brought about wonderful results. For years a university student had many doubts about Bible matters. One day he picked up the book Is the Bible Really the Word of God?, which a family member had obtained. This young man became so engrossed in the material that he read the publication all the way through before putting it down. When the Kingdom publisher returned, a study was started with this university student. The young man began attending meetings and shared his newfound knowledge of God with his girl friend. Moral changes had to be made in their relationship before he could qualify to be a preacher of the good news. However, he married the young woman, and at a recent circuit assembly both of them were baptized in symbol of their dedication to Jehovah. God’s Word truly has power to make changes!

BURMA: Even young children among God’s people can guard the heart and act according to Bible principles. A six-year-old girl whose father is an elder in the congregation was taken to her grandparents to spend a few days with them. When sitting at the table for lunch, she noticed that her grandmother had prepared some small roasted animals for lunch. She asked: “How were these slaughtered?” The girl wanted to know if the animals were properly bled. When the grandmother answered that they were not bled, the young girl said that she could not eat any. Of course, the grandparents were surprised and asked, “Why not?” This six-year-old said: “My father told me that as a Christian I should not eat that which is not properly slaughtered.” The grandmother then tried to persuade the little girl to eat some of the food, saying that the father was not there but was fifty miles away. Why, her father would never know anything about it! But the young girl replied: “I don’t worship my father. Even though he is not here to see me, Jehovah God, whom I worship, is here.” The conversation paved the way for those elderly people to get interested in the truth.

CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC: Often there is strong opposition to the truth from persons within a Christian’s household. (Matt. 10:36) However, when one takes a firm stand for the truth and manifests the fruits of the spirit, that person’s conduct adds luster to the Word of God. In a small village a woman began studying the Bible with one of Jehovah’s witnesses and started attending their meetings. She faithfully did this until she dedicated her life to Jehovah and underwent water baptism. Her husband then became strongly opposed, and when his wife prepared to travel to a district assembly he not only refused to give her money necessary for the trip but said that he would tear up their marriage certificate if she went to the assembly. A special pioneer living nearby who had helped this sister lovingly gave her half of her allowance for the month and assisted this woman to get to the assembly. When she returned, her husband angrily left. He found another woman and brought her home to live with him, in the same house in which he lived with his first wife. Though this brought tremendous emotional pressure upon the sister, she faithfully remained in subjection to her husband, manifesting “chaste conduct together with deep respect.”​—1 Pet. 3:1, 2.

Finally, the husband sent the second woman away. After this, he told the special pioneer that seeing his wife’s faithful endurance made him realize that she really had the truth. He obtained the book The Truth That Leads to Eternal Life and studied it carefully. Now this man is actively striving to develop the same integrity toward Jehovah God that his wife has shown. What brilliance this wife’s conduct gave to the doctrine of God, our Savior!

CONGO: The brothers in this land have had a year filled with theocratic activity. In addition to their doing the preaching work, several Kingdom Halls have been built and a number of others fully renovated. Now all twelve Kingdom Halls in Brazzaville have electric lights and eleven of them have sound systems, enabling everyone to hear easily. Due to the changes and improvements, already there has been a marked increase in meeting attendance.

In the Congo, a certain young girl had a strong desire to serve God and wanted to become a nun, but the parents were not in favor of this idea. Later in life she often thought of the Bible text that says “the workers are few.” (Matt. 9:37) She was always sorry to see the bad conduct of the priests and the trouble that the church members seemed to have. Could there be a better church somewhere? One day she asked an individual where she could go to learn more about religion, and was told that perhaps Jehovah’s witnesses could help her. Later on, she talked about it to another neighbor who was a religious teacher; he also was quite disgusted with conditions in the church. In an effort to find the truth, they decided to visit every church in town. They started with Jehovah’s witnesses. Arriving at the Kingdom Hall, they were surprised. Never before had they been received with such hospitality. The Witnesses were so warm and friendly and the meeting itself was very good! After the meeting this woman’s neighbor asked for a Bible study and both of them got Truth books. On their way home they agreed that there was no need to visit any other churches. They had found the truth and they would stay with it!

This woman learned fast. That same week she told the man with whom she had been living immorally, and by whom she had a child, that they would have to stop living together because Jehovah God does not tolerate fornication. Shocked, he had to move out. This woman now started to preach to her friends and family, including her oldest daughter. This fourteen-year-old daughter refused to receive confirmation in the Catholic Church because she also wanted to be one of Jehovah’s witnesses. Soon, the mother, the daughter and the neighbor were preparing to be baptized. Indeed, the applied counsel of God’s Word enables individuals to lead lives pleasing to Jehovah.

The Kingdom-preaching activity of Jehovah’s witnesses in Gabon comes under the direction of the Society’s branch office in the Congo. Though the work is under ban in this particular African land, it is encouraging to learn that during April there were 26 temporary pioneers there. These hardworking brothers and sisters averaged 111.6 hours in the field service. This fine work was done even though they could be arrested and be put into prison if found preaching. That takes real faith!

In this land, too, preaching the Word has had a good effect on many. To illustrate: Three young Gabonese girls took up prostitution as a means of making a living. Upon learning about the Bible’s moral standards, they changed their lives, harmonizing them with Scriptural principles. This meant leaving their former way of life and taking up humble work, such as being washerwomen. They also had to be very courageous in refusing their former partners in sexual impurity. But they made these changes and are now faithful Christians, having symbolized their dedication to God by water baptism.

CYPRUS: After the Turkish invasion of Cyprus, it became necessary for the brothers in the southern part of the island to help those who became refugees from the northern part. A large amount of secondhand clothing and blankets were distributed among the brothers. Foodstuffs and other necessary things were purchased for their use. The branch overseer reports that none of these brothers and sisters had to stay in tents or suffer from the want of food and clothing; all of them were able to settle in houses.

When the Turkish invasion took place, a certain family had to abandon their home and all their belongings and flee. The woman was pregnant and they also had a thirteen-month-old baby. They found a small house just outside of Limassol, but were very unhappy and desperate. The mother was crying most of the time, wondering why all these bad things were coming upon mankind. In October of 1974 a young witness of Jehovah visited this woman, spoke to her about world conditions and left her some good news in the form of the Watchtower and Awake! magazines. Later, the Witness visited again and explained the Kingdom hope. The woman listened with pleasure, but was suspicious that this was a trap. She had one or two Bible discussions. Thereafter the family moved to a better house in Limassol. “We can get rid of Jehovah’s witnesses too,” the woman told her husband. So they left, not telling anyone their new address. But they were in for a surprise. The very morning after moving they opened their door and saw the same sister who had been making return visits on them. Without knowing it, they had rented a house right next door to Jehovah’s witnesses! In fact, the woman learned that she was surrounded by families of Witnesses​—one to her right and one to her left. What else was there to do but start studying the Bible again? The woman now says: “How glad we are for that, because my husband and I were baptized in July 1975 at a circuit assembly.”

DAHOMEY: While engaging in door-to-door preaching work, a brother met a young couple who obviously were in the middle of a family quarrel. Being allowed to speak, he read Ephesians 4:26, where it says: “Let the sun not set with you in a provoked state.” Then he went on with his sermon. The young couple were very pleased to learn of this fine principle and accepted the invitation to attend a public meeting at the Kingdom Hall that very day. It so happened that the talk was on marriage. This further helped them to appreciate the practical counsel that one can find in God’s Word. Deeply moved by what they heard, they readily accepted the arrangement for a home Bible study.

After just a few weeks of studying the Bible, they realized it would be necessary to bring their lives into harmony with God’s Word, and took the necessary steps to have their marriage legalized. Soon the wife began sharing in the field service, and the husband was making very fine progress. How happy they are that the brother was alert and offered helpful Bible counsel! Now their lives, too, can add luster to the Word of God.

There are undoubtedly many who are “skinned and thrown about like sheep without a shepherd.” (Matt. 9:36) One Sunday morning a Catholic man went to church but the priest told those in attendance that he had not prepared any sermon. For that man, this was ‘the last straw.’ He decided to leave the church and look elsewhere. But where would he go? For some time he had prayed about the matter. He recalled having talked to Jehovah’s witnesses from time to time and so decided to go to the Kingdom Hall. The man talked to some brothers at the meeting and a Bible study was started with him. After going through chapter two of the Truth book, he wrote a letter to the church saying that he was no longer a member. The priest visited him, but the interested man told the priest that after thirty-three years of being “hungry and thirsty” he had now found the truth.

The Bible study continued. Some weeks later, the man told the brother conducting the study that he owned a hotel noted as a place where immorality was carried on. He asked what he should do. The brother showed him the Bible principles involved and the man decided to sell the hotel. Not long afterward, he got rid of that business and with a clear conscience became a very serious and zealous publisher. Those who make such changes in life ‘adorn the teaching of their Savior, God, in all things.’

EL SALVADOR: About fifteen years ago, a missionary found a couple who showed some interest in the Kingdom message. Repeated efforts to start a home Bible study did not succeed because the man’s secular work as a member of a musical trio interfered. Years passed, the musical trio prospered, and they were called on to perform at dances, banquets and other occasions. Leading such a life, the man fell into more worldly ways. This caused problems in his marriage. Although being a nominal Catholic, he stopped attending church because he could not accept the use of images in worship. In time, his wife left him for a seven-month period to visit a daughter in Canada. During that time of loneliness, he reflected on his life and its lack of purpose, and concluded that what was missing was spirituality. He wanted to be close to God. For the first time in his life the man knelt down and prayed to God that he might find the true religion. That very morning he remembered the missionary who had called on him years earlier. Although he did not remember her religion, he felt that she could help him to come to know God. Through the years, he had seen her on the streets of the business district. Every day he went there, looking for this missionary. On the fourth day, spotting her, he literally ran after the sister, calling out “Madam, Madam.” She had a faint recollection of this man, who immediately asked for a Bible study. Arrangements were made to study with him and, his eighteen-year-old son. After a few months, the man’s wife returned from Canada after receiving glowing letters from her husband and son stating that they had found the truth that will lead to eternal life. The family began attending all weekly meetings of the congregation. Their personalities soon had changed. The son was baptized and began temporary pioneering. Both parents became active in the preaching work and planned to be baptized at a district assembly in December of 1975. All of them are continually expressing their deep appreciation for the privilege of coming to know Jehovah and his ways, and they are delighted with the peace and happiness that now prevail in their household.

As a little girl, one woman had a great desire to know the only true God, the Father of Jesus Christ. She was raised a Catholic and fruitlessly searched for God in one church after another. As a young girl she began living with a married man many years older than she was. Her life centered around this man. Fourteen years passed. Still her desire to know Jehovah was not satisfied. Then suddenly her companion lost his life. Having centered her life around that man and material things, she saw no ray of hope for the future. What would she do? From that time on, the woman suffered from insomnia, had no appetite, lost weight. Life had little meaning. If she wanted to keep living, she knew that she had to find the true God. That was her only hope.

One day this woman went to the cathedral and prayed to God. Her prayer changed to tears and she cried and cried. She remained there for hours but no relief came. She left, walked into a bookstore and bought a Bible. She reasoned that since God has given us his written Word, certainly someone should understand it. So from church to church she went, speaking to any she thought could help her unlock the mysteries of the Holy Book.

Then one evening this woman went to visit a neighbor. While she was there a young lady came to the door. The neighbor recognized her as one of Jehovah’s witnesses and said that she did not have any interest in listening to what the young lady had to say. But the searcher for truth rushed to the door and asked the young lady: “Can you help me to understand the Bible?” Indeed she could! A Bible study was started that very night. She was so hungry to learn the truth that arrangements were made for the study to be held every day for ten days. Day by day, the woman drank in the knowledge of God’s Word. Her life changed. For the first time in many years, she began to sleep and regain her appetite. Before long she was like a new person. Sometime later she was baptized. Now she finally has found what she had been looking for all her life.

FIJI: A thrilling event for the brothers in Tahiti was the visit of Brothers N. H. Knorr and F. W. Franz in February 1975. Though the meeting held for the benefit of the Tahitians in Papeete was not publicly advertised, 749 attended. The next evening 500 came to view colored pictorial slides shown by Brother Knorr at one of the local Kingdom Halls. During the visit, Brother Knorr made arrangements for a new branch office of the Watch Tower Society to be established, and by April 1, 1975, Tahiti became a new branch, separate from Fiji. The branch overseer says: “This is truly an outstanding achievement since the work in Tahiti started only sixteen years ago when three families from Los Angeles, California, in the United States, moved here to serve where the need was greater.”

The branch overseer goes on to say: “No sooner had Fiji lost one of the nine countries it was administering than another country was added, the Tokelau Islands, a group of three small coral atolls situated 270 miles north of Western Samoa, with a total population of 2,000 people. Two small groups of publishers and interested ones were located on two of these islands. How did the work get started here? Two local doctors, while attending medical school in Fiji, received the truth, and on their return to their home country they began preaching the good news and organized meetings.” How marvelous it is to see young men coming to a knowledge of the truth in one land and then returning to another to carry the Word of God to the people! And so the message of the Kingdom gets out into every nook and corner.

Would you be willing to leave a comfortable five-bedroom home in a modern city and move with your wife and eight children to a materially poor and undeveloped island to serve where the need is greater? In 1973, this was the question that faced Brother David Wolfgramm, a citizen of the Tonga Islands. When Brother Wolfgramm handled a meeting part entitled “Am I Free from the Blood of All Men?” he says he came to see where his responsibility was. The Wolfgramms moved to Tonga and have been a very welcome addition to the group publishing the good news there. They have shared in pushing the work farther afield into more than 150 islands of the group.

FRANCE: The year 1975 will be memorable in the history of Jehovah’s witnesses in France. The most noteworthy event was the lifting of the twenty-two-year ban on The Watchtower. Though efforts were made over the years to have this ban lifted, they were without success until now. A few weeks after a new president had been elected, a letter (dated June 10, 1974) was sent to him personally by the French Association of Jehovah’s Witnesses. It requested that the ban on The Watchtower be lifted. The Association received an acknowledgment informing them that the matter would be examined. Finally, the Journal Officiel of the French Republic, dated December 1, 1974, published a decree made on November 26, 1974, annulling the decree of December 19, 1952, which had banned the circulation, distribution and sale of The Watchtower. Thus the French brothers were able to receive the January 1, 1975, issue of the French Watchtower for their personal study and meetings. A few weeks later they were able to begin offering this magazine from house to house. How happy they were!

To add to this joy, in December 1974, the one thousandth congregation was organized in France. In May 1975 a new peak of 64,091 publishers was reached in France. The “Divine Sovereignty” assemblies were held at the close of the year, and the total attendance at the seventeen assemblies in France reached 82,349.

The country of South Vietnam, which has been taken over by the Communists, now is under the supervision of the Society’s Paris branch office. As far as can be learned, there are about 100 of our brothers remaining in Saigon. Looking back over the past year, all of Jehovah’s witnesses are grateful for the protection the Almighty Sovereign of the universe, Jehovah God, has granted their fellow believers in that land. Before the Communist take-over in April, Jehovah’s witnesses in South Vietnam experienced six consecutive monthly publisher peaks. They reached a peak of 120 proclaimers of the good news. Three congregations were meeting in the branch home and a missionary home. The average meeting attendance on Sundays ran around 180 persons. During the year, a district assembly was held in Saigon. The highlight of the year was Brother Knorr’s visit in Saigon before the take-over by the Communists. At that time he showed photographic slides of the work of God’s people in different parts of the world, and then gave a very encouraging talk.

After Saigon fell, all communication with the local brothers ended. They having received good counsel and Scriptural help in previous years, we feel certain that their faith will manifest itself. For the first time, these brothers will have to continue preaching without the aid of missionaries. However, Jehovah knows their situation, and we are confident that he will continue to protect and care for the faithful ones.

In the evacuation of South Vietnam, many thousands of people were sent to various nations, particularly the United States. One missionary couple that came out of Vietnam have now been assigned to work in one of the refugee camps in California. They have met many whom they knew in Saigon, and so these missionaries are going from tent to tent, and Bible truth is reaching hearing ears. Regular congregation meetings are being held at one of the refugee camps. Surely Christians world wide will continue praying for their brothers in South Vietnam.

HONDURAS: September 18, 1974, was a date of calamity in Honduras. Hurricane “Fifi” struck and brought upon that country the worst natural disaster in its history. In hours, some 1,600 brothers​—two thirds of all the Witnesses in the country—​found themselves in a devastated area. The hurricane left behind a wreckage that destroyed communications, roads, bridges and homes. It was truly a disaster. Immediately, however, a full-scale loving relief effort was begun by the local Witnesses and fellow believers in other parts of the earth. Within hours, Christian love displayed itself, and relief from many directions came flowing into Honduras. Before the month had passed, sixty-three thousand pounds of supplies were distributed among the needy brothers, their families and friends.

By Wednesday, November 6, the brothers and sisters of Honduras, as well as interested persons, hurtled all the obstacles related to the hurricane and assembled at a one-day circuit assembly, which was held in the heart of the devastated region. That evening four thousand persons were in attendance. Not only were they interested in restoring material things; they needed spiritual food. Emotions ran high and tears of joy came to the eyes of our brothers as they saw and heard their brothers and sisters around them. They then realized for the first time the full impact of having been preserved alive, with not one missing, although many came from towns and villages that had been almost totally wiped out, leaving hundreds, yes, thousands, dead. Amazingly, not one Witness lost his life in the hurricane. Many expressions of appreciation for the love they had been shown were made on the part of all the brothers.

INDONESIA: The healthy activity of Jehovah’s witnesses in Indonesia has drawn the ire of religious leaders. Moslems view the house-to-house work as an intrusion.” The nominal Christian clergy say that Jehovah’s witnesses are creating confusion.

Relentless pressure has been applied in local areas to have the organization banned, or at least restricted, including the doing of house-to-house preaching. The government has now forbidden house-to-house calls with literature and also has ruled that no approach may be made to those who already have a religion. Jehovah’s witnesses in Indonesia are adjusting to the new situation. They call on all who formerly showed interest and they do incidental witnessing, as well as find other ways to present the good news.

ISRAEL: This country, with all its troubles, has enjoyed another outstanding year of progress in the congregations. They had a 21-percent increase in publishers, reaching a new peak of 263 in April 1975. There were 444 in attendance at the Memorial celebration. These figures are not large in comparison with some other lands, but they show that progress is being made in a land where the going has been difficult.

The branch reports an experience of a young man with a criminal background, and whose aunt was associated with one of the congregations. She often witnessed to this young man, but he never responded. Then one day he agreed to attend a talk given by a visiting zone overseer. The talk impressed the man greatly. He soon accepted the offer of a home Bible study and the influence of God’s Word on his life has been so great that he has left his former way of life, has become active in the field service and has dedicated his life to Jehovah. The big change made in his personal life also saved his marriage. He and his wife were at the point of getting a divorce, having nothing in common on any subject. But now that they are both publishers of the good news, they live according to Bible principles and are happy members of the Christian congregation.

The issue of neutrality came to the fore very prominently in Israel during this past year, and brothers are serving prison sentences because of their Christian stand. Sometimes their families have been deprived of food because these young men were the breadwinners. But the brothers in the congregation have rallied to their aid and provided the families with their needs. Some of these imprisoned brothers had been elders or ministerial servants. Members in the congregations have filled these positions too. So fine progress was maintained throughout the year, despite this interference.

LEBANON: Like other parts of the world, Lebanon has seen much trouble. Throughout the spring and summer and now in the fall of 1975 there has been much heavy fighting between the rival political factions in and around Beirut, the capital. Despite explosions and machine-gun fire day and night in all parts of the city, resulting in loss of material things, none of Jehovah’s people have been reported killed or injured. This is truly remarkable because many of them were living in areas where some of the heaviest fighting has occurred.

There are many stories of narrow escapes through gunfire and rocket attacks. One meeting place was badly damaged and the congregation lost its chairs and other material things. At times, meetings had to be held in family groups while the fighting raged outside. But all have been spiritually fed throughout this continuous turmoil. The preaching work also has gone on as the brothers have spoken to frightened neighbors about God’s kingdom and the time when war will be no more.

Some time ago a committee of a Protestant church in Aleppo, Syria, met to consider ways of opposing the activities of Jehovah’s witnesses. After much discussion one of the older men expressed the opinion that there appeared to be many conflicting ideas about the Witnesses. So he felt it would only be fair for some of the committee to speak with them, getting information firsthand on what they believe. All of those present were very much against this idea. So this gentleman said that if they did not want to appoint some member of the committee to make the investigation, he would do it himself.

After many discussions with the Witnesses over a period of a year, he informed the church committee that, rather than opposing Jehovah’s witnesses, they should learn from them and help them in the work they were doing. That was enough to get him kicked off the committee. This shocked him in view of all the years of service he had rendered to the church. So the man began attending meetings of the Witnesses. He saw what true brotherly love is and what the spirit of cooperation means among those responsible for the oversight of the congregation. Soon he was publishing the good news. Of course, he did not neglect calling on his former church colleagues to give them the message of the Kingdom. This brought much opposition and persecution from his family and others, but he stood firm and was recently baptized in symbol of his dedication to God. How happy this man is to have learned in old age how to serve Jehovah acceptably!

MALAYSIA: Many young brothers and sisters here must show real fortitude and face severe parental opposition. Two brothers, ages seventeen and eighteen, experienced opposition because they refused to participate in pagan customs and rites in connection with their grandmother’s death. These boys were beaten, abused and threatened with broken legs, expulsion from the house and confinement in a boys’ institution. But they would not compromise. Two friends of these boys also were harassed. Their parents often came to the Kingdom Hall, shouting loudly at the brothers assembled, once even dragging two of the boys away. However, these four young men continued to attend meetings regularly, and they shared in the field service. Though often punched, kicked and treated badly, they are doing well. They prepare thoroughly for every meeting and comment frequently. They show the zeal and integrity peculiar to God’s people. Happily, some of their own fleshly brothers and sisters are now showing interest in the truth.

MOZAMBIQUE: On June 25, 1975, Mozambique received its independence from Portugal. There was a festive spirit throughout the land and everywhere was heard the cry “Viva Frelimo!” When such nationalistic feelings exist, problems arise for those who wish to remain neutral.

Because Jehovah’s witnesses maintained Christian neutrality in Malawi, having refused to join a political party, they fled from Malawi and were located in six refugee camps along that country’s western border in Mozambique. They are now being repatriated. Some of these refugees were taken by truck to the Malawi border where a “welcome” speech was delivered to them by the Malawi government minister of the Central region. He said: “You left Malawi of your own accord, and now you are returning of your own accord. The ruling Malawi Congress Party is still here. Now go back to your homes and cooperate with your local party officials.”

This repatriation from Mozambique to Malawi began on August 19. So, as the 1975 service year ended, thousands of our Malawian brothers were walking the roads leading to their homes. Some of them had to walk as much as two hundred miles or more. Many, on arriving in their home villages, found that the local villagers would not help them for fear of reprisals from political officials. In one region a circular was sent to all party representatives stating that Jehovah’s witnesses should not be allowed into their own villages unless they were prepared to buy a party membership card. In many cases they have had to flee into the bush for safety. Some of them have been beaten badly because of their refusal to compromise. Another report has come through saying that some of the brothers were stripped naked and paraded before local villagers for the same reason. Only Jehovah can make “the way out” for our repatriated Malawian brothers. (1 Cor. 10:13) They are unwanted in their own country and they cannot return to Mozambique. There is nowhere for them to go.

Yet, in spite of all these difficulties, many new ones have associated with them and more than 2,000 were baptized last year.

During the last year the Society continued to give much help to our Malawian brothers in the refugee camps in the northern part of Mozambique. By June 1975, well over $200,000 (U.S.) had been spent on their behalf. The largest single expense was food. Twenty tons of clothing, mostly mailed from South Africa, were supplied to these refugee brothers. They were also sent medical supplies.

Furthermore, the Society arranged to have one copy of the Cinyanja-language Truth book, as well as a copy of the book Listening to the Great Teacher, also in Cinyanja, given free to each publisher in the camps. The Watchtower magazine reached them regularly, too, at no cost to them. Our refugee brothers greatly appreciated the consideration and generosity of their brothers earth wide who made these relief measures possible. But now the situation is bad, and the majority of the brothers, it seems, are being forced to return to Malawi, with nowhere else to go. All we can do now is pray in behalf of our brothers in Malawi. The prayers of the righteous have much force.​—Jas. 5:16-18.

NORWAY: Incidental witnessing brings results. A circuit overseer was traveling by train to attend a meeting. Opposite him was a young man reading a book on politics. The brother asked this individual if he believed that the world could be saved by politics. No, the young man did not believe that the world could be saved by any means. The brother started to talk to him about the Bible. The young man asked many questions concerning Gog of Magog, the harlot of Revelation, and so forth. He listened intently, and when they reached their destination they exchanged addresses.

The next week the young man traveled twenty-five miles by bike to the branch office in Oslo to obtain eight books. Upon reading what Revelation, chapter seventeen, means, he went to the State Church and resigned. A Bible study was arranged with the young man. He has really shown concern for his family and has made many trips back home to witness to them and to other relatives. A study was begun with his own brother, who is now making fine progress. All of this happened within four months and really highlights the need to have an evangelizer’s spirit.

PAKISTAN: For twenty-eight years there have been publishers in Pakistan. This relatively new land was formed on August 15, 1947. Since then, two missionaries, along with a number of other brothers, have worked diligently among the nation’s 66 million people. The going is difficult, but the joy of the publishers is wonderful as they see progress being made in this Moslem country. Could you keep your enthusiasm up for years and be overjoyed with twenty-six people dedicating their lives to God in one year in the entire country? Well, the missionaries, pioneers and congregation publishers of Pakistan rejoice that they now have a new peak of 184 publishers.

While working for the government a woman learned the truth and was baptized. When her contract ended last year, the question arose: ‘Should I return to my own country or continue serving where the need is greater?’ She has arranged to retire from secular work and stay in the congregation where she learned the truth and now is enrolled as a regular pioneer. With only five congregations throughout the whole land, what joy the brothers and sisters of Pakistan express in finding twenty-six new disciples of Christ Jesus in one year, as compared with a previous high of seventeen.

ZAÏRE: Jehovah’s witnesses in this land are not recognized by the government. While there is no outright persecution in most parts of the country, this lack of recognition has caused considerable difficulty for God’s people. Large assemblies cannot be held. Congregation meetings are often closely watched by local authorities, and threats are made to deter the Witnesses from preaching openly. Because the brothers and sisters keep their neutrality, some have had their jobs taken from them, or have experienced beatings and imprisonment. Their children have been expelled from school. All of this, however, does not discourage the Kingdom publishers. They have not slowed down in their preaching activity. To the contrary, a greater witness than ever was given in Zaïre during 1975.

THE WHOLE WORLD: For your convenience, the annual report of Kingdom preaching in the whole world is set out on pages 24-31. Listed there alphabetically are all the Watch Tower Society’s branch offices, and under each branch the various countries under its care. It is truly an encouraging report, for it shows that Jehovah has directed his people, and during this past 1975 service year a grand witness has been given. Those enjoying the privilege of making known the Kingdom good news reached a peak of 2,179,256, which is 157,824 more than the number of those advertising God’s kingdom last year.

People have to know about the kingdom of God. Jesus Christ declared: “This good news of the kingdom will be preached in all the inhabited earth for a witness to all the nations; and then the end will come.” (Matt. 24:14) So, diligently, this worldwide preaching of the good news goes on, and these servants of Jehovah spent 382,296,208 hours in talking to people about the divine purpose, eleven million more hours than during any previous year.

Jehovah’s witnesses were interested, too, in leaving things to read with the people who were anxious to learn more about God’s purpose. So world wide during their twelve months of field service they placed 28,410,783 bound books and Bibles and 12,163,807 booklets of 32 or 64 pages each, as well as 293,705,005 Watchtower and Awake! magazines in addition to the 2,111,730 subscriptions for these magazines. However, they were not satisfied merely with placing literature. They made return visits, trying to encourage the people to read the literature, or even study the Bible with Christian publications as an aid. In fact, Jehovah’s witnesses were able to conduct 1,411,256 home Bible studies each week in the homes of interested persons. They made 155,336,481 return visits during the year. What a tremendous effort they put forth to help people to get an understanding of God’s Word!

To aid Jehovah’s witnesses in the Kingdom-preaching work, in their own printing plants in the United States, Germany, Finland and Greece, and in other printeries, they manufactured 63,305,420 bound books and Bibles and 513,705,582 Watchtower and Awake! magazines, as well as 22,190,340 booklets, so that people in all nations who wish to read and study the Word of God can do so with the aid of these publications.

The Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society of Pennsylvania had, on the average, 2,456 missionaries working throughout the world and they are included in the 15,734 special pioneers. These special pioneers are working 150 hours every month in the preaching work. Additionally, there were 114,491 regular and temporary pioneers devoting about 100 hours a month to the field service. On the average, each month throughout the whole twelve months there were 1,932,224 congregation publishers, many of whom spent from 10 to 20 hours in the field service. All these fine workers total up to 2,062,449 publishers, on an average, out in the field each month. And sometime during the year they attained the high peak of 2,179,256 publishers.

During the 1975 service year Jehovah’s witnesses were able to help 295,073 individuals see the need of dedicating their lives to Jehovah God and being baptized in water to symbolize that dedication. They are now associated in 38,256 congregations in 210 countries.

These are not the only people interested in the work that Jehovah’s witnesses are doing. Each year at the time for the celebration of the Lord’s Evening Meal, or Memorial, many of those with whom Bible studies are conducted, and other interested persons, come together with Jehovah’s witnesses at their Kingdom Halls world wide. On March 27, 1975, after six o’clock in the evening, 4,925,643 persons gathered together to commemorate the death of the Lord Jesus Christ. This means something to them. Jesus’ death upon the torture stake can mean everlasting life for them, if they exercise unfailing faith in Jehovah, his Son and the kingdom by which God will bring them the blessings of life in his promised new order.

Jehovah’s witnesses world wide are not loved by the nations of the earth. It is just as Jesus said: “You will be objects of hatred by all people on account of my name.” (Matt. 10:22) Though this be true, and Jehovah’s Christian witnesses know that they are going to suffer persecution, they believe the Bible’s words: “Throw your burden upon Jehovah himself, and he himself will sustain you. Never will he allow the righteous one to totter.” (Ps. 55:22) So, while these fine Christians are in the world, they are not a part of it. They are interested in the Sovereign Ruler of the universe, Jehovah God, and they take their stand definitely on his side. Jesus said: “The hour is coming when everyone that kills you will imagine he has rendered a sacred service to God.” (John 16:2) Nevertheless, God’s people will not turn back from their dedicated purpose of walking in integrity and magnifying Jehovah’s great name.

Marvelous things are happening. During this past year, the disciple-making work has been done openly in Portugal, instead of in an underground fashion, for the government there has recognized Jehovah’s witnesses as a religious body in that land. We thank Jehovah for this. In Greece greater freedom has been granted to Jehovah’s witnesses, so that they can declare the good news.

While Jehovah’s people are persecuted in many countries, they have not been stopped. Even behind the Iron Curtain and in other difficult lands there are 177,861 publishers of the Kingdom. This is an 8.8 percent increase over last year. That was the average every month during the 1975 service year. They reached a new peak of 185,804 publishers. Even though they have to work underground and keep themselves fairly well hidden in Communist lands, and in other countries where the work is more or less banned, there was an attendance of 291,460 at the Memorial in these lands. Just imagine! During the past year these persecuted Christians were able to devote 19,003,812 hours to preaching the good news of the Kingdom in their lands.

This work of Jehovah’s witnesses will continue because it is God’s time for the preaching of the good news of the Kingdom world wide. While conditions may get worse for them, they will also get much worse for the nations of the world. These nations stand against God and his sovereignty. They refuse to accept his kingdom as the only hope for mankind. The result will be great tribulation for all the nations and their religious systems in the final destruction of this present system of things. Jesus prophesied that this good news of God’s kingdom will be preached in all the inhabited earth for a witness to all the nations and then the end will come. (Matt. 24:14) That means the end of this present system of things. It will be followed by the glorious millennial reign of Jesus Christ, the Messianic kingdom for which Christians have prayed to God, saying: “Let your kingdom come. Let your will take place, as in heaven, also upon earth.” (Matt. 6:10) So until that day Jehovah’s Christian witnesses have work to do, and under His direction they will continue to do it.

Jehovah’s witnesses are grateful for the God-given privilege of declaring the Kingdom message throughout the earth. Certainly they are pleased that by their Christian words and deeds they can ‘adorn the teaching of their Savior, God, in all things.’ (Titus 2:10) Despite persecution or other hardships, what a joy it has been to work together as a body of Christian witnesses of Jehovah God in declaring this good news during the 1975 service year!

[Chart on pages 24-31)

1975 SERVICE YEAR REPORT OF JEHOVAH’S WITNESSES WORLD WIDE

(See publication)

Acts of Jehovah’s Witnesses in Modern Times

All persons who come to know Jehovah God through reading his written Word will sooner or later want to tell other people about it. They learn that God’s will is for ‘all sorts of men to be saved and come to an accurate knowledge of truth.’ (1 Tim. 2:3, 4) Love for Jehovah makes them want to be imitators of him, reflecting his qualities and sharing his outlook. (Eph. 5:1) So they exert themselves to share with others what God’s Word says. This was true not only in the days of the early Christians; it has also been true down through the centuries right to the present. When the apostle Paul was writing to the Romans, he said: “For if you publicly declare that ‘word in your own mouth,’ that Jesus is Lord, and exercise faith in your heart that God raised him up from the dead, you will be saved. For with the heart one exercises faith for righteousness, but with the mouth one makes public declaration for salvation.”​—Rom. 10:9, 10.

When an individual dedicates his life to Jehovah, he will of necessity publicly declare the word about Jesus, his resurrection and the way of salvation for all mankind. In fact, he feels just as Paul felt when he said: “If, now, I am declaring the good news, it is no reason for me to boast, for necessity is laid upon me. Really, woe is me if I did not declare the good news!” (1 Cor. 9:16) This we have seen in the previous experiences set forth in the Yearbook, but now we want to go into detail in regard to the modern-day witnesses of Jehovah and how they got started in certain countries. You will be interested in reading these brief histories from the countries of Luxembourg, Newfoundland, which is an island in the North Atlantic, also South Africa, including the early beginnings of the work in Northern and Southern Rhodesia, and Nyasaland. These last three mentioned countries have had name changes since the early days of Jehovah’s witnesses. In conclusion, there is the history from Sri Lanka, which most people throughout the world know as Ceylon, in the Indian Ocean. The work in all these lands had early beginnings that were very small, but the acts of Jehovah’s witnesses in these countries are very interesting, in fact, fascinating, when you think about what a few people did, with the aid of God’s spirit, in preaching the good news. In these places today we see fine results and a great ingathering of a crowd of people that truly love Jehovah God. So let us go back in years and let time pass before our eyes as these stories bring us right up to 1975.

Luxembourg

Luxembourg, with its 999 square miles (2,585 square kilometers) and 350,000 inhabitants, is among the smallest countries in the world. It is located in the center of Europe, between France, Belgium and Germany. Although small, Luxembourg is an independent and sovereign state. It is highly industrialized. Yet, thick forests and rolling hills make it a pleasant land. Happily, too, Luxembourg has a constitution that guarantees freedom of religion, freedom of speech and freedom to form corporations.

For centuries Luxembourg was proudly known as a Catholic stronghold. Today, however, the government financially supports, not only the Catholic Church, but also the Protestant and Jewish religions. In spite of the motto of Catholic Luxembourg, “We’ll remain what we are,” over 700 Luxembourgers today are advertising the good news of God’s Word from house to house as Jesus Christ did. How has this come about? The answer is found in the modern-day history of Jehovah’s witnesses.

THE KINGDOM MESSAGE REACHES LUXEMBOURG

Already in the years 1922 to 1925 brothers from Strasbourg, France, distributed Bible literature in Luxembourg. This distribution started with the tract entitled “A Challenge” and ended with “Ecclesiastics Indicted.” At this time there were none of Jehovah’s witnesses living in Luxembourg. However, in 1929 the Watch Tower Society’s office in Magdeburg, Germany, dispatched Brother August Riedmiller to Luxembourg as a pioneer. When he married a pioneer sister from Lorraine, France, in the summer of 1930, she joined him in that territory. They distributed the books The Harp of God, Deliverance, Creation and Government, also some booklets and the magazine The Golden Age. A pioneer sister from Danzig, Germany, served for a short period together with this couple, and Brother Schröder, another pioneer, also was dispatched from Magdeburg, Germany, to Luxembourg.

A wonderful instrument for proclaiming the message among the people was the Photo-Drama of Creation, presented in four parts. The office at Magdeburg, Germany, sent brothers to Luxembourg to show this extraordinary Drama that acquainted viewers with the divine purpose, taking them from creation to the end of Christ’s millennial reign. In the year 1930 the Photo-Drama was shown in the city of Luxembourg and at Esch-sur-Alzette, as well as in many other places. In Luxembourg city, more than 300 persons were present every evening. In Esch-sur-Alzette, too, there was great success. Many addresses were handed in, and these people were visited by Brother and Sister Riedmiller.

CATHOLIC OPPOSITION BEGINS

The Catholic Church, which had long held the monopoly in regard to religion in Luxembourg, took steps to try to stop the progress of the truth of God’s Word. At its instigation, police regulations were made to discourage people from viewing the Drama and to create the impression that it was prohibited. This impression was furthered by means of false reports in the Catholic press.

Nevertheless, using the addresses received at public meetings held after the Photo-Drama, pioneers were able to find the first persons in Luxembourg who were truly interested in the truth. In the south, the first Luxembourger who endeavored to become a true footstep follower of Christ was Fred Gores. How he got started is expressed by his following words:

“On one of the evenings, when public meetings were held, I got acquainted with a man in his middle thirties. And we both expressed the desire to convey to other people the new truth learned. After talking it over at my home, we informed Mr. Riedmiller of our determination. Shortly after that, Mr. Riedmiller brought along a large supply of booklets with the title ‘The Kingdom, the Hope of the World,’ some books and a so-called testimony card. As far as I remember, this testimony card was written in two languages: one side was German, and the other, French. The purpose of calling was mentioned on this card, together with a brief witness about the end of the world and the hope of a paradisaic earth.

“We beginners, my partner and I, one day took courage and went to a street we picked out to make our first try. No one had shown us how it was to be done. We had never done anything similar before. In spite of that, we took good courage and fully trusted in Jehovah. He would assist us, we thought to ourselves. And, indeed, Jehovah did help us in his own way. In a friendly manner we greeted the people and presented the testimony card. While the people were reading the card, we opened the suitcase and displayed our literature. It is noteworthy that, right from the beginning, we each went to the doors alone, without any fear that someone would ask questions that we might not be able to answer. We knew that it was the truth we represented. This strengthened us and made us confident, come what may.

“I well remember the first house I visited. A kindly man, of advanced age and with an artificial limb, at once accepted the book Creation and ordered a Bible. We had a friendly conversation and I promised to return to him as soon as possible to deliver the Bible . . .

“The joy to have had such a fine reception at the first house gave me the needed strength to continue, although in the next houses the people were skeptical, yes, even rejecting the message. After a short while, the police appeared and made a quick end to our work. They confiscated our suitcases with all the contents, drew up a protocol and ordered us to go home. What else could we do? Of course, we complained to Mr. Riedmiller about these experiences but he comforted us by supplying us with new literature. We bought a new suitcase​—this time of cheap cardboard—​and we tried again. Gradually we became wiser, and, after repeated confiscations of our literature and equipment, we started to hide the literature in the pockets of our overcoats and went from door to door without a suitcase. In this way we were less conspicuous.”

In Luxembourg city it was especially Eugen Reuter who started the proclamation work, in 1931, using the booklet The Kingdom, the Hope of the World. But opposition was encountered here too. Brother Reuter recalls: “Repeatedly Brother Riedmiller, as well as other pioneers, had been stopped by the police in their preaching activity from door to door because of the law on peddling. The proclamation of the truth proved to be a thorn in the flesh of the Catholic clergy in particular. Because of freedom of religion being guaranteed by the constitution, our preaching could not be stopped. Therefore, the pretext of peddling was used in an effort to stop the witnessing. The attempt was, however, without success. Because of the resistance, our zeal was stirred up. In spite of court convictions and, at times, acquittals, more and more interested persons had an active share in witnessing. The police accused us of peddling and taking orders for books.

“After three years of activity by Brother Riedmiller, an important countermeasure was taken by the authorities. Brother Riedmiller was escorted by two policemen to the German border and expelled from Luxembourg. Our lawyer stated that top officials had explained to him that August Riedmiller was deported from Luxembourg to protect the Catholic Church in the country. After several months the police urged Sister Emma Riedmiller to leave the country too. The third pioneer from Germany voluntarily left the country sometime later because of his impending expulsion.”

By this means opposers expected to stop the preaching activity. But they had not taken into consideration that the seed of truth in the meantime had become well rooted. In time, the first Luxembourgers were ready for water baptism. On September 25, 1932, in a private bathing establishment in Esch-sur-Alzette, the baptism was held. Now the foundation was laid for the theocratic organization in Luxembourg and nothing could stop the progress.

SUPERVISION FROM SWITZERLAND

In 1933 the work of Jehovah’s witnesses in Germany was banned by the Nazis. So the office in Bern, Switzerland, took care of the brothers and interested ones in Luxembourg. Legal battles also were directed from there, as well as meetings for Biblical instruction; and the publishers were aided to organize and strengthen themselves spiritually. Brothers were sent from Switzerland to Luxembourg at regular intervals to serve as public speakers. This brotherly assistance soon produced further fine results.

The fifteen publishers already engaged in field service in 1934 distributed 3,164 books and booklets during that year, despite tremendous difficulties and resistance. To reach the villages in the north, these fifteen publishers frequently had to cover eighty miles a day by bicycle. With great exertion, they gradually visited and preached in all the villages and cities of the country.

With the increasing distribution of literature, the police reports accumulated as well. The unanimous decisions of the Court of Peace were consistently rendered as “guilty of colportage.” Again and again the brothers appealed these decisions and so their cases got to the Court of Appeal and finally to the Supreme Court. Even these higher authorities upheld the decisions of the lower courts, and again the Witnesses were pronounced guilty.

But these courageous fighters gradually observed that the people to whom they preached were divided into two groups. One group, under the influence of the clergy, was unfriendly toward the Kingdom witnesses and frequently assaulted them at the doors. Stirred up by this group, some policemen even went so far as to try to intimidate the Kingdom publishers with the words: “If you place even a single book, we will hang you from the highest tree.” Other law-enforcement officers apologized and stated: “You understand, we were called and we must do our duty.”

In 1936 the number of Kingdom publishers grew to nineteen, divided among three congregations. It was in this year, too, that some of these publishers traveled to a larger foreign assembly for the first time and returned home with new strength to continue their activity. At the assembly, in Lucerne, Switzerland, they met Brother Rutherford, president of the Watch Tower Society for the first time. How impressive it was for the brothers to witness the courage of this fighter for Jehovah! Brother J. F. Rutherford told the delegates from Germany that when they returned to that “cunning old fox in his den,” Adolf Hitler, they should give notice that God’s kingdom rules and that no power of this world would be able to bring about the downfall of Jehovah’s king. Then he raised his arm, as was done in salute to Hitler, but declared, “Hail Christ.” All these experiences and talks were very upbuilding for the brothers from Luxembourg. They again took courage to continue their activity.

As they did so, in addition to using testimony cards, they made greater use of the portable phonograph to play Biblical discourses for listeners. This method brought much joy to the brothers in Luxembourg; by their using this means to preach, the officials could not hinder them so much.

GERMAN INVASION

Suddenly, on May 10, 1940, Luxembourg was surprised by an invasion. In fact, almost all Europe was flooded with German troops with one blow. There was not much time to think about it. In the city of Esch-sur-Alzette, the officials decreed that all inhabitants should take the necessary things and leave at once for the French border.

On that day the activity of most of Jehovah’s witnesses practically ceased in the country of Luxembourg and the publishers were dispersed like a flock of sheep without a shepherd. The individual publishers faced severe trials during the next five years. Well-known brothers, who took the lead, were taken into protective custody because of reports made by some Germans who had settled here and who served as spies for the German army. After several months in the prisons of Luxembourg and Trier, the brothers were released but forbidden to do any preaching. However, even during these crucial war years it was possible to do some underground work, and, as a result, a few new disciples were baptized. Two brothers from Luxembourg, suspected of having continued preaching, faced a specially severe test. They were the only Witnesses from Luxembourg sent to the concentration camps.

FAITH TRIED IN CONCENTRATION CAMPS

One of these two brothers, Victor Bruch, supplies this report:

“In the prison of Trier we were given the familiar form to sign. By my signature I would confirm that I had followed a doctrine of error, that I disowned my faith, that I did not possess any literature from the Watch Tower Society, that I would not distribute it anymore, that I would report anyone who approached me with literature, and that I would respect all German laws. The Gestapo tried to weaken us by all means. When I persistently refused to accept these offers by not signing the form, the Gestapo took me into the concentration camp in Buchenwald/​Weimar, on January 2, 1941. First we two brothers were transferred to the penal settlement for three months and we had to work in a quarry, with poor food and not enough rest. I can never forget the following episode:

“When we arrived in Buchenwald, we were shaved bald, and chased naked to the bath across an icy street, then again across the street to the barracks where we were given clothes. There at a long counter we received from a prisoner our prisoner’s clothes, one piece after another, starting with the shorts. Behind this prisoner who supplied us with our things another prisoner stood, opposite me. Repeatedly he asked what there was new outside the camp. I did not reply. We were informed in prison that frequently the Gestapo disguised themselves in prisoner’s clothes in order to spy. I thought about this while he was asking and decided, ‘You’re not going to find out anything from me.’ As I received my final piece of clothing, he said to me: ‘You can talk to me, I am the same as you.’ It was indeed Brother Ernst Hassel from Saarbrücken. Later I understood this curiosity; the brothers had been in custody since 1937 and were cut off from the organization. The knowledge that one had was always pondered over and during the daily discussions at the various tables it was exchanged in fragments.

“After several months, it was in January 1942, the officials of the camp announced that if a prisoner possessed an additional pullover, besides the one received from the camp, he should hand it in immediately for the soldiers on the eastern front. Because all of Jehovah’s witnesses refused to supply even a handkerchief for war purposes they all had to stand for hours on the parade grounds on January 15, 1942. Then they took away the pullovers and, as a penalty, we had to work nights. Under floodlights we had to level a hilly area into a playing field. It was hard work after quitting time, with the soil frozen hard and with a temperature of −20 degrees Centigrade (−4 degrees Fahrenheit). Our shoes were taken away from us and we had to march wearing wooden clogs. But even during these hard times Jehovah assisted us. Only three weeks passed and all the clothing that had been taken away from us was placed in the prison block, neatly cleaned and repaired, with the remark that it was an overly hasty mistake. The officials in Berlin had not approved this method. . . .

“We were removed from our community block in the spring of 1943 and scattered in various political blocks. The camp management hoped to break the resistance of Jehovah’s witnesses in this way. But just the opposite occurred. Now we had a better chance to share our faith with others.

“In February 1944 craftsmen were needed in Lublin and so I was sent there. An effort was made to change us into being good Germans and not Luxembourgers anymore, much less witnesses of Jehovah. When I refused, I again had to go to a camp. My private clothes were torn from my body and I was brought to a secondary camp, in Pulawy. Here in Pulawy, a sawmill, we experienced terrible nights. The prisoners slept in a barracks together with the guards, separated from them only by a wooden partition. Almost every night there was repeated shooting between the partisans and the guards.

“As the Russians approached, we were deported to Auschwitz. Those brothers and sisters who had been in Auschwitz for a time had positions of trust. Several sisters were allowed to walk to the city without a guard to make purchases for their mistresses. In this way the sisters could contact brothers outside. They cared for a special, hard and dangerous job. They copied whole Watchtower articles into blue paper-covered school notebooks and tried to circulate them among as many as possible. I got some to read too. One theme I remember very well. It was ‘Consolation for the Dispersed Ones.’

“Again the Russians advanced. That meant for us a transfer to another area. It was a mad chase across Germany. Some of us were jammed into closed cattle cars and sent away. Our food for this journey was one loaf of bread. This had to last for three days. But in this case, too, we could rely on Jehovah’s wisdom. One brother told us: ‘If they already say three days, then we had better divide up our bread for six days.’ The fact was that ten days remained. At the stops we ate plantain (or ribwort), grass and anything that was growing near the railroad tracks, in order to keep from starving. On the eleventh day we arrived in Ravensbrück. More than 1,500 died of hunger during the last days of that trip. As soon as someone died, he was placed at the end of the railroad car and the carcasses were piled up in layers.

“In emergency barracks we were separated from the other prisoners by barbed wire. We had to be content with a half liter of vegetable soup and a slice of bread a day.

“Again the Russians seriously threatened the camp. This meant a transfer into another region. It was necessary to march for days. We brothers always tried to stick together. There were forty-nine brothers and one interested person who stuck together and encouraged one another. During one night there was shooting such as I had never heard before. When dawn broke we noticed, to our great astonishment, that the German guards had disappeared. After we washed ourselves, which for weeks had been very rare, we fifty went to the nearby village to find out what had happened. We observed there that all public buildings were occupied by Americans.

“Then we came together on a meadow at the outskirts of the village and a brother spoke a prayer of thanksgiving to Jehovah for His wonderful liberation. This took place on May 3, 1945, in Rubz. For days, we continued to march until the brothers gradually scattered so as to arrive at their homes. Jehovah had helped us to survive a difficult and trialsome time. This was possible only with his aid.

“On June 18, 1945, I arrived at home in Esch-sur-Alzette. To my greatest joy and gratitude, I there found my wife and children, who had arrived home only five days earlier than I. And this occurred after our being separated without any word from one another for almost two years.

“Through all these difficult years the text in Proverbs 3:5, 6 was a fine guide for me. It states: ‘Trust in Jehovah with all your heart and do not lean upon your own understanding. In all your ways take notice of him, and he himself will make your paths straight.’”

REORGANIZATION AFTER THE WAR

Shortly before the second world war, the Society’s office in Brussels, Belgium, had been instructed to supervise the activity of Jehovah’s witnesses in Luxembourg. Immediately after the war, this office dispatched a pioneer to Luxembourg. It was Brother Emil Schranz, the first Luxembourger pioneer. During the war he had served in Belgium. Now he visited all brothers known to him. Congregations were organized anew and the activity prospered. The year 1946 saw thirty active publishers, with a peak of thirty-nine.

Many organizational changes made after the war caused the work to grow rapidly. Instead of working with testimony cards and phonographs, the brothers themselves were enabled, through training received in the Theocratic Ministry School, to deliver public discourses and to give a witness at the doors. Also, the home Bible study activity progressed, and this caused tremendous prosperity.

An additional push for freedom of preaching was now advisable. It was decided to incorporate a nonprofit legal society to care for the Kingdom interests in a better way. On July 18, 1946, this important milestone was reached in the history of Jehovah’s witnesses in Luxembourg. Notice of legal registration was published in the Amtsblatt Memorial of October 23, 1946. This legal society has proved very useful to the brothers.

UPBUILT BY BROTHERS FROM BROOKLYN HEADQUARTERS

In 1947 there was another great event in the history of Jehovah’s witnesses in Luxembourg. The first large assembly was held there. Brothers F. W. Franz and Grant Suiter served the brothers with Scriptural words of counsel at this assembly. It was the first time that brothers from the Society’s Brooklyn headquarters had visited Luxembourg. A sister who was very young at that time later expressed her feelings about this occasion in these words:

“I cannot forget that these brothers had a meal together with us in the kitchen. I often thought that these brothers were used to speaking in larger and nicer halls than the one in Luxembourg, which was located beside a noisy bowling alley. But this did not hinder the two brothers from presenting a thorough witness and they did not complain in any way. On the morning of June 11, 1947, the baptism talk was delivered in French by a brother from Brussels and six brothers were baptized. This was for us a grand event. The public talk, delivered in German that evening by Brother Franz, had the theme ‘The Joy of All the People’ and was attended by 123 persons. Starting from this year, the brothers were encouraged to continue organizing larger meetings, such as circuit assemblies, which they did.

“Because of the fine success of this first big assembly, the brothers courageously organized and advertised the larger assemblies thereafter in the following way: A group of from four to six persons using bicycles with placards fastened on both sides rode about the town. All the streets were covered. Other brothers, wearing sandwich signs advertising the assembly, walked up and down the streets. Sometimes we were hit by stones, and almost always scolded.”

In March of 1949 the first Gilead School graduates, Brothers Nelson and Cummings, were sent to Luxembourg. They greatly strengthened the rather small organization, and through their initiative the street work with magazines was introduced. It served to advertise Jehovah’s kingdom more and more, but the Catholic Church showed a great desire to silence the witnessing activity.

The Society’s president, Nathan H. Knorr, was present at the first large international assembly held in Europe after the war, in Frankfurt am Main, August 24-26, 1951. Delegates from Luxembourg also attended. When Brother Knorr later stopped in Luxembourg to speak to the brothers, the occasion proved to be a great witness, and even today the brothers talk about it. This time it was possible to rent a nice hall, and the brothers endeavored to fix up everything the night before. But alas, the hall was used by other people till the last moment. Therefore our brothers had to put forth great effort. A conversation between two men who used the hall before us was overheard. One said to the other: “I am anxious to find out what the president of this society looks like.” A publisher who overheard this conversation was quick of mind and replied: “Oh, you don’t have to be anxious. The president is there, in front of the platform on a ladder, hanging some cloth with hammer and nails.” The two men were astonished. What a difference from the usual Catholic glorification of men! And on the following day one could see Brother Knorr as he rode a bicycle along with the brothers through the streets of the capital city to advertise his own talk. How fine and pleasant it was to observe that he himself engaged in the activity suggested from the assembly platform!

This short stopover by Brother Knorr proved to be a great blessing for the work in general and for this special meeting. The 205 in attendance who listened to his talk made up the largest theocratic meeting until that time in Luxembourg. All these events contributed to strengthening the internal organization, and in the same year the number of publishers increased to more than one hundred for the first time, as 113 publishers were active in the field service.

NOT PEDDLERS BUT PREACHERS

The years 1952 and 1953 brought big court cases again for the organization. Some publishers, among them minors, were stopped by the police as they engaged in their preaching activity in Fischbach, and an official report was made. They were accused of violating the law against peddling. When the case was presented, a young publisher defended herself so well before three judges that she was exonerated. But what happened to the older publishers? Because they were older persons they were found guilty during the same trial.

This decision caused a big change to take place for God’s people the following year, 1953. The Society’s lawyer distinctly impressed on the minds of the judges during the session in the Court of Appeal in Luxembourg that it did not make sense for the court in Mersch to exonerate one part of the group and find the other part guilty, since both groups did the same preaching work. This inconsistency even caused the public prosecutor to work in favor of the brothers. He himself proved to the high court that in this activity one cannot speak of “selling,” because this term includes a financial gain from which the seller lives. However, this is not the case with Jehovah’s witnesses, be they old or young, the public prosecutor argued. And what was the outcome this time? During its public session on March 26, 1953, the district court arrived at the following decision:

“In considering the facts that the latest Luxembourger Jurisprudence decided that the action of both appellants does not constitute any selling nor an offer to sell or take orders, there is consequently no violation of the law of 1.1.1850 about peddling. For this reason the first decision is reversed and both defendants are exonerated.”

Most of the police respected this great victory in behalf of Jehovah’s witnesses, and since that time no further court cases have arisen. The brothers are thankful to God that his people today enjoy religious liberty in Luxembourg.

It was at about the same time, in the year 1952, that the municipal government of the capital city granted the Witnesses use of the municipal banquet hall in the Clercle building, at the Paradeplatz. This event caused much astonishment because till then only the Catholics were accustomed to use it by permission of the government. From then on, the attitude of the authorities toward Jehovah’s witnesses became continually better and more tolerant.

BRANCH OFFICE ESTABLISHED

The year 1955 represented another milestone in strengthening the internal organization. After a stopover in Luxembourg in autumn of that year, Brother Knorr decided to open up a new branch office of the Watch Tower Society in Luxembourg. Thus that country would no longer be supervised by the Belgium branch office. This change resulted in enlarged activity. During the 1957 service year six active congregations had already been formed, and a peak of 230 publishers was reached. The magazine distribution increased from 16,157 in 1955 to 47,174 during 1956.

One who lives in such a small country as Luxembourg often thinks in small quantities. Therefore it is understandable that the sixteen delegates from Luxembourg who attended the 1958 international assembly in New York were astonished when they saw how large the organization was. They returned strengthened in their faith and had much to report to their fellow Witnesses there.

Brother Knorr visited Luxembourg again in 1960. The city of Luxembourg then gave Jehovah’s witnesses permission to use the city theater, and, on July 14, 502 persons attended the public talk. All of this, as well as the faith and patience of the local Witnesses, contributed to an increase to 303 publishers in 1961.

During the next year, eleven brothers from Luxembourg were called to the Kingdom Ministry School at the Society’s branch in Wiesbaden, Germany. This contributed very much to their training, which led to further progress in the organization. When they returned to their own congregations, they were able to take care of the Kingdom interests in an even better way.

PREACHING IN A VARIETY OF TONGUES

Although Luxembourg is a small country, foreigners from more than thirty nations are living there. When the Kingdom publishers go from house to house, it is not surprising for them to meet people speaking many different languages, so they have tried to advance the Kingdom interests among those various language groups. For instance, through patient, intensive visits it was finally possible in November 1963 to organize an Italian congregation with twelve publishers in the city of Luxembourg. In cooperation with the Society’s branch in Belgium, an Italian circuit assembly was held in Luxembourg for the first time in November 1967; 342 persons attended.

In this respect it is interesting to note that in Luxembourg the official language is French. But the people themselves speak the dialect of Luxembourg, which originated with the Celts and incorporates words from languages of neighboring lands.

In the neighboring country Belgium, where French is spoken, is a small territory consisting of many villages and towns where people still speak the German language. A few publishers were active among them, but they needed more opportunity to hear the good news in their own tongue. In the spring of 1965 it was decided that these people should be taken care of by the Luxembourg branch. By that October a congregation with twenty-two publishers was operating in the German-speaking area in Eupen. During May 1970, it was possible to organize a circuit assembly in this area.

However, the fine progress of the work directed from Luxembourg does not appeal to the opposer of God, Satan the Devil. He, too, has been active in many ways. The year 1965 was one of trials for the brothers. It has always been Satan’s tactic to sow misunderstandings, controversies and other problems among the brothers. This came increasingly upon the brothers in 1965. Some organizational changes were therefore made. Anton Letonja temporarily served as branch overseer for several months. Then Albert Steimann was sent to Luxembourg and was appointed as branch and district overseer. During this time of test, most brothers stood firm. Many understood much better the text in Psalm 127:1, where we read: “Unless Jehovah himself builds the house, it is to no avail that its builders have worked hard on it.” Jehovah’s organization has to be kept clean. A special pioneer who has served for eight years in the country remarked about this time, “The whole country prospered anew,” spiritually speaking. The year 1965 was crowned with a fine occasion, the first international assembly, where 3,835 delegates assembled for a spiritual banquet.

It was on June 5, 1968, that Brother Knorr arranged for the Society to purchase a building located in a very nice area of the capital city, for use as a branch office and missionary home. This building has contributed very much to the witness given and to further progress of the work. Alterations were also made to provide a very attractive Kingdom Hall. Stimulated by this building project, many other congregations seriously considered building their own Kingdom Halls.

RELIGIOUS CONTRAST

While the Catholic Church has lost much of its former power and influence here, spiritual prosperity, progress and blessing abound among Jehovah’s worshipers. Most people that these call on are polite, but show little interest in God’s Word. This is not surprising, since the authenticity of the Bible is doubted among the clergymen. In fact, one cleric in Luxembourg city remarked that the Bible is a book written by men who just expressed their own religious opinions. No wonder church attendance has decreased!

In contrast, however, publishers of the Kingdom message are upholding the Scriptures and have shown their desire to have a greater share in Jehovah’s service. For example, during the month of June 1975 there was a peak of 790 Kingdom proclaimers in Luxembourg.

Back in 1958, a government official visited the Society’s branch office and was astonished over the progress of Jehovah’s witnesses. Confidentially he mentioned that the Witnesses were then the second-largest religion in Luxembourg and he suggested that the Witnesses ask the government to support the work financially.

That they have not done, of course. Their reliance is placed on Jehovah, to whom belong “the beasts upon a thousand mountains,” as well as “the productive land and its fullness.” (Ps. 50:10, 12) The fact that God is giving them the increase is evident in that 1,519 attended the celebration of the Lord’s Evening Meal on March 27, 1975. How many of these persons, or others, will yet join them in Jehovah’s service is not known. Nevertheless, they are determined to continue preaching the good news in Luxembourg until the work is done. For this unspeakable privilege and the rich blessings they enjoy, their gratitude and praise ascend to Jehovah, their loving heavenly Father.

Newfoundland

Off the eastern coast of Canada is the seagirt island of Newfoundland. The sixteenth-largest island in the world, it is less than half the size of the United Kingdom, and has a population of 530,000 inhabitants. Newfoundland is magnificent with its primitive, rugged beauty and tortuous six-thousand-mile coastline of lofty crags, storm-scarred cliffs and dangerous breakers. The population​—mainly fishermen, loggers and trappers in its earlier days—​are hardy descendants of English, Scottish and Irish stock. To wrest a living from the sea and the rocky soil was a real test of endurance. Dominated for so long by clergymen of Christendom’s various sects, Newfoundlanders, for the most part, nevertheless have a fiercely independent spirit coupled with a respect for God and his written Word​—surely suitable soil for planting the message of truth by Jehovah’s modern-day witnesses!

One of Jehovah’s faithful servants, Edith Mason, a gentle forty-year-old woman, was busy spreading the Kingdom message in Canada’s mainland province of Nova Scotia in the year 1914. Only ninety miles separated her from Newfoundland, and she often found herself wondering about its people. ‘They need the message, too! How happy it would make them!’ She talked to the local brothers about taking the marvelous Photo-Drama of Creation over there. She was sure that this slide, motion picture and sound production outlining God’s purpose from creation through the thousand-year reign of Christ would benefit the Newfoundlanders. Though the time did not seem to be ripe for that step, she kept thinking on the matter.

Then, in quiet prayer one night, she resolved that she would go to pioneer there alone. That resolution was to have far-reaching results. Jehovah would use this courageous woman to satisfy many a truth-hungry person in Newfoundland. At first she could find no one who appreciated what she had to say. But, time and again, when she had a few pennies to spend, she found herself attracted to Skipper Gibbon’s place on Carter’s Hill. Here is how she tells the story:

“This old schooner captain ran a boarding house and loved to ‘yarn’ with the men of the north when they were in port. Many of the captains and merchant traders who came to the capital from the ‘outports’ boarded at this home. I soon discovered that if I would go to Skipper Gibbon’s for dinner on Sundays, many of these men . . . would be gathered at his hearth. Usually . . . a pious atmosphere prevailed, so I would start talking to them about the Kingdom.” Two of those men, young fishermen from Cat Harbour or Lumsden, a small village on the desolate northeast coast, were Eli Parsons and Wesley Howell. They were impressed by what they heard, accepted copies of Studies in the Scriptures and took them back to their distant homes.

It so happened that Wesley Howell was lay reader for the Methodist church on the north side of the settlement, and Edgar Gibbons, another of the group who obtained literature from Sister Mason, was lay reader of the church on the south side. They both decided that they now really had something to preach about. But one day the clergyman made a special visit to Wesley’s business office and bitterly remarked: ‘You are welcome to return to the pulpit, but leave your new religion out of it!’ Wesley flatly refused. The infuriated preacher retorted, ‘Your family will curse you for this,’ and stumped out.

About this same time the president of the Anglican Ladies Aid group happened to hear the concluding part of a talk given by Brother A. H. Macmillan, from the Watch Tower Society’s headquarters at Brooklyn, New York, on a subject that she should have known all about, namely, the Lord’s Prayer. A few days before she died in December 1970, at the grand old age of ninety-one, she was reminiscing about that night long ago: “The Orange Hall was packed out, but Wesley Howell managed to find us seats. Brother Macmillan was explaining the meaning of the Lord’s Prayer, and although I had been brought up in a strict Church of England home, I never knew its meaning. It was as if I had been in a dark dungeon all my lifetime and in those few moments Brother Macmillan had turned the light on. I had recognized the truth from just part of the last talk.” That former president of the Anglican Ladies Aid became Sister Mary Goodyear.

GAINING A FOOTHOLD

It was at that time that Brother Macmillan organized the first congregation of Jehovah’s people in Cat Harbour (Lumsden), in the year 1916. The Bible study group grew in number to over a dozen, some of the participants hiking many miles over sandy beach and around rugged shore, even in stormy weather.

Sister Mason, alone there in the capital, St. John’s, was still planning and praying that the Photo-Drama might yet be brought to Newfoundland, where many persons were still loyal to the Bible. By means of funds provided by friends where she had formerly been a colporteur, and with the help of a donation made by the Watch Tower Society’s president, Charles T. Russell, out of his own pocket, she finally arranged for Brother Black of Nova Scotia to bring the Society’s slides and projection equipment. So on May 5, 1916, the Photo-Drama started a three-week run in St. John’s. So many local citizens and visiting fishermen and traders from the outports and from Labrador came to see it that there was never enough room for the crowds. All together, 10,825 persons got to attend one or another of the fourteen evening and fifteen afternoon showings.

After the brothers had returned to their own assignments in Canada or elsewhere, Sister Mason decided to visit the little group at Lumsden. She used the opportunity to build some strong foundations for that remote little congregation. Quite a few who later were active publishers first gained an appreciation of God’s purposes at that time.

As the years passed, many different brothers visited Lumsden to nurture and strengthen the growing group. Everyone recalls the time when Brother Clifford Roberts visited from the “mainland.” An elderly man of the settlement, suffering from heart trouble, could not endure the long walk to the Orange Hall to hear the visitor’s public lecture. Much to everyone’s surprise, this old gentleman made arrangements to use the local church building; and there Brother Roberts spoke to an audience of several hundred. As the talk progressed, he was momentarily interrupted by a man who appeared at the rear of the church, shouting: “This group has taken over my church!” At the conclusion, the elderly man mentioned that he had hoped he would live long enough to hear the truth preached in church; that day his hopes were realized.

Sister Josephene Parsons of that area recalls the visit in 1927 of Brother John Cutforth, one of the “pilgrims,” as traveling representatives of the Society then were known. She chuckles as she relates this amusing incident: “We often wonder how John felt when he asked the man at the boarding house for a bed, and the reply was: ‘I don’t think I have one long enough for you.’ You see, Brother Cutforth was over six feet tall.”

Do you remember that clergyman’s prediction that Wesley Howell’s family would curse him for having turned away from Christendom’s teachings? A blessing resulted instead. Today a number of children, grandchildren and great-grandchildren of those early believers in Bible truth are to be found in the ranks of the pioneers in Newfoundland.

In 1945 about a dozen active Witnesses were organized into a congregation in Lumsden South. The same year the Lumsden North congregation converted the second floor of the “Cooper Shop” into a Kingdom Hall. Then, in 1947, the first Kingdom Hall in Lumsden South was built. Farther along the Straight Shore (so called because of its lack of harborage) are the congregations of Musgrave Harbour and Aspen Cove. These are made up of natural offspring, and many spiritual offspring too, of the original Witnesses in Cat Harbour or Lumsden.

PREACHING IN EARLY TIMES

The preaching activity of those earlier days bespeaks the love, courage and tenacity of the preachers of the good news. There were no roads and only a few narrow trails. During the 1930’s and the 1940’s many a journey had to be made by boat in rough seas and stormy weather. Seasickness often plagued the Witnesses. One of Wesley Howell’s daughters relates this experience: “After a fifteen-mile boat trip to Wesleyville, we would walk the five miles to Templeman. This wasn’t easy, as we scrambled over rocky paths, struggled through wet, springy bogs, loaded down with a suitcase [of literature] in one hand and a phonograph in the other. Many times we would place our phonographs down as steppingstones, then struggle with our suitcases to pull our tired bodies over the bog. . . . In many localities groups of jeering young boys used to follow us around as we went to different homes to play the lectures. One of those former scoffing lads became an overseer in Lumsden. His elderly parents, along with his wife and family, are Jehovah’s witnesses. Two of his children are in the full-time service.”

What had Sister Edith Mason and her companion Sister Whitmore been doing since we last heard from them? In 1918 Christendom’s clergy were taking advantage of the war fever to rid themselves once and forever, as they thought, of the pestiferous Bible Students. We gain some idea of the ludicrous lengths to which they would go from what these harmless lady missionaries report of their experiences: “Newfoundland was the last point of the North American continent and from here the Marconi Trans-Atlantic Station served the allied nations in the Atlantic and across the sea. Then someone tried to shoot the Marconi operator. For several months we had been called spies. Sister Whitmore and I were often charged with being German undercover agents, and we were [accused of] carrying weapons under our dresses. The people were suspicious and full of fear. Then on September 1, 1918, they deported us as suspects in the Marconi case.” Of course, the sisters were completely innocent.

During the years 1919 to 1923 the congregations kept growing slowly: one small group at Port Union, five persons at St. John’s and the Lumsden group. In the latter area it had reached the point where the clergy no longer visited; their flocks had been spoiled. In 1924 the persevering Sister Mason arrived back at St. John’s, this time determined to work the whole island on the railway, called the “Newfie Bullet,” or on the boats stopping at the island’s outports.

Here is how she tells about it: “In the summer of 1924 and on into 1925 I traveled much of the country. Sometimes I would sail on the government mail boats, the Susa, Prospect, Clyde or Portia. Every time I got awfully seasick. Other times I would catch a schooner from harbor to harbor. They would land me at all hours of the night on some dismal wharf, while a lonely foghorn kept me company. I carried my books in flour and sugar barrels, so I would often spend the night repacking and sorting them so I could cover the cove and move on to the next. . . . Ofttimes I would have to be up by four in the morning to hitchhike a boatride.”

Together with another partner, this time Sister Ann Dowden of Halifax, Sister Mason toiled through the summer and winter of 1926, sailing the coast of Newfoundland, preaching the Kingdom at every opportunity. Then, in 1926, she left the island for the last time. Many years later, her kindly eyes blinded by cataracts, she reminisced: “People have asked me why I loved it there. I hardly know myself. I guess I saw the joys of people getting their spiritual eyes opened to the truth. . . . I always felt Jehovah’s hand on my work, and I feel so happy to have had a share in the vindication of his dear name.” Many of the “seeds” she had sown grew into healthy “plants” displaying Jehovah’s glory!

A NATIVE SON RETURNS

It was August 29, 1929. The place? A small fishing village at the extreme easterly tip of the Avalon Peninsula facing on the stormy Atlantic. One of the native sons of Bay de Verde, Jack Keats, had just arrived back in his hometown after spending some time on the “mainland.” To the amazement of his family and friends, he began to preach to them​—beliefs that sounded strange indeed to the ears of the conservative inhabitants.

Happily Jack Keats’ family listened to what he had to say and appreciated it. Then he started witnessing to his cousin William, better known as “Billy Jim” Keats, a staunch church member, active in the Orange Lodge, member of the choir and a highly respected family man. Billy Jim listened attentively, but did not accept everything at once. He wanted proof, and that was what he got. The ‘fiery hell’ tradition of his church was one of the vital topics of discussion. It was not that he really wanted to believe in a place of endless torment. But if it was wrong, what of his church? Where did it stand? The discussions led to the truth of the matter. During the busy fishing season of 1930 Billy Jim did not get to church regularly. He would take the opportunity to rest. Ah, but the real reason was that his mind was being transformed. The seed of truth had been sown on fine soil. (Mark 4:8, 20) Shortly thereafter, Billy Jim broke all ties with Babylon the Great.

Meantime Jack Keats’ brother Isaac, who had readily accepted the Kingdom teachings, began to fail in health. Before his death he made it clear that he would have no clergyman preside at his funeral and he did not want to be buried in the Anglican cemetery. The family determined upon a small strip of land above the village. That decision drew the ire of the clergy and their henchmen. Why, it was not even “consecrated ground”! Moreover, the parson flatly refused to issue a death certificate. In spite of it all, the funeral service was conducted by Brother Earle from St. John’s and the remains were interred in the ‘unconsecrated’ plot of land.

The clergyman complained to the Department of Health about the burial in the open field, under pretext of being concerned about the welfare of the local community. A policeman and a local magistrate turned up to investigate the matter, but they were given a witness and left satisfied that everything was in order. Earlier the clergyman had moved to have the children of all Witness parents and of those who had helped with the funeral in ‘unconsecrated’ ground barred from the schools, most of which were denominational. Only those children whose parents apologized to him would be permitted to return and attend classes. The brothers took the case to the Board of Education in St. John’s and the clergyman was ordered to permit the return of all children, and that without apology. The Witness children were ignored and scorned by their schoolmates, and the teacher paid as little attention to them as the law would allow, but the parson had suffered a great fall from his position as unquestioned boss of the community.

Jack Keats soon ranged farther afield to preach the good news in many other parts of Newfoundland, traveling at times by pony and cart, or by train or fishing boat. In order to keep on ‘fishing for men’ he would from time to time return to fishing for fish. (Matt. 4:19) In 1939 he became quite ill and had to spend practically two years in a sanatorium in St. John’s, thereafter returning to Deer Lake, where he made his home.

Jack’s cousin Billy Jim later took up where Jack had left off in the Bay de Verde area. Accompanied by his wife, he traveled around by horse and buggy, playing Bible-sermon records on his phonograph for anyone who would listen, and most people did listen in those days. There were no hotels and restaurants. But folks were hospitable, and, when mealtime came around, the publishers would accept the generous invitation to share what the householders had on their tables. At the close of a long day in the field service, when darkness turned the sea into inky blackness, and oil lamps began to flicker in the windows of these humble homes, they would accept the kind offer: “Put your horse in the barn and stop for a spell.” Then, while the animal was bedded down for the night, Billy Jim and his wife would talk to their hosts into the wee hours of the morning and then snatch some rest before the start of another day.

Others besides Billy Jim and his wife were growing spiritually. How do we know? Because one summer day in 1939 when a brother from St. John’s arrived to conduct a baptism, there were six excited people offering themselves as candidates. They all walked the three miles over the rugged hills to a pond, and there they gave outward evidence of the dedication of their lives to God. Then followed many years of endurance in the Kingdom work in the face of indifference and apathy on the part of the population of Bay de Verde. In 1965 two special pioneers were assigned to help the congregation, and as a result, publishers were trained and the meetings were placed on a firm basis, with programs that aided one and all to improve their field service. In 1971 the congregation completed the building of a fine Kingdom Hall.

PREACHING THE GOOD NEWS BY BOAT

Still the available territory in Newfoundland had barely been scratched. Its 42,000 square miles had only five communities with a population exceeding 5,000. Even the capital, St. John’s, had no more than 55,000 inhabitants at the close of World War II. That meant that the major part of the population lived in hundreds of small hamlets and settlements scattered along the 6,000 miles of wild shoreline. The Witnesses came to realize that the sea was the most accessible way of contacting the people.

Over the years the Watch Tower Society provided for the purchase of four different boats to be used in this work. The first of these, the “Morton,” was a coastal vessel, sixty-six feet long, sleek and beautiful as viewed from the wharf. F. J. Franske, placed in charge of the boat by the Society, tells of the experience he shared with another brother:

“At the beginning of May in 1929, Jimmy James and I were sent to Newfoundland from Canada to take over the operation of the Society’s coastal vessel ‘Morton.’ . . . We found the Newfoundlanders a warm and friendly people whose hospitality is an outstanding quality. And even when they disagreed with us they would still hear us out and treat us courteously. One thing that puzzled us at first was their habit of not answering the door when we knocked. Sometimes they would sit by the window and watch us stand on their doorstep but would not come to the door. . . . It appears that due to isolation, the people became so intermarried that no one was considered a stranger and they simply walked in and out of one another’s homes as if they were of the same family. . . . Every family, it seemed, had its tragic story of loved ones who had gone to the sea and did not return. We called on many of these bereaved ones and comforted them with the clear truth of God’s Holy Word, the Bible.”

The economic depression had hit Newfoundland hard. Many were destitute. The old-age pension was but $50 a year. Ninety percent of the population were engaged in fishing​—hard work with very small returns. A quintal (112 pounds) of fish sold for $5.50 or less. Hardships were as certain as death and taxes. People offered in return for Bible literature homespun garments, mittens, socks, sweaters, sealskin leather goods, furs, trinkets made of whalebone and ivory, and dried fish. And, of course, the appearance of the “Morton” in many a cove was unwelcome to some, particularly the clergy. They would decry the Witnesses, call them false prophets, forbid their parishioners to read Watch Tower literature or even to receive the Witnesses in their homes. We can relive those experiences as we read from Brother Franske’s diary:

“We tried to work Presque, Bonah, St. Kyrans and Paradise without success. All had been warned by the ‘Father,’ who did not want to have his nest ruffled. The visit to Flat Islands compensated for all of this. The entrance to the harbor is very rocky, and a fisherman in a dory came out to meet our boat and pilot us into the harbor. Both men and women came aboard the ‘Morton’ in crowds. . . . We never had such a reception before. We gave them some music and a talk and they remained until midnight. These people were hungry for the truth. The next day they showered us with flowers. . . . Although they were poor, we placed many books, and we answered many Bible questions.”

The following season, 1930, the “Morton” again sailed forth, this time with a new partner for Brother Franske​—Philip Parsons, a fisherman from Rose Blanche who was well acquainted with boats and sailing under difficulties. It was well that this was so, for it had been decided to journey northward and work all the islands and the coastline in the Notre Dame and White Bay areas. In June such a trip can be exciting. The ice floe is on in full force. “Growlers” (the name sailors give to the mammoth structural monuments from the Arctic) glisten like huge castles in the sun. They may resemble anything from square floating blocks to cathedrallike apparitions with tall spires. Then, too, there are the seemingly endless fields of broken drift ice that can make sailing hazardous. To avoid being crushed, the crew of the “Morton” had to keep their pike poles busy, fending off the larger chunks of ice. The hazards of the journey were amply rewarded by the delight of preaching the message to people who had never heard it before. Thousands of pieces of literature were placed.

GROWTH CONTINUES

The group in the city of St. John’s was growing numerically and had the benefit of many visits by traveling representatives of the Society. For example, M. A. Howlett came over in 1927. Later Brother Cutforth was there. The Society’s radio programs were heard regularly through a Nova Scotia station. However, there was little real boldness for the proclamation of the Kingdom message. It seemed that there was an element in the congregation that hindered the flow of Jehovah’s spirit. With the acceptance of the name “Jehovah’s witnesses,” in 1931, it became clear that there was a division. Some preferred the soft term “Bible Students.” They managed to influence the major part of the congregation, only a few standing firm and loyal in support of the Watch Tower Society’s worldwide work. The August 15 and September 1, 1932, issues of The Watchtower with their articles on “Jehovah’s Organization” shook out any remaining weak ones. Some of the congregation’s former “elective elders” and their hangers-on thereafter became prominent in local society, and even moved into the good graces of the clergy. The few faithful ones now had the advantage that they had been cleansed from all the influence of the fearful and halfhearted ones.

Attention now turns to the second-largest community in Newfoundland, Corner Brook, on the west coast. Sister Mason had been there in 1923, but no real effort had been made to search for sheeplike ones thereafter. Then in 1933 Earl Senior, a dedicated Newfoundland brother, was working with the Department of Highways, and business took him to Corner Brook. While there he started distributing the booklet Where Are the Dead? He found ready ears in a small woodworking shop where Alfred Johnson and Reuben Barnes worked together. That booklet was all that was needed to open their eyes.

Soon a new study group had been formed and later, when Lloyd Stewart was sent there by the Society’s Canadian branch, he organized a small congregation with the Barnes and Johnson families as its nucleus. Little Reta Johnson and young Gus Barnes shared in those early meetings. Both were later to become Gilead School missionaries and have a goodly share in the development of the Kingdom activity in Newfoundland.

Jack Keats later joined the Barnes and Johnson families at Corner Brook and a vigorous campaign of preaching the good news of the Kingdom got under way. No opportunity to preach was overlooked. At lumber camps, fishing communities, among river log drivers, on midnight railway trains​—everywhere the phonograph sermons were played and Bible truth was discussed. The clergy-dominated town of Corner Brook was in a real uproar!

Again the question of consecrated ground for burial became the issue. Once more the local townsfolk and the clergy were shocked when the brothers went ahead and buried their dead in their own ‘unconsecrated’ plot. The full import of these incidents may not be fully appreciated today when religious leaders and their practices are suspect; but in those days the clergyman’s word was law and any defiance of the church-established traditions was sacrilege.

MOVING IN ON THE CAPITAL

While Corner Brook was the scene of these happenings, the Society’s branch in Canada sent a very devoted couple to St. John’s to care for the interests of the Kingdom in Newfoundland. They were Ray and Betty Gillespie. A depot for literature was built and a sound car began to be used throughout the area, broadcasting to large crowds everywhere the powerful voice of J. F. Rutherford, at that time president of the Watch Tower Society. An interesting incident is told about those stirring times when the distraught clergy were instigating violence against the Witnesses:

‘Once while Brother Gillespie was playing a transcription record from the sound car on Bell Island, a crowd began to throw rocks at him. One young boy was goaded into throwing some of the rocks. It was his rock that hit the machine and stopped it. That night the boy went home sad, sick at heart. Through the years the matter plagued him often. One day, years later, a pioneer called on that boy, now a grown man, and started a study with him. After the study he wanted to unburden himself by a confession of what had weighed on his heart for so long. He told of his guilt and sorrow and asked for forgiveness. That man later became a Witness.’

The 1930’s were a difficult period for Jehovah’s people in Newfoundland, and particularly so in St. John’s, where tempers often flared, where shouting matches, throwing of stones and challenges to fight were common. Into this atmosphere came Brother and Sister Ernest Ellis, who had experienced mob violence in the United States. They faced many challenges. For example, one morning when Brother Ellis was working in the east end of the city some women with their families, instigated by the priests, attacked him and tore up his Bibles and books. Ernest stood his ground and would not budge until he could get the police. He pushed the matter to court, where a fair-minded judge severely chastised the attackers, to the great surprise of the citizenry. Fearlessly Brother Ellis went back into that same area again and again with the message of peace and comfort.

While in St. John’s, Ernest had a neighbor who was a contact for men arriving in St. John’s from an outport called Princeton. After visiting with Ernest, those men went home to Princeton as Jehovah’s witnesses. The interest aroused in that part of Newfoundland was strong. Later that area produced several missionaries as graduates from Gilead School.

Brother Ellis also initiated efforts to obtain a local charter, forming the International Bible Students Association of Newfoundland Limited. This was early in 1940.

By now the local authorities had had enough of Ernest Ellis. Steps were taken to deport him as a foreigner preaching a foreign religion. But Ernest aroused the brothers, and suddenly the authorities were faced with a strong delegation of native Newfoundlanders who held their ground successfully, so that Ernest stayed on. An amazing number of signatures to a petition in his behalf was a powerful factor in this result. Even some “enemies” signed the petition because they admired the fighting spirit of this little man. Later, when World War II was threatening and it seemed that another attempt to deport him would succeed, the Watch Tower Society recalled him to the United States, and the opposers never got the satisfaction of kicking him out of the country, as they had planned.

World War II came in 1939. The arrival of The Watchtower through the mails became almost impossible due to the tight censorship that was instituted. However, an American soldier stationed at Fort Pepperrell on the outskirts of St. John’s became interested and subscribed for the magazine. His mail got through without difficulty, so eventually the brothers could count on his copy. They purchased a mimeograph machine, and in this way were able to supply the one hundred subscribers throughout Newfoundland. But difficulties were multiplying. Those zealous fighters for righteousness who were not native to Newfoundland were being pressured into leaving, if not deported outright. What was to happen next?

Back in Corner Brook young Gus Barnes had grown up. His father, Reuben, was always kindly, firm for truth and devoted to the spread of the good news. Often he would speak to Gus about the great issues involved and the need to tie close together all the interests in Newfoundland and establish the organization on a country-wide basis. “I wish I were young and could do that work,” he would say.

So, it was a happy day for old Reuben when his boy came and told him that he had decided to spend the rest of his life in the pioneer service. Gus saved sufficient money that winter to buy his train ticket to St. John’s and to get together a few items of equipment. He told his plans to another young man in Pasadena, Newfoundland, and he decided to accompany him. So, in the spring of 1940, Gus Barnes and Herbert Dawe arrived in the capital, Gus with but $5.27 in his pocket. And during the next ten years, despite problems and difficulties, he was never any poorer financially.

IN TROUBLESOME TIMES

At the literature depot Brothers Barnes and Dawe met Dougal McCrae, a Canadian pioneer who was about to be deported. He told them that the government was about to impose a ban on all Society literature, and that the supply of recordings and books in the depot was therefore in danger of confiscation.

The brothers hit upon a plan. They loaded most of the literature and records into Brother Howell’s schooner for shipment to Lumsden. More was sent to Princeton and other smaller places. When the authorities did crack down on the depot, it was too late​—the shelves were practically bare.

Meantime, Brothers Barnes and Dawe could see that during the war it would be best to confine their Kingdom activities to the distant outports along the wild coast. ‘I was no sailor,’ Gus Barnes admitted, ‘for I knew nothing about the tides and the storms, the charts and the compass, the breakers and the dangers of the ever-turbulent sea.’

It took a lot of ingenuity and determination to re-outfit the Society’s thirty-one-foot motorboat, which, with high hopes for the future, they called “Kingdom Boat No. 1.” The brothers at Princeton were a fine source of encouragement. There Bob Moss joined the crew, helping to build up their confidence for the job they were now undertaking. Says Brother Barnes: ‘The very first day of our seagoing ministry was a wild one, our little boat digging into the waves in a frightening sort of way. Our first port of call, Salvage, was populated by staunch supporters of the Church of England. The result: we soon were being stoned and driven from the harbor as German spies. In fact, someone in the village sent word to the police to the effect that we were playing a phonograph record entitled “Hitler Can’t Lose.” We retired gracefully and got to work in another quieter cove, though all day long we kept hearing that the police were coming for us. When we went ashore Bob and I separated, he going in one direction while I went in the other, with the idea that we should meet with each other later in the day.

‘At last, long hours beyond the expected time, I did meet up with him. As I rounded a point in a lonely part of the road, there I saw Bob playing a record for the benefit of a tall policeman who towered above him. The recording had reached the point where Brother Rutherford was lining up all those on the Devil’s side at Armageddon. “On the Devil’s side,” boomed out the powerful voice, “at Armageddon will be the armies and the navies of all the nations, the police power, the police power, the police power . . .”​—the record kept repeating at that one spot! Bob was red as a beet, and, fearing the worst, I was wondering if I should run, when suddenly, seeing the humor of the situation, the officer laughed out loud. In fact, he became one of our good friends thereafter.’

Continuing his story, Gus Barnes went on to say: ‘It was a day of big swells when a nervous, sea-frightened crew neared the dangerous coast at Cat Harbour (now Lumsden) at the mouth of Dead Man’s Bay. No stranger could ever make entry into that tricky cove, so as we hovered out there among the rocks, what a relief to see a big fisherman’s boat bearing down on us! The hearty, handsome fisherman who welcomed us was Elmore Howell, who was to become like a father to us in our endeavors of the years to come. Here in Lumsden the friends fed us, encouraged us, replaced some of our worn equipment, provisioned our boat and sent us on our way to some of the bays to the north. They spoke of Sister Mason, of Brother Macmillan, as well as Brothers Howell and Parsons who had pursued the truth from back in 1915.’

When winter came, it was impractical to continue with the boat; so the alternative was to take to the trails with a sled loaded with phonograph, Bibles and literature. Gus Barnes tells of times when he placed as many as 500 books in a month. On the other hand, there was the accusation that they were “spies.” On one occasion at least, that meant sleeping outside, curled up on a sled, watching the northern lights. That one night that Gus spent outside “turned the tables,” so to speak, for the people of the community became intensely interested in him and were sure he was no “German spy.”

The authorities at that time had begun to raid various homes of the Witnesses where they expected to seize ‘outlawed’ literature. But the stores of literature were safely hidden away where only a few had access to them, and so it was possible, from time to time, for congregations and pioneers to replace their stock and carry on with the Kingdom work, using the Bible alone in their initial approach to the homes.

In the early spring of 1941 Gus Barnes and Bob Moss were back in Princeton to spend some weeks readying the boat for another summer’s voyage. That gave opportunity to help the group there to get well organized for Watchtower studies and for a weekly book study in the book Salvation. “While there that spring,” Gus reports, “I often talked with Ford and Bill Prince, two young boys who were extremely interested in what we were doing. I didn’t realize then that both of those boys would move on from those early talks we had to become pioneers and later go through Gilead School and be sent out as missionaries.”

The second summer voyage of the good boat “Kingdom No. 1” was exciting, to say the least. At Lumsden, Brothers Moss and Barnes were baptized, though they had now been preaching for several years. Then they headed for Lewisporte. Gus Barnes tells what happened: ‘The boat was leaking, so we put into a small cove several miles from Lewisporte. We decided to fix the leak here, so early that morning we carried our literature and provisions back into the woods and covered them with a tarpaulin to guard against rain. But news of our presence got around quickly​—“a strange boat with speaker horns on the roof, perhaps German spies!” Suddenly we found ourselves surrounded by a group of Canadian Army soldiers. They towed us under guard to Lewisporte, where the whole town turned out to see these desperate prisoners. . . . I demanded to see the officer in charge. When this was denied, I told the captain that in view of the agreement between the Canadian military and the independent state of Newfoundland his men were interfering with civilians and encroaching upon the authority of the local police. Then I demanded to be taken to the Newfoundland police. Soon the police were satisfied and we were on our way. We stopped only long enough to pick up our cache of literature, and then we made for the far northern peninsula. Thereafter police and customs officers were often our visitors, but many of them did not even have a copy of the ban, so they left us alone. By fall we were back in Corner Brook after an exciting summer in which we had placed thousands of pieces of literature.’

By the end of 1941, Gus Barnes and his companion were back in St. John’s, living in the depot and striving to build up again what had become a very small study group. Materialism and fear had cooled the affections of many. It was even being said, ‘Perhaps the work is finished.’ With some the wish doubtless was father to the thought. Then came news of the death of Brother Rutherford on January 8, 1942. What was ahead?

CONTACTING BROOKLYN HEADQUARTERS

Brother Barnes tells how the publishers got the answer to that vital question: ‘Jehovah knew our needs and almost as if by a miracle the February 1, 1942, Watchtower came into my hands. It proved to be the right thing at the right time. Its article “Final Gathering” showed how Jehovah purposed to have a great “fishing and hunting work” done. The Newfoundland brothers were familiar with literal fishing and hunting, and this fitted them for the work that lay ahead. The brothers knew that there was much work to be done, and they were ready to do it, but they needed help and instructions from the Society. But how, in view of the censorship and other circumstances of the ban?’

Ford Prince volunteered. Soon he was hired on a passenger vessel as a merchant marine. He was undaunted by the fact that German U-boats were sinking many ships. He knew his mission. The brothers in Newfoundland needed help in getting a good, seaworthy boat, literature and other materials for the advancement of the Kingdom work. In Brooklyn he explained the situation to Milton Henschel of the office of the Society’s president, N. H. Knorr, and was assured that all the problems would be taken care of right away.

Because of duties aboard ship, Ford could not stay for dinner, but he returned the next day. Sure enough, there was a package for him containing literature and phonograph records. This was but the first of many important trips he was to make bearing precious cargo for his brothers at home. Through a letter from Brother Knorr, Gus Barnes learned that funds would be made available for the purchase of a better boat. For only $600, Brother Barnes bought a beautiful forty-two-foot yacht. So, before long, a new Kingdom boat called “Hope” was put to work in spreading the good news.

The plan was to work the south coast from Port-aux-Basques on to Placentia Bay. At Burgeo, a port of entry, the customs men and the Mounted Police boarded the “Hope.” They knew of the ban on the literature, and wanted to act, but they hesitated and decided to await instructions from St. John’s. One of the crew members of the “Hope” relates:

‘That night, as the fog rolled in and the coast was shrouded in blackness we decided to chance it with our small dory and take out all our literature, records and equipment, with the idea of hiding them in some lonely cove. They had posted no watch on us. Then an amazing thing happened! Around midnight we heard the coastal steamer whistle its way to anchor in a fogbound harbor on the outer shores. We quickly got our compass and charts and rowed through the fog until we picked up that steamer’s bearing lights. Climbing the rope ladder and walking along the deck, we managed to contact the purser and told him we had a shipment we wanted to make. He was agreeable to accepting it, and in no time we had our dory empty and all our theocratic equipment was shipped down the coast some seventy miles. In the morning the officers were there, as we had expected, to take everything we had. They found nothing! They were for keeping us in port indefinitely, but we protested to the government and an order was issued for them to release us.

‘Several weeks later we arrived at the port where we had more or less blindly sent our literature. The local merchant, out of curiosity, had opened one of the cartons and was thoroughly enjoying the book Enemies when we arrived. Indeed, he provided us with facilities to wrap up and mail literature back to all the interested persons whose names and addresses we had noted down. When that same coastal vessel headed back up the coast again, it carried hundreds of books and booklets in neat packages addressed to points all the way up as far as Burgeo.’

Then came the fall, with high gales and lashing seas. The “Hope” was on the coast of Burin Peninsula, one of the southerly tips of Newfoundland. On the way to Epworth an incident occurred that did much to remove the stigma of “spies” and “smugglers” that had clung to the “Hope” like barnacles. Here is Gus Barnes’ log entry: ‘We were sailing a stormy sea on a dismal coastline when we heard gunshots from somebody in distress. By maneuvering we finally managed to signal the drifting boat with thirteen people aboard, mostly women and children. They had gone adrift and were in grave danger of being swept out into the terrors of the winter ocean. During many hours they had been crying for help. We were able to revive them, serving hot drinks, and then towed them to their home port of Corbin. Here the whole town is Catholic, but these people were our friends now, and we could speak the Kingdom message to them.’

FREEDOM TO EXPAND

The ban on the importation and distribution of literature published by the Watch Tower Society was lifted in March 1945. That was surely a time for great expansion of the Kingdom interests in Newfoundland. A shipment of 75,000 pieces of literature was ordered from the Brooklyn headquarters. Also, a branch office was established in the former depot, graduates of the Watchtower Bible School of Gilead were assigned to serve in the major cities, and circuit and district overseers were appointed to visit the congregations and organize upbuilding semiannual assemblies. Thus, the organization became more firmly knit together.

Soon the branch premises were outgrown and new and larger quarters were secured on June 6, 1946, at 239 Pennywell Road, St. John’s. Charles Clemons, one of the newly arrived missionaries, was appointed branch overseer. Arrangements were made to have the missionaries concentrate on the two largest communities, St. John’s and Corner Brook. The boat “Hope” continued to carry the Kingdom message to isolated coastal villages. But with the passage of the years, roads began to crisscross the island. Other conveniences followed, and preaching by way of the sea diminished in importance. Practically all settlements, with the exception of the south and the Labrador coasts, soon could be reached by road.

Back in the 1940’s circuit overseers still experienced difficulties of travel, however. George Stover, for example, tells of one hazardous trip: ‘The return trip was not easy. The country was in the grip of winter, and during the thirty-three-mile walk the temperature dropped to 20 degrees below zero Fahrenheit. The first night I stayed with some men in a woods camp, and took the opportunity to talk to them. Next day I began the last lap of my journey. I started out across a lake. Before I reached the other side, a storm blew up and closed the trail so that I could not see where I was going. I placed my briefcase down on the snow, sat on it and began praying for direction. With renewed confidence I picked up my case and after a few steps I came upon fresh tracks in the snow coming from another direction on the lake. My only hope was that this trail would take me in the right direction. Darkness was settling. Soon I would be unable to see the trail. Then, as I raised my head and looked straight forward, to my joy I could see the lights of the town. How grateful I was to Jehovah for his care and protection!’

In 1946 Gus Barnes and Ford Prince were invited to the first international class of Gilead missionary training school following the war. Both thereafter returned to Newfoundland, Brother Barnes to continue in circuit service and Brother Prince to supervise the operations of the “Hope.” The vessel still had much to do in behalf of the Kingdom interests before being taken out of service in December 1955. Scores of isolated persons had been contacted during its years of activity, many of them to become themselves active publishers of the Kingdom and associates in the increasing number of congregations.

The 1946-1947 service year proved to be outstanding for the brothers in Newfoundland. Eight pioneers and thirty-eight publishers placed a total of 25,000 pieces of literature. But the crowning joy of 1947 was the summer assembly when Brothers Knorr and Henschel were the specially welcomed visitors. This was the first time that a president of the Watch Tower Society visited the island. “Permanent Governor of All Nations” was the title of the widely advertised lecture on that occasion. Brother Knorr himself had the joy of sharing in the advertising when he went aboard the “Hope” and, with the help of its sound equipment, made announcement all around St. John’s harbor concerning the forthcoming lecture.

Charles and Eva Barney, better known among Newfoundlanders as Barney and Eva, were assigned as missionaries to the Corner Brook area​—a widely scattered territory. On their arrival, they found that the original group had moved away, leaving just a couple of interested families. No preaching activity at all was being reported to the branch office. But during the following six years, when the missionaries were tramping up and down the hills of the neighborhood, there was a great transformation. When the Barneys left, there was a thriving congregation praising Jehovah in Corner Brook.

Walter and Grace Kienitz, another missionary couple who came with the first group assigned to Newfoundland in the autumn of 1945, have now spent thirty years on the island. In 1962 they received an assignment to work Argentia and surrounding settlements, where much of their territory involved witnessing to the personnel of the United States Navy stationed there. A goodly number of wives, particularly, accepted the message of the Kingdom, and then, sooner or later, moved back to the United States.

By the year 1952, there were 21 congregations, with 315 publishers, busy in Newfoundland. In that year also, M. F. Latyn was appointed branch overseer.

Year after year new congregations were established and added their efforts to the spread of the Kingdom message. In 1952, a new congregation was formed at Bonavista as the result of the labors of Gilead-trained missionaries Bernard and Elizabeth Mahler. Another congregation was formed at Joe Batt’s Arm in 1953; also congregations at Stephenville, Musgrave Harbour and Mount Pearl in 1955; at Port-aux-Basques and Epworth in 1957, as a result of the activity of Gilead graduates; and one at Norris Point in 1958. And in the succeeding years other congregations were established at Lewisporte, Happy Valley, Bay Roberts and Weybridge. In St. John’s city, too, great things had been taking place; the congregation had become so large that in 1963 several groups were formed.

The moving of families to where the need is greater has had good results in Newfoundland. This is what led to the formation of a new congregation at Labrador City in 1964, to the forming of another congregation at Carbonear in 1967, and still another in Shoal Harbour in 1968. The diligent efforts of special pioneers produced other new congregations at Springdale and Baie Verte in 1969. The story has been one of theocratic progress ever since.

Looking back over the record of Jehovah’s people there in Newfoundland truly causes gratitude to Jehovah to well up in our hearts. From the time the first congregation was organized by Brother Macmillan in 1916 down to the year 1974, the records show that more than 3,600,000 pieces of literature have already been distributed throughout the towns, hamlets and outports, all over Newfoundland. More than three million hours have been spent in this work. To nourish the interest, well over 1,000,000 return visits have been made. With what result? Why, during the past twenty-five years alone, over 1,180 persons have dedicated their lives to God and have symbolized this by water baptism! A peak of 1,131 publishers reported activity during May 1975. Yet, many more are being attracted to God’s organization, for 2,041 attended the celebration of the Lord’s Evening Meal on March 27, 1975.

Jehovah’s hand may be seen in the way humble isolated persons here have been reached, and they, in turn, have preached to others. (Compare Acts 11:19-21.) The good news has been spread to remote places. It is stimulating to realize that our God is still pleased to use the brothers in Newfoundland in his great work of Kingdom proclamation. And, in turn, they are happy be the recipients of such wonderful favor!

Part 1​—South Africa and Neighboring Territories

Come with us to a land of intriguing contrasts​—bustling cities and remote places in the bush, modern dwellings and humble African huts. Walk among people of many races. Listen and you will hear millions speak English or Afrikaans (derived from old Dutch). Others of this land’s 26,000,000 inhabitants are at home with such tongues as Xhosa and Zulu.

This is South Africa. It covers 472,000 square miles and is the home of interesting, often lovable, people. Among them are many who yearn for good things of a spiritual sort, and their desires are being satisfied with Bible truth proclaimed by Jehovah’s Christian witnesses.

First, a little history: During the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries, South Africa was the scene of much fighting. As the black “tide” of population moved south from central Africa and the white “tide” spread northward from the Cape, they clashed in fierce blood-spilling wars. The worst was the Anglo-Boer War of 1899-1902, between the British and the Boers, the Dutch farmers. As a result, the four colonies of Natal, the Orange Free State, Transvaal and the Cape came under British rule. In 1910 they became one nation. Half a century later, in 1961, the country became the Republic of South Africa. This was by a majority vote of the whites. The blacks have no vote except in some of their “homelands,” large territories set aside for each African tribe.

A BRIEF JOURNEY

So now let us take a quick trip through South Africa. We start at Cape Town, near the southern extremity of the continent. Cape Town is the legislative capital, the country’s oldest city. Over 500 miles to the northeast is Bloemfontein, the capital of the Orange Free State, which city is regarded as the judicial capital of the country. Pretoria, still farther to the northeast, is the capital of Transvaal and is the administrative capital of the republic.

The main topographical feature of South Africa is the interior plateau. From a coastal plain on the east the land rises sharply to form massive mountain ranges, varying in height from over 5,000 feet to more than 11,000. The plateau slopes gradually toward the west. Once, most of it was undulating grassland teeming with great herds of impala, zebra, springbok and other beautiful creatures. Today much of the interior is farmland, and most of the wild animals are found only in game reserves, such as world-renowned Kruger National Park. But toward the north, in the interior section, the land is drier and becomes the Kalahari Desert. To the northeast is the bushveld (pronounced “bush-felt”), with its abundance of shrubs.

Kimberley, in the Orange Free State, is world famed as a center for diamond mining. In the Transvaal is found Johannesburg, largest city of the country and known as “queen” of the “Reef,” a string of mining and industrial towns. The Reef came into being due to the discovery of gold in the area back in 1886. Somewhat over 300 air miles southeast of Johannesburg lies Durban, on the shores of the Indian Ocean, and here one sees many Indian women in their colorful saris.

Twelve and a half million Africans, belonging to at least nine tribes, live in South Africa. The largest tribes​—the Xhosa and Zulu peoples—​each number over three million. Next come the Basuto, then the Tswana, Tsonga, Swazi, Ndebele, Venda and others. Just over half the African population lives in the African “homelands,” the large territories designated for each individual African tribe. Usually the way of life in these “homelands” and in the reserves is quite primitive, with most of the people living in huts having walls mainly of mud, and roofs thatched with grass. The rest of the African population lives in African townships, such as Soweto with its little concrete-and-brick homes built by the municipality. These are located a few miles outside European cities and towns. The government’s policy is that each racial group develop separately and independently. South Africa has come under heavy criticism for its apartheid, or segregation, policy.

Apart from the main sects of Christendom, the Africans have their own religions. Not only are the major faiths of Christendom represented among them, but many an African preacher has started his own little sect. Consequently, South Africa has the largest number of sects in the world​—at least 2,000! Apart from professing adherence to one of Christendom’s churches, most Africans still engage in some form of ancestor worship and live in fear of the dead. This is true not only in the “homelands.” Many a modern African, though driving a late-model car, occasionally sacrifices a goat to appease the spirits of his dead ancestors.

BACK TO THE TURN OF THE CENTURY

At the turn of the century, South Africa’s population was smaller, the pace slower, and life more simple. The country was just recovering from the Anglo-Boer War when the time proved ripe for the good news to reach this fascinating field.

In the year 1902 a certain Dutch Reformed clergyman was sent from Holland to an assignment at Klerksdorp, a town of the Transvaal. He brought with him a big box of secondhand religious literature, including Studies in the Scriptures, a copy of Zion’s Watch Tower in English and the booklet What Do the Scriptures Say About Hell? Frans Ebersohn and Stoffel Fourie met this clergyman at Klerksdorp. They were permitted to examine his library, found these publications to be of great interest, and were allowed to take them from the collection. These men were so deeply impressed by the truths that these publications contained that they decided to form a new congregation. They called it “Volheid van Christus” (Fullness of Christ). This was the very first foothold of the Kingdom message in South Africa.

These two men began holding meetings and working from house to house to spread the good news. In 1903 Frans Ebersohn wrote to the first president of the Watch Tower Bible & Tract Society, C. T. Russell, and asked that a “pilgrim,” or special representative of the Society, be sent to South Africa. Brother Russell replied that circumstances did not then permit this, but that as soon as possible it would be arranged.

In 1906 a couple of sisters who emigrated from Glasgow, Scotland, to Durban were enthusiastic about spreading the good news. Before long, others became interested in the truth in that city, and, by the end of 1906, there were forty subscribers for Zion’s Watch Tower in South Africa.

In 1907 a certain “Reverend” Joseph Booth appeared on the stage of the Kingdom drama in southern Africa. Born in England, he moved to New Zealand at the age of twenty-nine to do sheep farming and later took up business in Australia. He joined the Baptists and after some time felt a call to become a missionary in Africa and so arrived in Nyasaland (now Malawi) in 1892 as an independent missionary. Booth became fired with the idea of equality for the Africans and “Africa for the Africans.” He established various “Industrial Missions.”

By the year 1900 Booth had broken with most of his missions and had made a few trips to America, where he was converted to the Seventh Day Baptist faith. He soon afterward came back to Nyasaland to establish a mission for that Sabbatarian organization. Before long, he was in trouble with the Seventh Day Baptists. He then linked with the Seventh-day Adventists and established a mission for them. He also fell out with the government authorities, since they had a strong dislike for his schemes for African social change. It appears that in 1906 Booth started to take an interest in the Churches of Christ and, although turned down by the British Churches of Christ, he found some response in the Cape Town branch of the South African Churches of Christ. Booth was instrumental in helping them to establish a mission in Nyasaland. According to the publication Independent Africa, Booth moved from denomination to denomination like a “religious hitchhiker.”

Toward the end of 1906 Booth, now in Scotland, read some of the books of Brother Russell. Soon he was off to the United States. Booth arranged for an interview with Brother Russell and this turned out to be a very interesting and crucial discussion. Brother Russell knew very little about Booth’s background and of his main objective to restore Africa to the Africans. He could not have known that Booth was already viewed as an undesirable by officials and whites in Nyasaland and that he had already used various religious organizations to support his own schemes. Also, Brother Russell was anxious to find someone who would open up a wide new field. Hence, the Society, for a time, undertook Booth’s expenses as its missionary to those peoples with whom he was acquainted.

Little did Brother Russell realize that this would result in many difficulties and the bringing of much reproach on the name of the Society. At any rate, early in 1907, Joseph Booth was back in Africa and began operations in Cape Town and other parts of the country. Being persona non grata in Nyasaland, it appears that Booth did not return there for quite a time, although by letters and personal messengers he maintained close contact with the Nyasaland field and had a profound effect upon it.

In the June 1, 1908, issue of Zion’s Watch Tower a letter signed by L. de Beer and written to Brother Russell shed some light on what was developing. It says, in part: “I am deeply interested in your six books, and have two brothers similarly interested; one is a clergyman of the Dutch Church; not only a reader, but a thinker. He is emeritus; resides at Pretoria, Transvaal, and edits a Dutch Church paper, besides preaching when requested. . . .

“Then there is a mutual friend of Brother Booth and myself, Rev. J. H. Orr, minister of the Independent Congregational Church, Wynberg (one of our suburbs), who is already preaching some of the new truths contained in your books.

“As you will have heard, quite a nice little company, of which I was one, all interested in the Millennial message, assembled in Brother Orr’s Church to celebrate the Passover​—five Europeans, 29 natives, conducted in three languages. It was an important and impressive hour, and a new era in our lives.”

More news of the work in South Africa appears in The Watch Tower of January 15, 1909. The report says: “There are three black brethren who are preaching the Truth to the natives. One of these has gone northward about two thousand miles to his home region to carry the message. This brother, although young, speaks several of the native languages, and writes the English quite fluently. The latest report from him is very encouraging. The natives seem to have open ears for the Good Tidings of Great Joy, the message of Restitution.”

The young African mentioned as traveling about 2,000 miles northward to his home region was Elliott Kamwana. Kamwana came from the Tonga tribe and had been educated by the Livingstonia Mission (Scotch Presbyterian) at Bandawe on the western shores of Lake Nyasa. However, he had met Booth at Blantyre, Nyasaland, in 1900, and two years later had been baptized at one of the Seventh Day Missions that Booth had established. He had come down to South Africa later, worked in the mines for a time and then met Booth again in the Cape. It appears that Kamwana stayed with Booth for a few months getting some instructions, and then went back to his home country, Nyasaland. In The Watch Tower of July 1, 1909, Booth describes the distribution of tracts in Johannesburg and Pretoria among the Africans and then says:

“They are overjoyed at having the same message brought here which they have heard was being proclaimed up in their home country, Nyasaland, by Brother Elliott Kamwana.

“One who has been here only three months tells that he saw Elliott baptize 300 in one day; another gives advice that in one place there are 700 adherents. And I am further informed that there are towards 3,000 in that country in about 30 separate places who have accepted the Divine Plan as preferable to Presbyterianism and the Church of England. Brother Elliott himself reports that there are about 9,000 who are interested somewhat, though not all of them to the extent named above.”

Toward the end of this report, Brother Russell included some very recent news about the arrest of Elliott Kamwana at the instigation of the Calvinistic Scotch Missionaries of Bandawe, Lake Nyasa. Brother Russell concludes the report with the brief statement: “Brother Kamwana baptized 9,126 in past year.”

No comment is made on this fantastic figure. At that time there were many less than that number baptized in the whole United States! But how did Kamwana do it? What methods were used?

“WATCHTOWER MOVEMENTS” BEGIN

Actually, neither Booth nor Kamwana had really left Babylon the Great, or false religion; they never became Bible Students or Jehovah’s Christian witnesses. Their relationship with the Watch Tower Society was short and superficial. Mrs. Marjorie Holliday, whose memories concerning the truth go back to the early 1900’s, describes how Joseph Booth frequently endeavored to sabotage the meetings of the brothers in their upstairs room in Durban. Says our Christian sister Holliday: “For example: while we were singing ‘Free From the Law,’ he would station himself outside and reply with ‘not free from the law.’”

So it is not surprising that Elliott Kamwana, Booth’s spiritual apprentice, would have quite a garbled idea of the truths presented in the Society’s publications. But exactly what he did preach when he got back to Nyasaland, it is now impossible to say. It certainly seems true that a marked feature of his campaign was its dramatic open-air baptisms. But these baptisms performed by Kamwana had no relationship with the true Christian baptism of Jehovah’s servants. Whatever he said or whatever methods he used, Kamwana’s campaign lasted only a short time, from approximately September 1908 to June 1909, when the government stepped in and put him in prison, later deporting him to the Seychelles Islands. He was not allowed to go back to Nyasaland until 1937, when he carried on as a leader of one of the false “Watchtower movements.”

Most unfortunately, as a result of Kamwana’s work a situation arose in central Africa that for a long time was terribly confusing. Movements developed that used Brother Russell’s books to a small degree. These mingled some truth with many of their own ideas and methods. Thus, many people were led astray. Not all these movements used the names “Watchtower” or “Watchtower Society”; in fact, the movement that Kamwana led in time developed the name “The Watchman Mission.”

Many years later, in 1947, due to the fact that these false Watchtower sects were still causing some confusion, the brothers in charge of the Kingdom-preaching work in Nyasaland wrote to Kamwana. In a reply written and signed by Kamwana, he says: “The Watchman Mission (Mlonda Mission) has no time to waste on rumour because the blacks and the Europeans in Nyasaland know that the Watchman Mission is separate and distinct from the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society of Europeans.”

So the facts make it quite clear that Kamwana never was a true, dedicated servant of Jehovah, and it appears that he started off or caused the formation of the various false “Watchtower movements.” It seems that this all began with his “fiery” campaign of 1909. Brother Nguluh, an African brother in Johannesburg who was in Nyasaland at that time, has likened Kamwana’s campaign to a “wild fire catching the grass.” In those days, there was considerable migration from Nyasaland by natives looking for work and better pay. Evidently, then, in that way false “Watchtower movements” spread throughout the Rhodesias, the Congo and down into South Africa.

DURBAN HEARS THE MESSAGE

Now let us go back to Durban in the year 1906. Marjorie Holliday and her mother lived next door to a Mrs. Morton. Sister Arnott, of Glasgow, Scotland, was constantly sending tracts and leaflets to her natural sister, Mrs. Morton. In turn, Mrs. Morton passed on these tracts to Marjorie Holliday’s mother, Mrs. Agnes Barrett, and eventually both accepted the truth. At this time there also was a Sister Taylor there from Scotland. A little later Sister Arnott and her family decided to come from Glasgow and settle in Durban. So, according to Sister Holliday, it was Sisters Arnott, Taylor, Morton and Barrett who really got the work started in Durban. One of their main methods of spreading the truth was to hand tracts and leaflets to the people on the beaches.

Marjorie Holliday herself took her stand at the age of ten years by writing a letter of resignation to the Presbyterian Church, and thus dissociating herself from Babylon the Great. She also says that in 1910 the little group in Durban was joined by an American Negro, Brother Whiteus. Sister Holliday tells us that he had very good success in Durban. Then she mentions quite an amazing incident. Apparently, Brother Whiteus was recalled to America, possibly by Brother Russell. But not long before the ship left Durban he was kidnapped by Booth and locked in a room! (Why Booth did this is not clear.) In any case, the local sisters managed to discover where Brother Whiteus was locked up, and Sister Barrett succeeded in releasing him and then safely escorted him to the docks so that he could catch his ship.

By the year 1910 some good seed had been sown, but strange things were happening in southern Africa. The situation was not good in Nyasaland, and Booth was giving trouble in Durban. It was very necessary for someone mature and reliable to take oversight of the Kingdom work in this vast field.

A TURNING POINT

The year 1910 saw a new chapter open for the Kingdom work in South Africa. By that time Booth was finished as far as the Society was concerned. About the middle of that year Brother Russell sent William W. Johnston, who was probably in his early thirties. He was a Scotsman from Glasgow, sober-minded, careful and reliable, a real contrast to the volatile, erratic Booth. Brother Johnston had been an elder in Glasgow for several years, was a deep student of God’s Word and an excellent speaker. He was one of the “gifts in men” very much needed in the African field, which had been badly shaken by Booth’s exploits. (Eph. 4:8) Brother Johnston’s main mission was to go to Nyasaland, investigate the situation there, and give help to the brothers.

The first white man to discover Lake Nyasa had been the famous explorer and missionary David Livingstone, in 1859. After that, the country was pioneered for white settlement by missionaries of the Scottish Presbyterian and Roman Catholic Churches. It became a British protectorate in 1891, and part of British Central Africa. At the time of Brother Johnston’s journey the population of Nyasaland was about one million, with very few local white residents.

Brother Johnston spent some four months in Nyasaland and reported that there were close to one hundred churches in as many villages and thousands of natives owing their allegiance to “present truth.” (2 Pet. 1:12, AV) He found that some had a “very fair grasp of the Truth.” But he was very disappointed with the general spirit.

“Some of them seemed to think also that I had come out with a pocketful of money to endow all the pastors and teachers and give them lucrative employment under the Society,” said Brother Johnston. “I had to disabuse their minds of that idea. . . . I regret to say that almost in every case where I had dealings with individual brethren their interviews ended with an appeal for financial assistance in some shape or form.” He also found that Booth’s influence was “markedly manifest on the work in Nyasaland.” Some were keeping the seventh-day sabbath. “I did what I could to present the truth on this question,” remarked Brother Johnston, “and was enabled by the grace of God to deliver at least some of them from bondage.”

Brother Johnston made an effort to establish some form of organization and chose several natives to act as teachers after he had cleared up the sabbath question for them. He also was pleased to find that many appeared to be “filled with a strong desire for a more intimate acquaintance with God’s Word.” For a while after returning to South Africa, he received reports from some of these people in Nyasaland, but after a few years there was very little contact. For fifteen years the movement started by Booth and Kamwana was largely left to itself. It is not surprising that such a situation gave birth to the false, indigenous “Watchtower movements.”

A SMALL BRANCH OFFICE WITH VAST TERRITORY

Soon after his return to Durban in 1910, Brother Johnston received instructions from Brother Russell to open a branch office of the Watch Tower Society there. This new, one-man branch was simply a small room in School Lane, Durban. It served as an office and, at times, as a meeting place. But the territory over which it had jurisdiction was tremendous. Roughly speaking, the whole of Africa south of the equator was its field. In fact, some of the territories that came under this branch, such as the Congo, Uganda and Kenya, stretched far north of the equator. Also included were the island of Mauritius away out in the Indian Ocean, the huge island of Madagascar (Malagasy Republic) off the Mozambique coast, St. Helena hundreds of miles out in the Atlantic, and the island of São Tomé in the Gulf of Guinea. However, as the prophet Zechariah wrote: “Who has despised the day of small things?”​—Zech. 4:10.

EFFORTS PROVE FRUITFUL

It is not good to despise the work of humble people, such as Brother Whiteus. He once called at a home in Durban and placed a full set of the Studies in the Scriptures. The woman who obtained them did not read them herself, but shortly afterward her daughter, Mrs. Thompson, took the books with her on a boat trip to Glasgow and read them on the voyage. During her stay in Glasgow someone called at her door and left a leaflet advertising a talk to be given by Charles T. Russell. Mrs. Thompson went, but found the place so crowded that she could not get in. However, at that moment the brothers decided to open up the orchestra box and so Mrs. Thompson got a ringside seat for the public lecture. She enjoyed it very much. One of the local sisters took her address in South Africa and in course of time Brother W. Johnston made a return visit. Mrs. Thompson accepted the truth and was baptized soon after this. She herself was a faithful and active publisher for many years, right down until 1965, when she passed away at the age of ninety-eight. Her daughter and two granddaughters also became zealous Witnesses. So that call made by Brother Whiteus proved to be very fruitful.

Meanwhile, in Durban, Brother Johnston was regularly giving Bible talks in the Masonic Hall, on Smith Street, every Sunday evening. The audiences as yet were quite small, but among them was a Norwegian man named Myrdal. His wife was a staunch Seventh-day Adventist. The two of them had arguments about doctrines night after night. However, Mr. Myrdal got the better of the discussions, and before long he and his wife and son Henry became regular attenders at Brother Johnston’s lectures. They also started attending the Sunday morning meetings called “open Bible studies.”

Also from the year 1911 there is a definite record of real interest among the Africans in South Africa. Jeremiah Khuluse of Ndwedwe, a small native township about thirty miles from Durban, remembers that a man called Johannes Tshange came there from Cape Town. Tshange had obtained a knowledge of the truth in Cape Town and he was anxious to spread it in his hometown of Ndwedwe. Jeremiah Khuluse’s father became very interested, especially in the new teaching about hell. So Bible studies were started and held every evening. There were many associating with the little group. They used the Studies in the Scriptures for their Bible studies, and in a few months, as they were already preaching to other church people, the local clergy began to get worried. As a result, the members of the Wesleyan Methodist Church gathered together to discuss the problem. After many arguments these newly interested ones in the truth were excommunicated from the church. This was probably the first African congregation of true worshipers to be formed in South Africa.

Brother Johnston was very busy in 1911. He made a special trip to Johannesburg in the Transvaal and to Parys in the Orange Free State. In Johannesburg he made many calls and, as a result, arrangements were made for “Bible class” meetings. A very fine meeting was held in the Town Hall of Parys, where the mayor introduced the lecturer, the vice-mayor translated his remarks into Dutch, and about 250 people listened. It is clear that Brother Johnston was busy in the class-extension work being done by God’s people world wide at that time. Soon meetings were also being held in Pretoria, Balfour, Port Elizabeth and Ndwedwe.

Although their numbers were few, Jehovah’s servants put forth much effort to spread the Bible’s vital message. In a report on the work in South Africa for 1912, the February 1, 1913, issue of The Watch Tower shows that they distributed 28,808 tracts entitled “People’s Pulpit” in English, 30,000 tracts entitled “Everybody’s Paper” in English and 3,000 “People’s Pulpit” in Dutch. Of interest, too, is a brief note in The Watch Tower of November 15, 1913, which shows literature available in Zulu. The good news was reaching out to many people in this land.

Also, at this time, Brother Russell’s sermons were being published in the newspapers regularly. The Watch Tower of December 15, 1913, shows that about 600 papers in Great Britain, South Africa and Australia printed his articles weekly. World wide the figure was approximately 2,000 newspapers. Brother Johnston had organized a publishing agency for the sermons in South Africa, and by the end of 1913 eleven newspapers in the country were publishing them in four languages.

1914 ARRIVES!

The months rolled by and turned into 1914. Around the world at that time the brothers must have been wondering what the year would bring forth. The brothers in South Africa were very conscious of the date. Among them were the Myrdals down in Durban. Henry Myrdal says: “I well remember the date August 4, 1914, when my mother, reading the newspaper, told us, the family, ‘Here it is! The War has come, just as Pastor Russell said in his books.’”

Over in Britain many were watching world events with interest and recognized the “sign.” This included a young brother named George Phillips, then a lad of sixteen doing colporteur service at Barrow in Furness, England. Little did George know then that he would play an important part in the development of the Kingdom work in southern Africa!

Up in Nyasaland many Africans sincerely interested in the truth also were watching the date. The Germans were just across the border in Tanganyika (then German East Africa) and British troops were preparing to defend the border. Some were conscious that Bible prophecy was being fulfilled.

Says the book Independent African, page 230: “Africans themselves left their own record of the unsettlement which the War had brought to them. It seemed, indeed, to many that the Watch Tower prophecy that the world would end in October 1914 was about to come true.” Confirming this was a letter from a Brother Achirwa in Nyasaland to Brother Russell (published in The Watch Tower of September 1, 1914). Among other things, it says: “Surely we are living in the Time of the End, according to the Scriptures. . . . But we read in the Bible that the Deliverer shall come, and the Kingdom of God shall come, and all nations shall know the Way of our God; but the wicked will He destroy.” It then goes on to describe their meetings, which, on special occasions, were attended by hundreds at one time.

“FIRST SOUTH AFRICAN CONVENTION”

Under this heading The Watch Tower of August 15, 1914, published a letter from Brother Johnston. He wrote:

“The first South African Convention of the International Bible Students Association has now gone down into history, leaving with those who were privileged to attend a glorious memory that will serve as a stimulus and an inspiration until we get to the greatest of all Conventions, beyond the veil [in heaven].”

Johnston then went on to describe that it took place on April 10 in Durban. People had come from all parts of the subcontinent. He specially mentioned “one dear sister traveling nearly a thousand miles.” Johnston also said: “We were a very ‘little flock,’ indeed. Our largest attendance was 34.” Brother Johnston meant thirty-four Bible Students, but for the public talk the attendance was about fifty. Considering the attendance, the number baptized was very high, a total of sixteen. They also had the Memorial of Christ’s death on the same weekend, with thirty-two partakers. Little did those brothers realize that some fifty-seven years later (1971) there would be an assembly in Johannesburg with a total attendance of nearly 50,000! This certainly brings to mind the prophecy, “The little one himself will become a thousand.”​—Isa. 60:22.

UNFOUNDED ACCUSATIONS

The first few weeks of 1915 were very grim for Nyasaland. By that time the British and the Germans had already had a sharp engagement on the frontier, resulting in victory for the British. Many Africans were killed or wounded in this battle, but worse was to follow. On January 23 there was a serious uprising among the Africans led by John Chilembwe, an educated leader of an African sect. He killed a few local Europeans and tried to cause a general uprising. However, this was quickly crushed by African troops, European officers and volunteers.

Subsequently, however, accusations were made that the Watch Tower Society had had something to do with the revolt. In fact, the official History of the Great War refers to Chilembwe as a “religious fanatic . . . of the so-called ‘Watch Tower’ sect.” Careful investigation has since proved that those in Nyasaland who were interested in the truth and even those of Kamwana’s movement, a false “Watchtower movement,” as such, had no direct connection with or responsibility for the rioting. The book Independent African examines the evidence on this very thoroughly and, on page 324, comes to this conclusion: “Chilembwe himself had no apparent connection with the American Watch Tower movement and attempts to link his insurrectionary projects with this organization in the United States seem misguided.” Of course, since Chilembwe had been one of Booth’s converts, and Booth once had some connection with the Society, enemies of the truth used these facts to make accusations and turn the Society into a scapegoat. In actual fact, Chilembwe and his lieutenants were members of the highly respected orthodox missions. These, too, came in for a lot of criticism from the government.

The book Independent African, page 232, also has this interesting comment to make regarding the false accusation that the Watch Tower Society’s publications influenced some Africans to take part in the uprisings: “But it must also be noted that nowhere in the Russell volumes [italics ours] was it suggested that the believers in his teachings should take active steps to hasten the overthrow of these institutions in preparation for the Millennial Age: rather they were recommended to wait patiently for divine intervention.”

GROWTH CONTINUES

A few months later, down in Durban, the brothers had another very fine assembly. This was again tied in with the celebration of the Memorial, and forty-seven partook of the emblems. For the Zulu class at Ndwedwe there were thirty-eight present, also fifteen at Johannesburg, eight at Cape Town, six at Douglas and two at Balfour.

The year 1914 had come and gone. Although world events were fulfilling prophecy in a remarkable way, the work was not yet over and it seemed that there was still much to be done. Brother Johnston said in a letter to Brother Russell: “The past year has been one of continuous testings and trials, both to individuals and to Classes [or, congregations].” However, the report of activity in South Africa for the year 1915 shows that there had been over 4,700 printed volumes distributed, 75,131 copies of free literature circulated and 312 meetings held. The work had not come to a standstill by any means.

THE PHOTO-DRAMA OF CREATION

In 1916 the Photo-Drama of Creation arrived in South Africa. This combination slide, motion picture and sound production outlined God’s purpose for earth and man. It apparently ran into difficulties in the Cape Province and was banned by the authorities there as being likely to “offend the religious susceptibilities” of the public.

However, indicating the scope of the Photo-Drama work, by early 1918 Brother Johnston calculated that in eighteen months he had traveled over 10,000 miles to show it in many parts of the country. The Drama drew large audiences everywhere. Although permission was refused in the Cape Province, it had been shown in Durban, Johannesburg, Pretoria and various other parts of the Transvaal, the Orange Free State and Natal. A great ingathering had not resulted from the showing of the Drama, but it had given a very wide and powerful witness.

EARLY NEWS FROM RHODESIA AND THE TRANSVAAL

In 1916 we hear for the first time some mention of Kingdom activity in Rhodesia. William W. Johnston said in a letter to Brother Russell: “Your communication re work in Rhodesia, to Mr. Nodehouse, was duly received. I have written that gentleman asking for particulars and am awaiting his reply.”

The witnessing work in South Africa at that time was by no means limited to the cities. In the small town of Koster, in the western Transvaal, there was a man called Japie Theron who was busy studying the truth. Theron, a capable lawyer, had come to realize that the religions of the world were false. One day he read in the newspaper concerning the outstanding prophecy about 1914 that had been published by the Watch Tower Society decades previously. So Theron sent for literature and received the books Studies in the Scriptures. Very soon he saw the truth and felt a burning desire to help others. He often had debates with the clergy, challenging them to prove their false teachings, such as a literal hellfire.

Brother Theron certainly had plenty of initiative. At one stage, he witnessed regularly on the little train that puffed through his town each day. Boarding the train at the station, he would start from the engine and work his way to the rear, offering the publications to all the passengers, while the train would slowly climb the steep incline. He would time it so that when the train came to the top of the rise he would have finished his “territory” on wheels and would hop off! Brother Theron became widely known in the western Transvaal and Orange Free State and helped many to accept the truth.

In the northern Transvaal the light had been shining over quite a wide area and much of the literature was being sent out by post from one person to another. It reached the hands of two young fellows attending school in the little town of Nylstroom in the northern Transvaal. According to one of these youngsters, Paul Smit, the publication that touched his heart and fired him to action was the booklet What Do the Scriptures Say About Hell? To use Brother Smit’s own words: “Believe me, Nylstroom became a center of commotion, as if struck by a cyclone, as we two schoolboys made it known, and in no uncertain way, that the doctrines of the church were false. We went about our business fearlessly. At that time there were only the three Dutch Reformed Churches and the Anglican Church that had the ‘freedom of the city’ to go about their business undisturbed. So just imagine, when the ‘hose was turned on hell,’ the smoke of torment that went up! Within a short while the popular talk was about this new religion in the town and district. The clergy, of course, as the instruments of darkness, played their well-known role of misrepresentation and persecution. Their weekly sermons for months, yes even years, centered on this ‘false religion.’”

SPIRITUAL PROSPERITY DESPITE DIFFICULTIES

The meetings back there were conducted by “elders” who were elected by a show of hands of the congregation. Votes were also cast for the deacons, whose job consisted of opening the windows, straightening the chairs, giving out the songbooks and generally assisting. This was the congregational arrangement of that time.

On October 31, 1916, C. T. Russell, the first president of the Watch Tower Society, died, active and faithful to the end. The news of this caused distress and dismay among Jehovah’s people. Among the brothers in Durban a cry went up: “What are we going to do now?” After the first reaction of grief, the period of testing began. Brother Russell’s personality and activity had so dominated the Kingdom work up to that time, and very many were so deeply attached to him personally that they resented changes that had to come after his death. In Durban, Brother Myrdal remembers arguments developing at the meetings time after time and a group beginning to manifest itself as being against the Society and causing a lot of trouble. Divisions and problems were not easily settled. Nevertheless, the work went on with clear evidence of divine blessing.

Sometime in 1917 the Society’s branch office in South Africa was transferred from Durban to Cape Town, almost in the shadow of the great rock mass of Table Mountain. This was done for the convenience of shipping, and the small premises at 123 Plein Street, Cape Town, became the branch office for the next six years.

The number of brothers in South Africa was steadily increasing. Brother Johnston reported that the number of white “brethren” was estimated at between 200 and 300. Most of these were in the four principal groups or congregations​—Durban, Johannesburg, Pretoria and Cape Town—​and many others were isolated. At Ndwedwe there was a flourishing congregation of about eighty Zulus. There was also a small group of Basutos meeting in a place called Bank, and some Xhosa brothers meeting in East London.

In a report, Brother Johnston made these very interesting remarks about the African brothers:

“Despite the fact that we have no literature in the native languages, the grasp of Present Truth which these native Brethren have is phenomenal. We can only say, ‘It is the Lord’s doing, and marvelous in our eyes.’ Entertaining, as they all do, a profound respect for the Bible as the Word of God, they have listened eagerly to the Truth imparted to them by native teachers able to read the volumes in English and to translate what they read into the vernacular. Having practically nothing to unlearn, they have readily embraced the Lord’s Message when presented. The intelligence and the sincerity of their consecration [dedication] have been attested by their sufferings for conscience’ sake. Nearly all these dear native Brethren have been solemnly and publicly excommunicated from Babylon​—turned out of the Mission Reserves in which they were born, and branded as dangerous persons in their Locations [African townships], which are their world. Yet none of these things move them; and they count it all joy that they are permitted to suffer for Christ’s sake.”

The work in Nyasaland had already aroused the opposition of the government, spurred on by jealous missionaries, on account of their schools emptying and their churches being depleted. “As a result,” said Johnston, “several of the leading brethren have been deported, and are now interned in Flat Island, Mauritius.”

A NEW FIELD OPENS UP

Since the seventeenth century, Stellenbosch has been a center of education, especially for the training of Dutch Reformed clergymen. In 1917, Piet de Jager was studying there at the university before going to the Dutch Reformed church mission in Nigeria. It appears that one of his fellow students already had accepted the truth and was studying the Society’s literature. This naturally worried the church authorities and so Piet de Jager was assigned to talk to this fellow student and invite him to attend the weekly Bible study organized by the Christian Students Association. What was the result? Piet de Jager himself accepted the truth. One can imagine the consternation that this caused in those ecclesiastical circles! Soon after that, Piet de Jager had many a hot debate with the professors about the soul and hell and other points, and before long left the seminary.

Later a public debate was arranged between Brother Piet de Jager and a Dutch Reformed doctor of theology, Dwight Snyman, with 1,500 students in the audience. Brother A. Smit describes the incident: “Piet pinned down this learned doctor on every point and proved from the Bible that the church had unbiblical doctrines. One of the students summed up the outcome in a few words, ‘If I did not know that Piet de Jager was wrong, I would swear that he was right because he proved everything from the Bible with scriptures!’”

While in Cape Town, Brother Johnston, apart from office work, spent much time in the field, and one day paid a visit to the little town of Franschhoek near Stellenbosch. This is another of the older towns of South Africa and originally was settled by Huguenot refugees in 1688. It also had a Colored population (descendants of intermingled blacks and whites) and the time was now ripe for the Kingdom seed to fall on good ground here. Several years previously a few, under the leadership of Adam van Diemen, a local Colored schoolteacher and a man of brilliant mind and high principles, had broken from the Dutch Reformed Church and formed their own religious group. It must have been in late 1917 or early 1918 that Brother Johnston called on Van Diemen and placed literature with him. Mr. Van Diemen not only got literature for himself but took quite a supply to pass on to his friends. These included a man named Daniels, and thus a copy of The Divine Plan reached the hands of his son, seventeen-year-old G. Daniels. For young Daniels that was the beginning of a life of service to Jehovah. Van Diemen also accepted the truth and became very active in spreading the message. He visited other places, such as Wellington, Paarl, Bellville, Parow, Elsie’s River, Wynberg and Retreat, in the vicinity of Cape Town. This zealous activity led to his being obliged to resign his position as schoolteacher and become a full-time preacher of the good news. The Kingdom message had now made a good start in this field.

In 1918, William W. Johnston, the branch overseer, received a new assignment. The Society had decided that the field in Australia and New Zealand needed a good, spiritually strong brother to take oversight and so asked Brother Johnston to go there. His successor as branch overseer was Henry Ancketill, who had received the truth in Pietermaritzburg and had previously been a member of the legislative assembly of Natal. He was of Irish descent and at that time was a retired gentleman getting on in years, of short stature with white hair and beard and a kindly expression. Owing to his age, he found the work load a bit heavy. Nevertheless, Brother Ancketill handled his new responsibility faithfully and efficiently for the next six years.

FAITH DISPLAYED IN TRYING TIMES

The new branch overseer, Henry Ancketill, took over his duties at a difficult time. The Society’s officers were in prison in America, the witness work was at a very low ebb, and unfaithful ones were being manifested. This was very evident in Durban. The arguments and troubles that had started soon after Pastor Russell died had been growing all the time, and now reached a climax under the leadership of a man named Jackson who thought very much of himself and of his ability. He and two others, Pitt and Stubbs, were apparently ringleaders of the opposition.

A split came in 1919 and a large group, in fact the majority, of those who were attending meetings became antagonistic and decided to hold their own separate gatherings. They called themselves the “Associated Bible Students” and set up their own organization. This left only a group of twelve, most of whom were sisters. Henry Myrdal found himself in a difficult position at that time because his father joined the opposition, whereas his mother remained loyal to the Watch Tower Society. However, he gave the matter careful thought and prayed and came to the conclusion, wisely, that the Society must be the agency blessed by the Lord, and so he followed along with his mother.

More and more Afrikaans-speaking people came to a knowledge of the truth. Willem Fourie is one example. He was a nephew of Stoffel Fourie, who first got the truth in Klerksdorp with Frans Ebersohn. His father had, in fact, obtained a copy of The Divine Plan of the Ages in Dutch somewhere around 1906 and had come to realize that the religions of the world were false. Willem Fourie heard that Japie Theron, the lawyer of Koster, had debated with the clergy and had made them a special challenge: He would give them £1,000 ($2,800) if they could prove from the Bible that the soul was immortal. At that time Fourie was still a member of the Dutch Reformed Church and, as they were needing funds to build a new church, their predikant (“preacher”) was asked if he would not like to accept this challenge. But he refused, and this disappointed Fourie, who later left the church. About 1919 he received the Watch Tower publications, studied them carefully and saw that this was the truth. Before long he was having a share in the field service.

Remember those two schoolboys in Nylstroom who caused such a sensation by telling everybody that the church teachings on hell were wrong? Both Paul Smit and the other youngster were given the ‘cold shoulder’ by their best friends. Sometime later Paul’s companion was given employment by the school board and came under heavy pressure to give up his religion. He succumbed. Paul shed many a tear over losing his companion, but prayed without ceasing to Jehovah, and by His undeserved kindness he never wavered concerning the truth. He persisted in preaching by incidental witnessing and lending publications to others. So isolated was he that he did not realize that there was an organization, and he had to rely entirely on Jehovah for help and guidance. A little later he did get personal visits from Brother Piet de Jager and other colporteurs. What a wonderful help such personal visits must have been in those days!

Although very new and still young, Paul Smit began to get Jehovah’s blessing in the form of “letters of recommendation.” (2 Cor. 3:1-3) His first ‘letter’ was the son of a neighboring farmer who accepted the truth. In 1922, Paul started a study with a family named Vorster, using the book The Harp of God, which had just been published. There were seven in the Vorster family and they lived four miles away from the Smits. Paul walked that distance every week through the fields to their farm. In the course of time the parents and one son became Witnesses. So by 1924 Paul had succeeded in organizing a fine group of thirteen in Nylstroom, this being the first class or group in the northern Transvaal.

But how were things getting along up in central Africa, in Nyasaland? M. Nguluh was in Nyasaland at the time, and was a preacher for the Presbyterian Church. But he relates that after World War I interested ones in Nyasaland were busy spreading the truth, and about that time, 1920, he received the book Millions Now Living Will Never Die. He says that it “shocked my understanding of the Bible as a preacher.”

Another man who got the truth in Nyasaland about the same time was a young African named Junior Phiri. His baptism, however, had to be held secretly, since the fear and suspicion of unorthodox sects caused by the uprising of John Chilembwe, in 1915, was still making it difficult for certain religious activities to be carried on. After his baptism, one of the brothers shook Junior’s hand and warned him that from now on he would be in danger, but that he must keep on walking faithfully in Jesus’ name.

Brother Phiri did run into serious opposition from the local Baptist clergy who prevailed upon the chief to have him arrested and taken before the magistrate, where he was accused of belonging to the banned sect of John Chilembwe. When asked by the magistrate why he had left his previous Baptist religion, Junior explained that he disagreed with the teaching on the dead and asked the magistrate what his view was. The magistrate said: “As far as I can see, the dead are in their graves.” Junior agreed with him and quoted John 3:13, and this, after the magistrate had checked it in his own Bible, made a good impression. Junior assured the magistrate that he did not belong to John Chilembwe’s sect but that he belonged to the religion called “International Bible Students Association.” He was freed, much to the surprise and disappointment of the local Baptist leaders.

Now let us swing down a distance of almost 2,000 miles from Nyasaland to the Cape Province of South Africa to see how the Colored group was getting on at Franschhoek. By this time the local Dutch Reformed Church was becoming conscious of this new and vigorous group and began to do something about it. A schoolmate of young Brother Daniels, named Van Niekerk, a promising Bible student, became a qualified schoolteacher and was offered a good job on condition that he and his family rejoin the Dutch Reformed Church. They gave way to this pressure and went back into “spiritual captivity.” Later, when Van Niekerk left that area, Daniels was made the same offer but he refused. From this stage on, persecution started and became so bitter that eventually the family had to move. The opposers did not leave them alone; one night they came to the house and told the Daniels family that if they would not fall in line, witchcraft would be used to wipe out the whole family. In reply, Daniels quoted from a hymn based on Psalm 23, showing that they relied on Jehovah’s protection.

After that, hatred and opposition increased and it became unsafe for the brothers to venture out alone at night. They were called all sorts of names such as “Russellites,” “Van Diemen’s soul-less group,” “false prophets” and the like. But the brothers stood firm. They were experiencing the fulfillment of what Jesus had said about his true disciples, namely: “You will be objects of hatred by all people because of my name.”​—Luke 21:17.

NEW BRANCH QUARTERS

About this time (1923) the branch office moved to new premises at 6 Lelie Street, where there was just one big room on the ground floor. The Cape Town congregation occupied about 95 percent of the space for their meetings and Brother Ancketill used a little cubicle at the back of the room as his office. The following year, 1924, the congregation moved to other quarters. An office was partitioned off near the front door, and shipping, storage and printery were all at the rear of the room. Shelving was erected, and space was made for the printing press when it arrived.

DEVELOPMENTS IN JOHANNESBURG

Now let us take a look at how things were going in Johannesburg, where Brother Johnston had formed the first class several years before. Sister Iris Tutty of that city was about five years old when she began to have a share in giving out the tracts by putting them under the people’s doors. She also remembers standing for hours at her mother’s desk watching her write letters and cards that were sent to the various “brethren” on the occasions of deaths, births, weddings, and any other special occasion. Sister Tutty’s mother did this because she was the secretary of the “Philadelphia League,” instituted by Brother Russell, to keep in contact with the brothers and sisters in their joys and sorrows through the bond of brotherly love.

Socially speaking, there was very little contact between whites and blacks, even though in those days the stricter laws on apartheid had not yet been passed. But this did not prevent Kingdom witnessing. An African brother, Enoch Mwale, was helped by Sister Tutty’s mother to get the truth in 1921, and the year thereafter he started participating in the field service. Brother Mwale studied with the European brothers for a while, and later, after receiving The Harp of God, the African brothers started their own group.

THE “MILLIONS” CAMPAIGN

In 1921, the Society began an extensive public meeting campaign that lasted for several years. The famous lecture “Millions Now Living Will Never Die,” first given by Brother Rutherford in February 1918, began to be used widely in South Africa. Brother Ancketill, the branch overseer, assisted by Brother Piet de Jager, then in full-time service, and an English-speaking brother named Parry Williams, visited all the bigger towns of South Africa and gave this lecture in English and Afrikaans. The results were very good. For the first lecture, at the Opera House, Cape Town, 2,000 were present. A considerable amount of literature was placed and much interest was manifested. These lectures were held in both Dutch and English, and the Millions book was placed in English, Dutch and Afrikaans. On this extensive tour in 1921, these brothers visited Bulawayo and Salisbury, in Southern Rhodesia (now Rhodesia).

Both large and small audiences heard the talk. “We travel hundreds of miles to address towns that will yield only about eighty listeners at the English, and the same amount at the Dutch lectures,” wrote Brother Parry Williams. Brothers P. J. de Jager and William Dawson, billed as the lecturer and the colporteur respectively, handled 70 lectures during the year, according to a report dated August 31, 1923. This was an average of almost six per month, and the total attendance had been 9,376. A number of subjects were used in addition to the famous “Millions Now Living Will Never Die,” including such striking titles as “The Resurrection Soon,” “The New World Begun” and “All Nations Marching to Armageddon.” Using the addresses that were turned in at each lecture, they made 2,483 house calls and placed thousands of pieces of literature.

The churches of Christendom began to feel the direct heat of the message. “In fact,” says the 1923 annual report, “in one town a complete Apostolic Church was closed down through the penetrating effect of our message and this gladdens the heart of all connected with the work. A writer in the ‘Kerkbode,’ a Dutch Church paper, paid the I.B.S.A. [International Bible Students Association] a compliment the other day by stating that although he did not agree with our doctrines yet he commended the zeal of the I.B.S.A. followers to the adherents of the Dutch Reformed Church.”

COLPORTEUR ACTIVITY

Pioneer or colporteur work, as it was known then, was also taking shape. In 1923 there were six in the full-time work and they did most of the witnessing work in the country, other brothers and interested ones mainly engaging in incidental witnessing. One of these full-time workers was Brother Edwin Scott, who was assigned to distribute printed copies of the resolution that had been adopted at the Cedar Point, Ohio, International Convention in September 1922. Thirty-five million copies of this tract were distributed throughout Christendom. This faithful brother carried a big bag on his back with the tracts in both English and Afrikaans, and a stick in his hand to defend himself against fierce dogs! He visited 64 towns in the four provinces of South Africa and distributed 50,000 copies in six months. In addition to that, this tract was mailed to clergymen of every denomination in South Africa and Rhodesia. “Advertise, advertise, advertise, the King and his Kingdom” had been the battle cry expressed by Brother Rutherford at that famous assembly in 1922, and the handful of brothers in South Africa were determined to do just that.

Early in 1923 two young sisters, who had for some time been members of the Johannesburg ecclesia (congregation), entered full-time service. They were Lenie Theron (the fleshly sister of Brother Theron, the lawyer of Koster) and Elizabeth Adshade. They gave up their jobs as teachers and set off together in the colporteur field. During a three-month tour in northern Natal and the Transvaal, these two sisters placed 3,188 books, about 500 books each per month! A letter from one of the sisters quoted in The Watch Tower of January 1, 1924, says, in part:

“I seem to have been going at top speed all the time, catching all sorts of trains . . . Often have I arrived late at night, the train being unduly delayed, at a lone station; but, true to his promise, the Lord never leaves one in the lurch. On every occasion he put it into the heart of someone to help me. It strengthens one’s faith and increases one’s love to see his devoted and providential care.

“One day after reading again that beautiful article on ‘Service Essential,’ I was so excited that I could not sleep. At last I got up, held out the map, and discovered that we were leaving out Barberton and some other places on a branch line off our route, and at once determined that we should not leave them out. I mentioned it to my companion; and we decided that she should go there while I came on and finished my section. The place I visited next was a very small place; I made only eighteen calls, but I [placed] forty-nine Volumes [of Studies in the Scriptures], sixteen ‘Millions,’ and thirteen large HARPS. I had very little sleep the night before, only three hours; for I was talking until 11:30 p.m. to some very interested people and then packing up to 2:00 a.m. and up again to catch a train at 5:30 a.m. I would just love to tell you all the little experiences we get, and how obviously our Savior is leading us; but I have not the time.” Is that not a wonderful example for us today?

IMPORTANT CHANGES IN CAPE TOWN

Over a wide area and in many ways the work was progressing. But Brother Ancketill, in Cape Town, was now getting on in years and finding the work load heavy. So the Society’s president, Brother Rutherford, decided to send a new branch overseer. Brother Ancketill had done well, “holding the fort” during a difficult period in the development of the Kingdom work. Now clouds of further trouble were gathering over the territories of South Africa, but Brother Ancketill’s successor was to cope with this situation.

By the year 1924, important changes were taking place in Cape Town. The Society had shipped in a printing press, with type and equipment. Also, new brothers arrived from England. One was Thomas Walder, who had been assistant branch overseer in the British branch for some time. He was a young man of about thirty years of age, fair and stocky, and was sent to take the place of Brother Henry Ancketill as branch overseer for South Africa. His companion, George Phillips, a few years younger, was a tall, fair-haired Scotsman from Glasgow.

During May 1924, when Brother Rutherford paid a visit to Glasgow for an assembly, George Phillips was his chairman on Sunday morning. As they sat together waiting to go on the platform, Brother Rutherford said to George: “You heard me make that announcement last night that I was sending Brother Walder to South Africa. Would you like to go with him?” The response was: “Here I am; send me.” So George was given two weeks to pack his bags, say good-bye to his folks and the brothers in Glasgow, and be ready to leave. Brother Rutherford also told him: “It may be for a year, or it may be for a bit longer, and remember, George, there is no furlough in wartime. You will take a one-way ticket.”

When these two newly assigned brothers arrived in South Africa, there were only six persons in the full-time service there and barely forty doing a little field service. As for the territory, it was overwhelmingly extensive. It included South Africa, Basutoland, Bechuanaland, Swaziland, South-West Africa, Northern and Southern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Mozambique, Tanganyika, Kenya, Uganda, Angola, and various islands of the Indian and Atlantic Oceans, such as St. Helena, Madagascar and Mauritius.

Soon a small hand-fed platen printing press arrived from Brooklyn. Under the guidance of a Cape Town brother who was a printer, Brothers Walder and Phillips telescoped a five years’ apprenticeship into about five months. They discovered what it means for a printer to “watch his p’s and q’s.” Before long the little press was turning out thousands of handbills, tracts and service forms. In addition to that, other literature was prepared in Afrikaans and in the various African languages. A brother in the Orange Free State, a farmer named Izak Botha, upon hearing that The Harp of God was being translated into Afrikaans, immediately made a donation of £500 ($1,400) to help pay for the printing.

TROUBLE FLARES UP

One of the first things that Brother Walder, the new branch overseer, did was to give attention to the Rhodesias (Northern and Southern Rhodesia) and also Nyasaland. The Society’s literature already had reached these territories, though the situation in that part of Africa was uncertain.

It is difficult at this time to form a precise picture of what was actually going on in the Rhodesias in the early twenties. In any case the clergy of Christendom were getting quite alarmed. In The Rhodesia Herald of June 6, 1924, there was a lengthy report of a missionary conference held in Southern Rhodesia, during which the “Watchtower movement” and the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society were discussed. Like Elymas the sorcerer, who ‘distorted the ways of Jehovah’ in an endeavor to hinder the Christian work of the apostle Paul, the clergy of Christendom hurled false charges against Jehovah’s modern-day Christian witnesses. (Acts 13:6-12) A clergyman, C. E. Greenfield, accused the Watch Tower Society of propagating “ecclesiastical Bolshevism.” He said that this propaganda was coming from Russia and asked if it should be tolerated in Africa. So he moved the following resolution: “That in the opinion of this conference of the missionaries of Rhodesia the teaching of the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society is subversive to true religion in the Church and law in the State, and as such its propaganda among the natives of this land is particularly dangerous; the Government be therefore requested to watch over and control its operations.”

Others spoke in support of this resolution. The manager of the Wankie Colliery (in Southern Rhodesia), Mr. Thomson, described how ‘batches’ of twenty or thirty were being baptized in a pool. Attempts to control the movement, it was reported, resulted in a large increase in converts who then were said to number about 1,500. According to Greenfield, the propaganda promised the overthrow of the power of the white man. The conference carried the resolution, with a few dissents.

At that time, it was a favorite trick of missionaries and clergymen to raise the old bogey of Communism. However, even though we discount the references to Russia and Bolshevism, it is uncertain whether those 1,500 adherents claiming to be of the Watch Tower in Wankie were our brothers or members of one of the false “Watchtower movements.” The report, however, does serve to show that the name “Watchtower” already was well known in the Rhodesias by 1924 and that there was a need for a clarification of the matter.

So, toward the end of 1924, Brother Walder made a trip to the Rhodesias, seeing government officials in both Northern and Southern Rhodesia to find out what was going on in the name of the “Watchtower.” Officials told him enough to enable him to realize that action must be taken immediately to separate those sincerely interested in our work from those belonging to the indigenous movements. In the following year, 1925, a European brother, William Dawson, was sent up from South Africa. He visited all the centers claiming to have any relationship with the Watch Tower Society in both Southern and Northern Rhodesia.

The report from this brother indicated that the vast majority of these people had no real understanding of the truth as set forth in the Society’s literature. On the other hand, some were sincerely interested, and these needed mature assistance and guidance. Brother Walder, in Cape Town, promptly repudiated the indigenous movements that were misusing the Society’s name, and the governments concerned were notified of the fact. He sent letters to the responsible authorities in the Rhodesias and Nyasaland clearly stating that the Society accepted no responsibility for the false movements that religious elements were linking with the Society.

About the time that Brother Dawson visited the Rhodesias, a person called Mwana Lesa caused terror among the Africans of Northern Rhodesia. Mwana Lesa (which means “Son of God”) was an African from Nyasaland; his real name was Tom Nyirenda and he came over to Northern Rhodesia by way of the Congo. Reports speak of him as an adherent of one of the indigenous “Watchtower movements” who made himself a prophet. According to the account in the Sunday Times of July 1, 1934, by Scott Lindberg, he got hold of a copy of Foxe’s Book of Martyrs. From this he saw how white men in olden times tied “witches” to a ducking stool and drowned them. Apparently this made a big impression on him. Traveling from village to village, he preached and told the natives “that Africa belonged to the Africans and that the white man must be chased out.”

Nyirenda then struck up a partnership with Chiwila, a headman of Lala (the southeast part of the present Copper Belt). These two made a plot for Nyirenda to wipe out Chiwila’s political enemies by labeling them “witches” and drowning them by baptism so that he could win the election for the kingship. Mr. Lindberg says: “Tom was then told the names of all Chiwila’s enemies. He called the headmen together and told them that he had been sent by God to cleanse the tribe of witchcraft, and that every man, woman and child must be baptised in the river.

“The superstitious natives were decoyed to a place where a swift river forced its way through a winding ravine among the hills, and there, on top of a boulder in the middle of the river, stood Tom, dressed in long white robes.

“He told the people that God had sent him to separate the sheep from the goats. He then baptised each person by immersion in the river, with the help of Chiwila’s staunch supporters, who held their enemies under the water, with their heads upstream, until they were drowned.

“The people sang hymns as they stood gazing at each lifeless victim, and all night long the forest echoed the frenzied exhortations of Mwana Lesa.

“Having drowned twenty-two natives that night, Tom decided to cross the border and settle in the Katanga Province of the Belgian Congo, where the Rhodesian authorities would not be able to get him.”

NEEDED CLARIFICATION AND AID

In the Congo, Tom Nyirenda committed further atrocities before he was arrested by Northern Rhodesian police, tried, convicted and hanged in Broken Hill Prison Square in front of the native chiefs. These fiendish deeds were linked to the name “Watch Tower.” But Mwana Lesa had no connection whatsoever with the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society, or the Bible Students, as Jehovah’s witnesses were known then. To the contrary, Mr. Lindberg reported that Tom Nyirenda “had been received into the Roman Catholic Church and given absolution while in prison” before he was executed. In spite of this the enemies of God’s kingdom, the clergy of Christendom’s denominations, did their best to pin the blame for this on the genuine Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society and to prejudice authorities and the public against us to try to keep the Witnesses out of the country. So, we can appreciate the mountainous obstacle that had to be overcome to establish the Kingdom work in Northern Rhodesia.

In Nyasaland, too, our position needed to be clarified and the interested ones needed help. In The Watch Tower of December 15, 1923, is the following report from the Society’s representative: “I had a visit recently from Major​——, Chief Commissioner of Police. He is a fine man, a modern Gamaliel. He has been investigating our work in Nyasaland. He is disgusted at the amazingly wicked lies circulated about us and told him by the clergy. He stated that he had disguised himself and gone to our meetings amongst the natives. He knows individually all the leaders. He tells me that the truth is spreading like wildfire amongst the natives.”

In any case, it was good that the Society sent John Hudson and his wife to Nyasaland in 1925 to investigate and arrange things. His visit was helpful. John Hudson relates that during the fifteen months that he spent in Nyasaland, he toured many parts of the country and gave talks in many places. He found that most of the brothers had very little knowledge or understanding of the truth. In his talks the brother endeavored to help them to appreciate the importance of keeping in touch with the Society and accepting its leading and direction.

Brother Junior Phiri also says that Brother Hudson counseled them on the point of husbands sitting in the meetings with their wives. In African tribal life, a husband does not eat with his wife and when the family goes to church or to religious meetings the men sit on one side of the aisle and the women on the other; so it appears that Brother Hudson gave good counsel on this point.

But, as Brother M. Nguluh relates, certain groups said to themselves: “We shall not get our teaching from men at Cape Town, but we shall do what we think is right.” So Brother Hudson’s visit must have caused a separation between those who were willing to follow the Society’s lead and those who were not. The unfortunate part is that those who were not willing to follow the Society’s lead still insisted on using the name “Watch Tower,” and apparently one of the main leaders was a Mr. Willie Kavala. One of the special features of that movement was that it did not believe in the resurrection of the dead. Brother Nguluh says that these false elements refused to pay their taxes, and they said they were the rulers of God’s kingdom!

After Brother Hudson submitted a report on his visit, the Watch Tower Society’s Cape Town office sent a letter to the government authorities in Nyasaland. In part, it said:

“On behalf of the above Society I beg to inform you that our representatives in Nyasaland have been recalled . . . Our reason for sending Mr. & Mrs. Hudson into Nyasaland was due to the activities of certain self-styled native ‘Watch Tower’ Churches. This movement we cannot endorse. It absolutely perverts the Society’s teachings and in the main its followers show no inclination to submit to any direction or authority from us. We therefore entirely dissociate ourselves from it.”

For a time the ones who were genuinely interested in the truth now had to battle on their own without the guidance of a representative of the Society in Nyasaland! Meanwhile, how was the truth progressing in South Africa, where the brothers were enjoying the full direction of the organization?

AIDING AFRICANS IN SOUTH AFRICA

In Johannesburg, other Africans were coming to a knowledge of the truth, and the good news was spreading to those living in the locations and the mine compounds (hostels for African men). One of these was Yotham Mulenga. He remembers how a white brother with the Photo-Drama of Creation came to the compound where he was staying. This had a profound effect on Brother Mulenga, who obtained the first volume of Studies in the Scriptures and soon afterward started attending meetings in Johannesburg where he met other African brothers.

Some of the local European brothers were helping the Africans at that time. One such was Brother V. Futcher, then assistant manager of the compound. He helped many Africans to accept the truth. Among these was Albino Mhelembe from the southern part of Mozambique. He came in contact with the truth in 1925 through the preaching of Brother Futcher. Before the end of 1925, Mhelembe returned to Lourenço Marques, the capital city of Mozambique, and then went on to his hometown at Vila Luiza. There he started preaching the truth to members of the Swiss Mission Church at Marracuene. Mhelembe had good success, and before long the truth had taken a strong hold in Mozambique. As many as forty attended the meetings, some of them often traveling twenty miles to do so. Yes, the Kingdom work had begun to take root in yet another field.

UNDETERRED BY PERSECUTION

In South Africa the main representatives of Babylon the Great are the leaders of the Dutch Reformed Church. On many occasions, they have bitterly persecuted those taking their stand for the truth, harassing them from one city to another just as unbelieving Jews in the first century did to the apostles Paul and Barnabas. (Acts 14:2, 5-7, 19) An interesting example of this occurred in the Orange Free State. In the mid-1920’s a well-known lawyer and his wife attended a lecture given by Brother de Jager in the town of Boshof. Attending the public meeting were many local dignitaries, some of whom afterward went with the speaker to a tearoom to ask Bible questions. The lawyer, Mr. Theo Denyssen, and his wife were much impressed, obtained literature, and in course of time became convinced that this was the truth. They soon began witnessing to friends and relatives and this immediately aroused resentment on the part of the local Dutch Reformed minister. Soon after this, Brother Denyssen and his wife resigned from the Church; and by the end of 1925 three of their relatives and eleven of their friends also resigned and their letters of resignation were read from the pulpit.

Brother Denyssen was a well-known man in that part of the Orange Free State and so his stand for the truth caused a real sensation and gave a wide witness. In 1927 he and a little group in Boshof had a share in postal work, sending out some 10,000 booklets and pamphlets, including the resolution “A Testimony to the Rulers of the World,” by post over a very wide area of the province. In April 1927, the entire Boshof congregation attended the national assembly at Johannesburg and no less than thirteen of them, including Brother and Sister T. C. Denyssen, were immersed. In that same year, to keep in step with the brothers world wide who were just beginning Sunday-morning house-to-house work, the little group also began this feature of the service. Local ministers of false religion, obviously very worried, delivered a series of sermons in the church against “Russellism.” Later a public debate was held between a couple of brothers and three local clergymen; and, as a result, a police sergeant in the audience saw the truth, took his stand and remained firm until death.

Enraged by the success of the Witnesses, the local minister at Boshof instructed his deacons and elders to visit all the church members and order them to withdraw their support from Brother Denyssen and thus cripple his practice as an attorney. By the end of 1927, the Denyssen family had to move, and went to the town of Wellington, not far from Cape Town. But there the local minister also put on a persecution campaign, so the following year the Denyssens were obliged to move to Cape Town.

Now, how were things going in those far northern territories where the situation among the Africans was giving cause for grave concern? In 1926, George Phillips, from the Cape Town branch office, was sent along with Henry Myrdal to make a tour of Southern Rhodesia. They were stopped at the border and told that they would be allowed into the country only if they would do no work among the Africans. It seemed that the authorities had accepted and were enforcing the aforementioned Resolution of the Missionary Conference!

The method used by Brothers Phillips and Myrdal on that trip was to go to a town or city, hire a hall, print advertising leaflets with their own little rubber-stamp printing set, then invite the people to come. At the meeting they would take the names and addresses of interested ones and then do their own follow-up work with sets of the Studies in the Scriptures and The Harp of God. Bicycles were the only means of transport they had by which to make all these calls. But to get from town to town they traveled by train. As they arrived at each new place they were invariably met by a “reception committee” from the police. The Criminal Investigation Department was keeping a careful watch on these two Europeans from the Watch Tower Society. So in that fashion they visited Bulawayo, Que Que, Gatooma, Gwelo, Salisbury and Umtali. At Umtali Mr. and Mrs. Gunn accepted the truth. The two brothers also paid a visit to Wankie, the coal-mining center. While there they enjoyed a trip to the beautiful Victoria Falls nearby, one of the most magnificent sights to be seen anywhere in the world, and were also conducted on a tour down a coal mine. But they kept to the restrictions laid down by the police and made no effort to contact the “Watchtower” Africans who were working at the mine. After a visit of several months, in which they placed over 4,200 pieces of literature, and aroused interest in several places, they returned to South Africa in time to attend the annual assembly in Cape Town at the end of December 1926.

ANOTHER CHANGE AT CAPE TOWN

Down in Cape Town, at the little branch, things were not going so well. Brother Walder, branch overseer, had previously been in the British branch and was accustomed to handling the comparatively large British field, and to holding large gatherings at the old London “Tabernacle.” From the very moment he arrived in Cape Town, everything had seemed altogether different and so much smaller. In the little while that he was branch overseer in South Africa, there was some progress but, to him, it seemed slow and the very smallness of things was a test. He left toward the end of 1927, after being in the country for three and a half years.

Brother Rutherford lost no time in appointing his assistant, George Phillips, as his successor in the branch, and the work carried on. Brother Phillips was well prepared for his new responsibilities. By 1927 he already had thirteen years in full-time service behind him and was an experienced man in the field and in the office. He had a deep appreciation of Jehovah’s organization, with a strong sense of loyalty to the Society, a clear mind and sterling fighting qualities, which were to stand him in good stead in the difficult times that lay ahead.

The work in South Africa soon began to pick up speed. Brother Phillips had started in full-time service at an early age himself, and all his life he has encouraged others to taste the joys of serving Jehovah as pioneers. So it is not surprising that the colporteur ranks soon began to increase.

When reading about the work they did, their perseverance in the face of opposition and their tireless efforts to push out into new territory, one cannot help but call to mind the similar experiences of the apostles of Jesus Christ as recorded in the Bible book of Acts.

VIOLENCE ERUPTS

Included among the full-time servants of those days were Pier de Jager and Henry Myrdal, who had by now teamed up and were touring the country with lectures and follow-up work. Although in many places the local clergy whipped up opposition and made attacks from the pulpit or through the press, it very rarely came to violence. However, when Brothers de Jager and Myrdal reached a little town called Dewetsdorp, in the Orange Free State, opposition did become violent. As usual, they booked a hall, prepared the handbills with their little rubber-stamp outfit, and advertised the talk. The local theater had been booked for the occasion, but on the morning of the day when the talk was to be given, the owner told the brothers that he was canceling the booking. The Dutch Reformed minister had informed him that, if he allowed the lecture to go on, the congregation would boycott his theater.

This left the brothers in a difficult situation. However, they went to the municipal authorities and obtained permission to have a public lecture in the market square. They immediately prepared new handbills, distributed them as quickly as they could, and the lecture was held that evening. About seventy-five attended.

Before the talk had gone very far the crowd began to press in on the speaker and to heckle him. The heckling increased. Suddenly Brother Myrdal, standing next to the speaker, felt a heavy blow on his head, nearly knocking him out. Happily, a policeman in plain clothes was at hand and saw what was going on. At the back of the crowd was the Dutch Reformed minister, egging his people on and deliberately causing this act of violence. Certain individuals were arrested, charged in court the following day and fined. Undismayed, the two brothers continued their lecture tour.

In 1928, the resounding resolution “Declaration Against Satan and for Jehovah” had been enthusiastically adopted by the assembly in Detroit, Michigan, bringing to a conclusion a series of seven annual messages. At that same assembly in Detroit, Brother Rutherford’s stirring discourse “Ruler for the People” was broadcast by a Watch Tower telephone hookup of 107 radio stations. In faraway Cape Town a little group remembers listening to that talk by shortwave radio. But in addition to the broadcast from America, it was arranged for lectures to be given over the air by way of the African Broadcasting Company, the sole broadcasting company in South Africa. Permission was given to broadcast seven lectures during 1928 from the company’s three studios situated at Cape Town, Johannesburg and Durban. In this way the good news reached remote and lonely places and many listened to the Kingdom message for the first time.

Also in the late 1920’s, a country-wide postal campaign was carried out by the brothers in order to give a witness to the people who could not be reached by the door-to-door work. Frank Smith, one of the Cape Town brothers, paid the cost of sending 50,000 booklets to all farmers, lighthouse keepers, forest rangers and others living off the beaten track. All the wrapping and addressing of this postal work was done by members of the Cape Town ecclesia. As a result, many orders for the publications were received along with encouraging letters showing that the good news, sent out in this unusual way, was bringing comfort and joy to isolated people. The orthodox religionists, of course, reacted as usual and there were numerous fierce attacks in church magazines throughout the country.

SOUTH-WEST AFRICA HEARS THE GOOD NEWS

It was this postal work that led to the Kingdom message also reaching the territory of South-West Africa, that is, the larger portion of its nearly 318,000 square miles of either desert or semiarid land. All along the western coast and some ninety miles inland lies the great Namib Desert. The thinly spread population of 610,000, of whom 60,000 are whites, is made up of South Africans, Germans and British on the European side and Hereros, Ovambos, Namas or Hottentots, Damaras and Bushmen on the African side. Added to this is a group who proudly call themselves “Basters” (literally “Hybrids”), because of their originating from the mingling of early white settlers with the Hottentots.

In 1928, this land was still absolutely untouched as far as the witness work was concerned. But during that year, when the postal campaign was organized, an up-to-date directory of the country was obtained and a copy of the booklet The People’s Friend was mailed to everyone whose name appeared therein. One of these Kingdom seeds fell on good soil in an unusual way.

A man named Bernhard Baade was working in a mine at the time and used to buy his eggs from a nearby farmer. One day the eggs came wrapped in some of the first pages of the booklet The People’s Friend. He began to read, and as he read his interest grew. But he had to wait for further supplies of eggs, wrapped in the rest of the pages of the booklet, to continue his reading. He wrote for literature and soon after took his stand for the truth.

The following year, 1929, Sister Lenie Theron was sent from South Africa to Windhoek, South-West Africa. From there she covered all the major towns throughout the country by train and post cart, traveling a total of 5,000 miles. Many of the people had received the booklet mailed the previous year and spoke with appreciation of it. Her own placements were phenomenal. In four months she placed 6,388 books and booklets in English, Afrikaans and German.

While Sister Theron was busy in South-West Africa, her partner, Elizabeth Adshade, was sent to Southern Rhodesia. Though meeting up with quite a lot of opposition from the police and magistrates in various places, she carried on bravely and covered all the European centers of population in the country.

By 1929, the Kingdom message was reaching a very wide area of the vast field under the South Africa branch. Speaking of this, the Year Book for 1930 says: “Inquiries for literature have been received by post from as far north as Kenya Colony, in British East Africa; Tanganyika and Nyasaland, in British Central Africa, and the Belgian Congo.”

PROBLEMS DO NOT PREVENT PROGRESS

Brother Paul Smit, our former schoolboy of Nylstroom, was in Pretoria by the late 1920’s. He recounts that the Pretoria group was going through a crisis, and, among other things, he says: “There was no progress in the group and organizing the company for service shook the group, and two left. At that time one of the elders (Brother Möller) was busy writing a book, and although the Society expressed its disapproval, and I appealed to him to abandon the undertaking, he persisted in his wrongful course. One Sunday morning, after the publication of the book, he brought some books to the hall and requested that the class assist in its distribution. I was shocked at this and got up and boldly stated that the Society disapproved of the publication and that whosoever opposed the policy of the Society I would oppose.” That shook the elders and they left, with their followers. The only ones remaining were an old invalid sister and Brother and Sister Smit.

Just after that, Brother and Sister Steynberg moved to the Pretoria area. This was a great encouragement to the reduced Pretoria group and also did much good for the Steynbergs. The Pretoria group had gone through a difficult cleansing period, but from then on the progress was steady and sound.

So much for the European group in Pretoria. What about the Africans there? Brother Hamilton Kaphwitt moved from Bulawayo to Pretoria in 1927; but, as there were no African meetings there at that time, he used to attend the meetings of the Africans in Johannesburg. Then, in 1931, a brother called Mulauzi came down from Nyasaland and joined Kaphwitt. These two started studying The Harp of God together. For quite a while the meetings for the African brothers in Pretoria were held in the home of Hamilton Kaphwitt. Even today many of the African congregations in the townships or “locations” near the European cities are meeting in private homes. The building of Kingdom Halls for the Africans has been opposed by government and municipal authorities until now.

In January 1930, Brother Phillips got married, and his wife joined the branch office staff. More reinforcements for the office also arrived in 1930​—Llewelyn Phillips and George Spence. Llewelyn Phillips came from Wales; he was not related to George Phillips, but had also had good experience in pioneer service and had served several years in the London Bethel.

It was also in the early 1930’s that the branch at Cape Town began producing booklets in the vernacular languages such as Xhosa, Zulu and Sesotho. The Harp of God came out in the Xhosa language and The Kingdom, the Hope of the World came out in Zulu.

PUSHING INTO EAST AFRICA

In 1931, another vast field in Africa began to be opened up, that of British East Africa. This was composed of what are now three separate countries, Kenya, Uganda and Tanzania (consisting of Tanganyika and the island of Zanzibar). In the early 1930’s they were all under British jurisdiction. With the rise of nationalism in Africa, these states, one by one, gained their independence from Britain. In 1962, Tanganyika became the independent republic of Tanzania within the British Commonwealth. Uganda became independent that same year, and Kenya in 1963. Because of the many nationalities and tribes making up the population of these parts, there is a polyglot confusion, but happily the Swahili language serves as a common medium of expression over all of East Africa.

Religiously, the designation “Dark Africa” has been fitting. The majority of the natives have been adherents of pagan religions. Missions of Christendom, both Catholic and Protestant, have been active here for many years, but as elsewhere in Africa, they did not produce Christians who “worship with spirit and truth.” (John 4:24) But when did the first rays of true light begin to shine in this spiritually dark region?

In Cape Town, about this time, a new brother named Gray Smith was sharing in auxiliary colporteur service. His older brother Frank was the first to get the truth, but in 1928 Gray also began to study seriously. He was baptized in 1929 and almost immediately took up auxiliary colporteur work. Later, he joined Frank in a most interesting trip to East Africa.

In 1931, the two of them were sent to Kenya to explore the possibilities of spreading the good news in East Africa. Kenya was at that time a British protectorate with a population of about 4,000,000, of which about 25,000 were Europeans. They took an automobile, which they had converted into a caravan, and sailed on the “Saxon Castle” for Mombasa, the seaport of Kenya. From there they traveled with their caravan the 400 miles to Nairobi, the capital, to which they had sent forty cartons of books. Due to the bad roads, it took them eight days to make this trip. They covered Nairobi and placed all the books in about a month. Many books were placed with Goanese Indians, but most of these publications were collected and burned by the Catholic priests.

On the return journey to South Africa both of these brothers contracted malaria. This was a real health hazard in those days. They got passage on a ship sailing from Dar es Salaam, but became so sick and delirious that they were taken ashore at Durban and put in a hospital. Frank Smith never recovered consciousness and passed away. Gray Smith just managed to survive and had to spend four months in a hospital. However, toward the end of 1931 he got back to Cape Town.

About this time, over in England, a young fellow named Robert Nisbet had just given up a good job in a London pharmaceutical laboratory and was about to take up pioneer service. Brother Rutherford, who was in London at the time, sent for him and said: “We are looking for someone to go to Cape Town; would you go?” Robert agreed and immediately began to make preparations.

On arriving at the Cape Town office, Brother Nisbet was shown another consignment of literature ready for dispatch by ship to East Africa, this time 200 cartons of it! He heard of the trip of the Smith brothers and the tragedy that overtook Frank. In spite of that, he eagerly accepted the assignment to go to East Africa. He was joined by David Norman, and they made the trip to their assignment. They were to cover the entire territories of Kenya, Uganda, Tanganyika and Zanzibar​—a really vast field!

Protecting themselves against malaria by sleeping under mosquito nets and taking big daily doses of quinine, which was available at all post offices in East Africa at cost price, as well as wearing topees or sun helmets during the day, they launched their witnessing campaign in Dar es Salaam, capital of Tanganyika, on August 31, 1931. This was no easy assignment, as shown by Brother Nisbet’s comment: “The glare of the sun from the white paved streets, the intense humid heat and the need to carry very heavy loads of literature from call to call were just some of the difficulties we had to face. But we were young and strong and enjoyed it.”

Within a fortnight these energetic pioneers had placed nearly a thousand books and booklets, among which were many “Rainbow Sets,” so called because of the varied colors of the books. This stirred up the ire of the clergy, and a notice was placed on the Catholic church’s bulletin board calling the attention of all parishioners to No. 1399 of the Canon Law prohibiting Catholics even to have such literature in their homes. Most of these books were placed with Indians. Because they had no literature in Swahili and due to lack of education on the part of these Africans, the brothers could not work among them.

From Dar es Salaam they moved on to Zanzibar, an island about twenty miles off the coast, once the center of slave trade. This city with its twisting narrow streets, where a stranger could easily get lost, was enveloped in a constant aroma of cloves, for Zanzibar supplies practically the whole world with cloves. It had a population of a quarter of a million, of which about 300 were Europeans​—at that time the rulers. The great majority were Swahilis and about 45,000 were Indians and Arabs. Many books were placed with these Indians and some with the Arabs, but again the majority of the population, being Swahili, was not reached with the Kingdom message.

After a stay of ten days at Zanzibar, they boarded a ship to Mombasa, the seaport of Kenya, en route to the highlands of Kenya, with their abundance of fresh vegetables and fruit, and moderate climate. They traveled by train and worked the towns along the line all the way to Lake Victoria. Here they crossed this inland sea, 250 miles long and 150 miles wide, to Kampala, the capital of Uganda. They distributed a great number of books here and obtained subscriptions for The Golden Age. Fifty miles out in the jungle a gentleman saw a friend enthusiastically reading the book Government. He came to Kampala to find the young men distributing this literature. He took a copy of all the books and subscribed for The Golden Age.

Before commencing their return journey by car they visited another town twenty-five miles farther inland, and were thrilled that they had been instrumental in bringing the printed message of the Kingdom, for the first time, so far into the interior of Africa. They came back from this town by another route and had the enjoyable experience of visiting the Ripon Falls, the source of the Nile River. On their way back to Mombasa they worked a few more towns along the railway line. After witnessing in Mombasa in indescribable heat, placing much literature and giving two well-attended talks, they went to one more place along the coast and then, on board the “Llandovery Castle,” sailed back to Cape Town, South Africa, a journey of three thousand miles.

On these first two trips into East Africa over 7,000 books and booklets were placed and many subscriptions were obtained for The Golden Age. Some of these seeds undoubtedly fell on good soil, for one gentleman who had received some booklets wrote to the Society in Cape Town and ordered a full set of Judge Rutherford’s books and booklets. He was managing a gold mine in the bundu (an isolated area) in Tanganyika. And so at a great cost in money, effort and even life itself on the part of devoted and zealous pioneers, the message was getting into British East Africa and the Kingdom work was progressing.

Yes, in 1931 a tremendous field was reached by the faithful few in South Africa at that time. That year a total of 68,280 books were placed in the South African field and eight service conventions were held to strengthen the faith of the brothers. How many were there to accomplish all this work over such a wide field? Only about a hundred publishers in the whole of southern Africa’.

FORWARD, AS JEHOVAH’S WITNESSES!

To crown the year 1931, the thrilling news came through from the convention at Columbus, Ohio, in the United States, concerning adoption of the name “Jehovah’s witnesses.” This brought great joy to Jehovah’s people around the world, including the small but energetic band in South Africa. Many brothers felt overawed at the thought of using the illustrious name of God, but it helped them to appreciate all the more their privilege in declaring Jehovah’s name throughout the whole of southern Africa. The Kingdom work and its development in southern Africa had reached another turning point.

Stimulated by their Scriptural name “Jehovah’s witnesses,” the brothers in southern Africa went forward with great zeal and determination in the early 1930’s. More and more spiritual weapons and theocratic instruments were being provided, and in 1932 the most powerful was undoubtedly the special booklet The Kingdom, the Hope of the World. In all countries Jehovah’s witnesses were busy placing this booklet and joining in the campaign of visiting every clergyman, politician and big-business man in the territory. Many of these had never been personally contacted before, but now they were given their opportunity.

Of course, high-ranking government officials and members of parliament are often difficult to contact. Hence, the brothers took advantage of the fact that at certain times of the year members of parliament move from Cape Town, the legislative capital, to Pretoria, the administrative capital. At just the right time, when these gentlemen were waiting at the Cape Town station before departing on their journey, the brothers came along and presented them with their copy of this special booklet. With the long trip of nearly 1,000 miles ahead of them, they had a good opportunity to read the contents of the publication and think upon it.

Another instrument that came into use during 1933 consisted of recorded talks by Brother Rutherford. The African Broadcasting Corporation agreed that the powerful message of these electrical transcriptions could be put on the air once a month from their three main stations at Cape Town, Johannesburg and Durban. In this way the message reached many homes​—and, no doubt, many hearts too—​in South Africa, Southern Rhodesia and as far north as Northern Rhodesia, 2,000 miles up into the African continent. Upon hearing the talks, many people accepted the literature more readily. After a year, however, an Advisory Committee on religious broadcasts was formed. This was composed of clergymen from orthodox religions, who saw to it that the Kingdom message on the air was silenced.

However, it was impossible to stop the zealous publishers of those days. In the small towns, where the large Dutch Reformed church was the main building for miles around, farmers used to gather together on the church square on the Sundays when Communion was celebrated (in Afrikaans this is called nagmaal which actually means “evening meal”). They would camp there with their tents and ox wagons. Often the brothers moved around among them, and this resulted in many discussions. The Afrikaans-speaking brothers, especially, just loved a spiritual fight with the weapons of truth. Later, these encounters would be retold with great gusto at their testimony meetings.

Very early in his pioneer experiences in the northern Transvaal, Fred Ludick came down with a bad attack of malarial fever. Some Africans came to his aid and made a concoction from a wild fruit, and this cured him. But on another occasion things did not work so well for Brother Ludick’s partner, Sidney McLuckie. This brother developed typhoid fever. Says Fred: “This strapping chap of about 165 pounds went right down to 90 pounds in just a few weeks, and he died. We buried him next to the mountains at Cala in the Transkei (Cape Province).” Thus another faithful servant of Jehovah had given his life in the development of the Kingdom work in southern Africa.

For a while Brother Ludick served in the Bushveld of the northern Transvaal and there worked with an isolated group including Brother Muller and his family. In the early 1930’s, Brother Muller did a tremendous work over all the northern Transvaal and even into the northern Cape and helped many to come to a knowledge of the truth.

Of course, they had their difficulties as well, including the time when Fred Ludick called at a Catholic mission station. There he met the priest and began explaining the purpose of his call but noticed that the face of the priest was getting redder and redder. Suddenly the priest rushed back into the building, returned with a gun and aimed it at Brother Ludick. However, Fred kept calm and just turned around and walked back toward the car, but with a chilly feeling in his spine.

By this time Brother Ludick had “graduated” from his bicycle to a 1928-model Fiat car with wooden spokes. With this he and Brother Muller covered a wide area of wild bushveld. They often had to sleep out under a tree at night, listening to the roar of the lions. But after a hard day in the field, traveling those very rough roads, mending the tires, puncture after puncture, they slept like logs​—lions or no lions! The brakes of the car also gave them trouble. On one occasion, while going over the dangerous Soutpans Berg Pass, they had to tie a piece of rawhide rope to the spokes of the front wheels and pull hard on this when going down the steep parts​—an ordeal accompanied by the smell of burning rubber! After an experience like that, the two brothers were happy to get back to the Muller farm, where a warm welcome would be waiting for them from Sister Muller and the children. These children were already getting good training at home and some of them later took up full-time service. Two of them are still serving at the South Africa branch office; one of them, Frans Muller, is the present branch overseer.

ST. HELENA RECEIVES A WITNESS

While this stirring activity was taking place in the Transvaal, pioneers were preparing for a trip to the island of St. Helena, a little speck in the Atlantic Ocean, some 1,200 miles off the west coast of Africa. The island is only 47 square miles in area and has less than 5,000 inhabitants, mostly Colored and very poor. This remote island was considered a safe place for the exile of Napoleon from 1815 to 1821, when it belonged to the British.

Gray Smith, now having recovered from his terrible sickness after the trip to East Africa, was ready for another real pioneering effort and prepared for a visit to St. Helena. His partner this time was Hal Ancketill, son of the previous branch overseer, Henry Ancketill. They took along a good supply of literature and worked the whole island thoroughly, placing nearly 1,000 pieces of literature.

As a result of this visit, a policeman, Thomas Scipio, accepted the truth and began publishing the Kingdom message. When he retired from the police force, Scipio, sixty years of age, became a pioneer and supported himself by growing vegetables. His son George Scipio became the first presiding overseer of the congregation later formed on the island.

Brother Scipio, senior, appreciated right from the beginning his responsibility to share the good news of the Kingdom with others. He gave a bold and wide witness to his relatives and the other islanders. A year later some had joined him in the witness work, and as soon as phonographs and Bible talks on records were available, he obtained this equipment. For years afterward this proved to be his most effective method of giving a witness to those who were willing to listen.

By 1935 a little group of six publishers was formed at Jamestown, the only town on the island. The faithful activities of the little group of publishers there brought results, and it grew. One of the new brothers who owned a café also obtained a phonograph and never lost an opportunity to play the records for his customers. By 1939 there were two groups organized, one at Jamestown and the other a few miles away at Longwood, where Napoleon had been kept in custody.

RETURN TO SOUTH-WEST AFRICA

After this very successful visit to St. Helena, Brother Smith decided to go to South-West Africa in 1935. For this trip, Brother Smith took along his wife and one of his sons. They had a van equipped with one of the new transcription machines and some records.

They certainly had a wonderful time, placing no less than 13,000 books and booklets in just five months and obtaining 70 subscriptions for The Golden Age. The clergy, mostly Lutheran, Catholic and Dutch Reformed, did not take kindly to this. In one place the Dutch Reformed minister charged Brother Smith with selling books without a license, but the magistrate just laughed and took some of the literature himself.

Again some of the seeds of truth fell on the right soil. One man in the south, Abraham de Klerk, who obtained some of the literature, read it and almost immediately became convinced of the truth. He stuck to his newfound faith and taught his family the best he could. Jehovah blessed his efforts, for his wife and some of his children accepted the truth. And as for “Oom” (Uncle) Abraham, one of the first Witnesses in South-West Africa, he continued faithfully serving Jehovah until he died in the late 1960’s.

SWAZILAND DURING THE 1930’S

Now let us cross over to the eastern side of South Africa and visit another colorful country, Swaziland. It is surrounded on three sides by the Transvaal and on the east has a common border with Mozambique. The area is about 6,700 square miles, with a population of some 420,000, of which only a few thousand are Europeans.

Pioneers visited Swaziland in the early 1930’s and a wonderful witness was given in the country. In addition to calling on the Europeans living in the towns, they also visited the paramount chief of the Swazi nation, King Sobhuza II. This man showed great friendliness to the Witnesses and gave them a royal welcome at his kraal. He assembled his personal bodyguard of a hundred warriors to hear a musical selection and a recorded speech by the Watch Tower Society president, J. F. Rutherford. Also, Brother F. Ludick, who was there, says it was quite an experience to witness to the king, who was surrounded by some fifty of his wives!

On another occasion, Robert and George Nisbet also witnessed to this king. After hearing several recordings by Brother Rutherford, the king was so delighted that he wanted to buy the machine, the records and the loudspeaker. An embarrassing situation for the pioneers! Eventually they succeeded in satisfying the king by leaving him a large supply of literature.

REACHING MAURITIUS AND MADAGASCAR

In 1933 the branch in South Africa decided to send two experienced pioneers to Mauritius and Madagascar (Malagasy Republic). Robert Nisbet and Bert McLuckie were given the fascinating assignment to visit these two islands off the east coast of Africa. They first went to Mauritius.

Before leaving Durban for Mauritius, they spent some time trying to learn French, which they understood would be the principal language. When they got to their destination, however, they found that most of the inhabitants spoke Creole, a sort of French dialect or patois. So the pioneers could not understand the people, and the people could not understand the pioneers. In fact, the problem for Brother Nisbet was even more complicated, in that he had a pronounced Scots accent. It happened on one occasion that a householder said to him: “Please talk to me in English, as I do not understand that language!”

Since the main influence and power on the island was Catholic, it is not surprising that these two brothers soon were in trouble. Complaints, inspired by the priests, reached the police, who cabled South Africa for confirmation of the brothers’ identity. The police defended the right of the brothers to preach, but warned them that the holding of meetings without permission was prohibited and that in their case no such permission would be granted. Also, the local newspaper, La Vie Catholique (Catholic Life), issued a warning about these two “false prophets.” Although this brought about a drop in their placements, it did not diminish their joy and determination in searching for the prospective “sheep.”

Visiting Mauritius at the same time as these two pioneers was the Roman Catholic Cardinal Hinsley, from Britain, for the purpose of officiating at the installing of a priest as the new bishop of the island. The place was full of visiting Catholic dignitaries and priests who had come for this special occasion. This gave the pioneers an excellent opportunity to offer the booklet The Kingdom, the Hope of the World. It was Robert Nisbet who offered the booklet to Cardinal Hinsley himself, and he accepted it without fuss. Bert McLuckie tried the newly installed bishop, James Leen, who quietly took the booklet, tore it into shreds and threw it into the wastepaper basket!

In those days, on the island of Mauritius, travel costs were very low, probably lower than in any other part of the world. For instance, one could go right around the island by train, then again by bus and train for as little as a half crown ($0.35). In that way the pioneers covered every part of the island. In addition to literature in French, they placed booklets in Chinese and various Indian languages, such as Tamil, Urdu and Hindi. On one occasion the editor of an Indian newspaper enjoyed a lengthy article in The Golden Age that fearlessly exposed the wrongdoing of the Roman Catholic Hierarchy. The editor started printing this article in serial form. But before it was concluded the police stepped in and gave the editor a serious warning of possible consequences, which made him stop publishing the material. In spite of much opposition from the priests, however, the two pioneers finished their assignment.

Their visit to Mauritius gave a wide witness on this island and they left a little group that continued doing some informal witnessing. How happy Brothers Nisbet and McLuckie must have felt with this fruitage of their labor! But what about their visit to Madagascar?

This huge island (fourth largest in the world) lying off the southeast coast of Africa is about 1,000 miles long. The east coast receives the full brunt of the monsoon winds and has a very heavy rainfall. But other parts of the island are much drier and so the flora of the country varies from desert types to rich tropical growth.

Madagascar has a population of about six million people of very mixed origin. It appears that Arabs and Hindus established trading posts on Madagascar in very early times. Since then the Portuguese, French and British all had a hand in trying to colonize the island. Finally, it was the French who took possession, and in 1896 it became a colony of France. Since then French culture and the French language have had a big influence on the island and its inhabitants. This meant that in the 1930’s, when Jehovah’s witnesses first called there with the Kingdom message, the Catholic religion was the prevailing one.

Robert Nisbet and Bert McLuckie arrived in Madagascar by ship in 1933. They began their work cautiously, making a start in Tamatave, the chief seaport, where they disembarked. They quickly covered the territory, placing much literature in the process, and then moved on to the capital, Tananarive, situated inland.

On arriving in Tananarive they came in contact with a Greek storekeeper who had some of the Society’s literature in his own language. He had received this from relatives in Brooklyn, New York. The brothers were most encouraged by this, and were delighted when this hospitable Greek gave them free accommodations in a room above his store.

Brothers Nisbet and McLuckie were not able to establish any group or congregation on this visit. Of course, they had a very big problem with the language, since very few people understood English. But they remained in Tananarive until they had placed all their literature before returning to South Africa. Thus many seeds of truth were sown on this island.

EARLY EFFORTS IN MOZAMBIQUE

Another vast field where little had yet been done was the Portuguese possession called Mozambique. The area is almost 300,000 square miles and is mainly flat and low lying. Its population now is 6,650,000, of which only a small percentage are whites. The capital city is Lourenço Marques, an important port situated in the extreme south near the border of South Africa. The other important port and city is Beira, a few hundred miles farther north.

The Catholic Church has dominated the religious field for centuries, although there is supposed to be freedom of religion, and there are quite a number of small Protestant sects operating in the cities. Forced labor was used on the farms, and for this African workers got very little remuneration. Also, the punishment of Africans was severe. On the brighter side is the fact that Portuguese East Africa has no official color bar. There are no signs “Europeans only” and no segregation in transportation, banks, shops, or anywhere else. What they do have is distinction among the Africans themselves between “uncivilized” Africans and what they call assimilados, or “civilized” Africans. Any African may rise from his status as “uncivilized” and become “civilized” by a process of law. He passes certain tests and becomes a “white” man instead of “black,” no matter what his color. An African who wishes to do this applies to a local tribunal and must prove that he is literate in Portuguese, belongs to the Christian faith (Catholic), has a certain financial standing, and is willing to live in the European manner. The main thing is that he should be capable of adopting the white man’s way of life. He then has a right to a passport, his children are entitled to free education and he has a right to vote, but he becomes subject to military service, and has to pay a high income tax. Only a very small proportion of Africans are able to qualify.

In 1925, the Kingdom seed had found good soil among the Africans in this part of the earth, and for several years grew steadily without hindrance. But in the late 1930’s the authorities started checking up on those who were subscribers for The Watchtower and quite a number were arrested. Those arrested in southern Mozambique met up with other brothers in prison, who were down from Nyasaland, so that there was quite a large group all together. It was only after two to three years that they finally had a trial, which resulted in some being deported to the penal colony of Saõ Tomé for twelve years, while others were sent to work camps in the northern part of Mozambique for ten years. In the sentence it was stated that they should not be together in one place, for then the area would be ‘poisoned by their teaching because it is very strong stuff.’

In the group sentenced was a brother called Mahlanguana. He recalls that one of the places where he worked in the north was on a large coconut plantation near the small port of Antonio Enes. One day the chief of police came around to check up on him and found him preparing a Bible sermon. The chief reported this to the director of the penal colony, but he said that this would not do any harm. The police chief, nevertheless, gave Brother Mahlanguana a beating and put him in prison for four months. Years later, having completed his sentence, Brother Mahlanguana returned to Vila Luiza. The Kingdom-preaching work had come to a standstill there. But his return helped the local interested ones to make a fresh start and the work grew well.

In that way a fine start had been made in the African field in southern Mozambique. But what about the Europeans?

It was in 1929 when the first European arrived in Lourenço Marques and began doing some witness work with the Portuguese whites. This was Henry Myrdal, who had given up pioneer service in order to marry Edith Thompson. These two carried on by themselves, finding it rather hard going at times. But in 1933 Piet de Jager, who had by this time married the zealous colporteur Lenie Theron, was sent by the Society to help out with the European field in Mozambique. Brother and Sister de Jager covered all the European territory there and placed large quantities of literature in both English and Portuguese.

Two other pioneers paid a visit to Lourenço Marques in 1935, but their stay was very short indeed. The pioneers were Brothers Fred Ludick and David Norman. They made their home with the Myrdal family. Here is their story: “On the fifth day of our work while we were sitting just like two well-behaved visitors, having tea on the public square, Brother David said to me: ‘Fred, don’t look that way, but to the left, over there, two men have been watching us now for nearly half an hour’ . . . When we got home that very same day, Sister Edith Myrdal said: ‘The secret police have been here repeatedly looking for you two.’ Her words were hardly out when the siren of the van came screeching around the corner and we were immediately packed into the Black Maria (the van used for picking up or transporting criminals).”

The two brothers were taken before a high-ranking official, Senhor Teixeira, to whom David Norman boldly said that he knew that the bishop was behind the whole conspiracy. This touched a very sore spot and Teixeira jumped up and roared: “If you were my citizens I’d have you here and now banned to the Island of Madeira, but because you are South African citizens I’ll have you deported at once.” That same day the brothers left Lourenço Marques for the border of South Africa with one carload of policemen in front and another behind, all armed to the teeth with guns and swords. On reaching the frontier, the brothers, who still had some literature with them, witnessed to the police guards, placed literature with them and then shook hands all around and said good-bye!

Further action from the bishop of Mozambique came in 1937, when Brother Myrdal was called to an interview with the chief of police, who said that he had received a complaint from the bishop. His complaint had been that the literature of the Society being distributed in the country would result in people’s rising up in arms and causing a revolution. Brother Myrdal tried to explain, but the official would not listen and informed him that if he continued to distribute literature he would be deported immediately.

However, Brother Myrdal fought back. He arranged for an interview with the governor-general in order to appeal the decision of the police. The governor, though kindly, put the matter into the hands of his assistant, Senhor Mano. As it happened, Mano was a very reasonable person, nominally a Catholic, but in disagreement with many of the Church’s doctrines. He read through the Society’s literature carefully and came to the conclusion that the accusation that it would foment revolution was false. Senhor Mano was very impressed with the books and said he was taking no further action. So the plan of the bishop to get rid of Jehovah’s witnesses had been thwarted.

Meanwhile, Brother Myrdal employers were very annoyed by the possibility of his being deported. Owing to their attitude, Brother Myrdal sent in his resignation; but instead of accepting it the firm eventually decided to transfer him to their Johannesburg store, to take effect later, in 1939.

Yet another attempt to send European pioneers to Lourenço Marques was made in 1938. David Norman came again, this time with a new partner, Brother Frank Taylor who had recently arrived from England. But within a few days of their arrival, the police were on the job again. Their instructions were that the two pioneers must stop working or they would be deported immediately. The Cape Town branch advised that the pioneers should return to South Africa, but leave their large stock of Portuguese literature with the Myrdals.

In the meantime the governor-general, who had been friendly and sympathetic, and who was well-loved by the people, was demoted by the Portuguese government and transferred to the little Portuguese colony of Goa, in India. A rabid Roman Catholic official took his place.

Realizing that the stay of the Myrdals in Mozambique was now running out, the Society suggested that copies of the literature be sent by mail to each government official throughout the land. The Myrdals made up envelopes with Portuguese literature and the very day before leaving the country they posted these hundreds of packets in various mailboxes.

Although no definite interest had been established in the European field in Mozambique, progress was steadily being made in the African field in spite of persecution. By 1940 the number of African publishers in Mozambique had reached a peak of thirty-eight. They had meetings at four different centers.

ORGANIZING IN NYASALAND

After Brother Hudson’s visit to Nyasaland in 1925, the few who continued to look to the Society for guidance kept in touch with the office in Cape Town. Then, in 1933, it became evident that there was a nucleus of sincerely interested ones who needed help. So an application was made to have a European representative in Nyasaland. The application was favorably received by the governor. Accordingly, in May 1934 a depot was opened in that country, at Zomba, under the supervision of the South Africa branch. As far as the Cape Town office could judge, there then were about a hundred sincerely interested ones in Nyasaland. Bert McLuckie was sent from South Africa to organize the work in that field.

His destination was the home of Richard Kalinde, where he stayed for a month or so. This African brother was to become his close companion during his stay in Nyasaland. Brother McLuckie had hardly got started when he suffered a severe attack of malaria, which put him in the hospital for two weeks. After his recovery he was able to obtain two rooms to be used as the depot of the Society in Nyasaland. He used one as the office and the other for sleeping accommodations.

His main job at first was to bring order to the chaotic conditions caused by the so-called “Watchtower movements.” This did not prove as difficult as he had expected. For one thing, the chief of police in Nyasaland recognized that the false African movements had nothing to do with the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society. Also, the branch in Cape Town had given Brother Bert McLuckie a clear lead or guide in handling the situation. He visited group after group in all parts of Nyasaland. After giving a talk at each place and with Brother Kalinde acting as interpreter, he would simply read the resolution as it appeared in the booklet The Kingdom, the Hope of the World. This resolution was in connection with the Scriptural name Jehovah’s witnesses. All those in favor of this resolution were requested to signify this by raising their hands. The majority did raise their hands, but many were insincere, as later events proved.

Brother McLuckie made further visits to the congregations from time to time, and many were helped in this way to withdraw support from the false “Watchtower movements” and their leaders. In doing this work Brother McLuckie had many interesting experiences, as some of the congregations were well off the beaten track. Sometimes the local brothers actually made roads extending miles out into the bush, for his car to travel over in order to reach their meeting places. One very isolated group could be reached only by canoe. This was quite a dangerous trip of a score of miles through crocodile-infested waters. Brother McLuckie sat on a chair in the center of the canoe, careful not to rock it, and the African brothers took turns paddling. He certainly appreciated how the brothers provided accommodations and food and showed their appreciation for spiritual things.

Brother McLuckie also worked among the Europeans in Nyasaland and at one stage visited a place called Karonga. To get there he had to travel by auto down the Livingstonia Mountain along a road with several hairpin bends so sharp that he had to stop the car in order to negotiate them by slowly reversing and then going forward. One of his contacts was with two Greek businessmen who took publications in their own language. Later, one of them was baptized.

In November of 1934, two pioneers from South Africa made a trip through Portuguese East Africa and into Nyasaland. They were able to witness to the small European populations of Zomba, Blantyre, Limbe and other places. The records show that they placed seven hundred books and booklets on that trip. Apparently this was the first time that any systematic house-to-house work had been done among the European people there.

So at long last solid theocratic organization was being established in Nyasaland. Reports for field service were also being collected and for 1934 the average number of publishers was twenty-eight. Soon after this Brother McLuckie was recalled to work in the Cape Town branch office. His brother, Bill McLuckie took over the depot in Nyasaland on March 17, 1935, and served there faithfully for many years.

As the theocratic organization established itself among the many interested ones in Nyasaland the number participating in and reporting field service grew very rapidly. The year 1935 saw the number of publishers rise from 28 in 1934 to 340.’ Meanwhile, local opposition was also increasing and some of the missionaries of Christendom were inciting the government officials to interfere with the activities of the brothers. They did succeed in having one of the booklets and the magazine The Golden Age banned in that country as of November 1934. But growth continued and by 1937 the number of congregations was up to 48, and the peak of publishers was up to 1,319.

Soon after this some talks were recorded in Cinyanja and these were very much appreciated by the African brothers. Many of the congregations were clubbing together to buy sound equipment, some arranging for fishing parties to Lake Nyasa, then putting their catch on the market and adding the proceeds to their “phonograph fund.” In some areas of the north they would buy a huge tree, and then cut it down and float it to their village. There they would set about hollowing out the trunk and shaping it into a canoe. This would then be sold, and with the money they would be able to get themselves a phonograph. This would mean months of hard work for the publishers, but it enabled them to get a phonograph and to make their Kingdom activity more effective. The book Riches was published in Cinyanja that year, providing the congregation with wonderful spiritual food. Consequently, the depot servant was able to report that never before had there been such unity among the brothers.

RENEWED EFFORTS IN BRITISH EAST AFRICA

As mentioned earlier, British East Africa was visited in 1931 by Brothers Gray and Frank Smith, and later by Robert Nisbet and David Norman. Much literature had been placed during these visits and a wide witness given. But it was time for another visit.

The third campaign into East Africa was in 1935, by four pioneers from South Africa. They were Gray Smith, his wife and the two Nisbet brothers, Robert and George. This time they were well equipped with two three-quarter-ton delivery vans fitted out as living quarters, complete with beds, kitchen, water supply and a spare petrol (gasoline) tank, also removable wire gauze screens for protection against mosquitoes. This mobility enabled them to reach places not formerly witnessed to, although the roads were sometimes overgrown with grass up to ten feet high. They often slept out in the wilds and could see, hear and feel the throb of the heart of Africa with its abundance of wildlife​—roaring lions at night, peacefully grazing zebras, giraffes and the ominous presence of rhinos and elephants.

On reaching Tanganyika they parted company. Brother Smith and his wife stayed in Tanganyika for a time, while the Nisbet brothers went on to Nairobi, where the Smiths were to meet them later. While in Tanganyika the Smiths were arrested and ordered to return to South Africa. But Brother Smith decided to go on to Nairobi as he held a South African passport endorsed “British subject by birth.” On arriving in Nairobi, Kenya, he and his wife immediately went to the police officials and got permission to stay, upon depositing £100 ($280), which they received back on returning south.

They proceeded to Uganda. On reaching Kampala, they found it to be a hostile place where the police kept them under continual surveillance. Nevertheless, they succeeded in placing a lot of literature before they were compelled to leave Uganda due to a deportation order by the governor. So they traveled back to Nairobi, where once again they linked up with the Nisbet brothers.

Here, too, they experienced opposition from the authorities, but an excellent witness was given, with over 3,000 volumes and approximately 7,000 booklets distributed and a number of subscriptions obtained for The Golden Age. A vigorous protest was made against the deportation orders, but with no satisfactory explanation forthcoming from the authorities.

During this campaign Robert Nisbet contracted typhoid fever and was left behind in the Nairobi hospital while the rest of the party started back. Brother Smith and George Nisbet tried to get into Zanzibar, but permission was refused; so they returned to South Africa. Robert Nisbet recovered well and later, in 1955, became the first branch overseer of Mauritius. His brother George, after a period of missionary service in Mauritius, was sent back to South Africa and began serving in the South Africa branch in 1958.

These pioneers who blazed the trail into “Dark Africa” indeed had great faith to face all the hardships and dangers that this activity entailed. Of the six pioneers, four had extended stays in hospitals​—the result of blackwater fever, malaria and typhoid fever. Through their efforts a tremendous amount of literature was distributed, laying a foundation for the spiritual building work Gilead School graduates were to start in the 1950’s.

FURTHER PROGRESS IN SOUTHERN RHODESIA

The last visit to Southern Rhodesia (now Rhodesia) had been made in 1929 by a lone pioneer, Sister Adshade, who had encountered many obstacles from the authorities. The next visit by pioneers from South Africa was in May 1932. This was a group of four pioneers in two cars, Brother and Sister Piet de Jager and Brothers Robert Nisbet and Ronald Snashall. The party arrived at the border on a Saturday afternoon, when the officials were enjoying a game of tennis. The brothers stated that they were representing the International Bible Students Association, and the officials, perhaps anxious to get back to their game, made no further inquiry; hence, they did not realize that they were allowing representatives of the real Watch Tower Society into the country. But soon the fat was in the fire. After only a few days’ work in Bulawayo, the pioneers were called into the C.I.D. (Criminal Investigation Department) headquarters and to the police station and had to make lengthy written statements.

Several days later, on the order of the governor, the brothers were told to leave within forty-eight hours, and no appeal was allowed. They consulted a friendly man who had legal experience and, on his advice, insisted on making an appeal, refusing to go until a decision had been given. They presented their appeal to the chief of the C.I.D. for transmission to the governor. The very next day the newspapers in England and South Africa published reports on the incident. The Cape Times of May 30, 1932, said: “BULAWAYO, Saturday. Four European visitors from the Union, who arrived here three weeks ago with the intention of carrying on missionary work, have been ordered to leave the Colony by Monday next, being deemed by the authorities to be ‘undesirable inhabitants or visitors.’

“The authorities, it is said, disapprove of the doctrines which they believe the missionaries intend to propagate.”

Meanwhile, the brothers had contacted the branch in London, and from there the Society sent a cable to the High Commissioner for Southern Rhodesia. As a result, the decision was altered and the party was allowed to stay for six months, provided they did no work among the Africans. This was now the third time that a fine witness was given to the European population in Southern Rhodesia. Although there is no record of any outstanding interest aroused on that occasion, a personal testimony and copies of the book Vindication and the booklet The Kingdom, the Hope of the World were given to almost all the rulers in this country.

During their stay, Brother P. de Jager paid a special visit to Mr. Moffat, the prime minister of Rhodesia, at his farm. Apparently, they had a very friendly conversation. As a result, Brother de Jager wrote letters to the authorities, applying for permission to send European representatives so that the work of the Watch Tower Society among the Africans would come under proper supervision. He did this in October 1932. Already the branch office in Cape Town had sent a letter for that purpose to the colonial secretary of the government of Southern Rhodesia, dated September 14, 1932. However, this combined effort on the part of the Cape Town branch and Brother de Jager met with failure. It seems that the Rhodesian authorities, incited by the local clergy, had closed the door on Jehovah’s witnesses in Rhodesia.

The branch in Cape Town did not take this lying down, and wrote another long letter to the colonial secretary of Rhodesia in October of 1932, which put the case very strongly. The reply came quickly and curtly: “The Government is unable to reconsider its decision previously conveyed to you, whereby certain representatives of your society were declared to be prohibited immigrants to this Colony.” Yet another try, a letter directed to the Minister of Internal Affairs in Rhodesia a year later in November of 1933, brought the same response.

The branch in Cape Town kept firing away, and each year for several years wrote a long letter to the authorities in Salisbury requesting permission to send special representatives of the Society to organize and direct the Kingdom work. The government, in turn, regularly wrote back refusing permission. The fact that in 1934 the authorities in Nyasaland gave permission for a depot to be opened and for a European brother to organize the work there, and that a similar arrangement was made in Northern Rhodesia in 1936, gave the branch office in Cape Town fresh ammunition to use in this fight. In 1938 apparently two applications were made and in answer to the second one, a letter dated 16th November, 1938, from the Secretary for Native Affairs, said: “I am directed to inform you that the Government are not prepared to recognise the Society until they have had further time to observe the effect of recognition in Northern Rhodesia and Nyasaland. And further that it is improbable that the Government will agree to accord the Society recognition until their literature is less unsuitable for the Natives of this Colony.”

However, the efforts to further the Kingdom work in Southern Rhodesia took other forms than just a regular exchange between the Cape Town branch and the Southern Rhodesian government. On October 25, 1935, the Southern Rhodesia Government Gazette published the text of two bills formulated to control preaching work. One was referred to as “Native Preachers Act, 1936,” for the purpose of controlling religious movements among natives by the issue of certificates to native preachers and teachers. After much discussion and debating this bill did not get passed as a law. Another bill, referred to as the “Sedition Act, 1936,” was for the purpose of suppressing seditious utterances, newspapers, books, pictures and Gramophone records. Subsequent discussions and debates made it very clear that this bill was particularly directed against the work of the Society. This Sedition Bill, before it became law, being so obviously a new weapon forged against the Kingdom work, drew the fire of the Society’s Brooklyn office. President Rutherford himself wrote a letter to the prime minister of Southern Rhodesia and all members of the legislative assembly warning them of the dangerous course they were following. The Cape Town branch printed 25,000 copies of this letter and these were sent to every European whose name appeared in the Southern Rhodesia directory.

But, in spite of this, the Sedition Bill became law and very soon afterward fourteen of the Society’s publications were declared to be seditious (seven bound volumes and seven booklets). As a test case, copies were immediately posted to an African brother, Brother Kabungo, who was visiting the congregations in Southern Rhodesia at that time. These were seized by the customs officials on arrival in Bulawayo, and the Society replied by making application for their release. The case came before the High Court of Southern Rhodesia in May 1937. The Society’s advocate, Mr. Beadle (later, chief justice in Rhodesia), had made a careful study of the literature. In discussion with Brother George Phillips, the South Africa branch overseer, for two days before the case began, he showed that he was very familiar with the contents. The merits of the books were fully discussed in court for several days. Brother Phillips, up from Cape Town, had the unusual and interesting experience of sitting beside Counsel in court and helping him to find relevant scriptures and to make proper explanation on extracts from the publications under discussion. After the hearing, the judge, Mr. Justice J. Hudson, intimated that he would read the books before giving his decision. His decision was delivered on September 23, 1937. The judge discussed the pros and cons of the arguments of the defense, then summed up his opinion by saying: “They can all be characterised as publications written in good faith with intention of calling attention to remedying the fundamental defect in the organization and administration of all earthly governments. . . . My opinion then is that none of the publications is seditious.”

This was an important victory for the Society. However, the government’s answer to that was to lodge an appeal. This came before the Appellate Division of the Supreme Court of the Union of South Africa on March 15, 1938. Judgment was delivered on March 22, 1938, by Justice N. J. de Wet, and this upheld the decision of the Southern Rhodesia Court. Much publicity was given to the case in newspapers of Rhodesia and South Africa. In fact, the Bulawayo Chronicle quoted the opinion of the court in full. In this way an excellent witness was given and the Society’s publications were released.

Work among the brothers was increasing well. By 1938 the number of Kingdom proclaimers had risen to 321, and 20 phonographs were being used in the field. The number of company organizations, or congregations, was then 34.

Early in 1938 the Society applied for permission to send two European representatives once again to work and encourage the European field and this was granted, “provided each, either before or on arrival, gives a written undertaking not to distribute any literature or conduct public meetings or any propaganda among the native population of Southern Rhodesia.” So, although the tide of battle was turning in the Society’s favor, it was by no means over.

The two pioneers sent up by the Society in 1938 were Robert Nisbet and Jim Kennedy, a South African who was fairly new in the pioneer service. At the border post of Beitbridge they were stopped by the authorities, questioned and finally allowed to enter the country for six months. They had a very fine time working among the Europeans and left much literature wherever they went. At one place, a gold-mining area, they placed nearly 200 bound books in one day. The police, of course, were keeping a watch on them and they had to report constantly to the local police station. Almost everywhere people seemed to have heard of them and were expecting their visit. The farmers were mainly friendly and hospitable, but, on a few occasions, when they heard the name “Watchtower” it was like flagging a bull.

In Bulawayo they met a Brother McGregor, who had been in the truth in Scotland but had grown spiritually cold. He was much encouraged by the pioneers and after some time he made another start in the work. The pioneers also found the Gunn family who had been contacted by George Phillips and Henry Myrdal some twelve years previously. They too were inactive, but were revived spiritually by the two pioneers. So, in 1938, they were able to organize a group in Bulawayo. It was the first European study group in Southern Rhodesia, with about seventeen persons showing interest. In time, Brother McGregor acted as the Society’s representative in Rhodesia and did much useful work in collecting reports and looking after the Kingdom interests in that country.

FACING DIFFICULTIES IN NORTHERN RHODESIA

The Witnesses were winning the battle in Southern Rhodesia. But how were they faring in the neighboring country of Northern Rhodesia (Zambia), where, back in 1925, Mwana Lesa had caused such difficulty?

The years that followed the episode of Mwana Lesa were difficult. Groups of interested persons were to be found in most of the main centers along the railway line. The line had been laid from Livingstone, on the southern border, to the Copper Belt area and the Congo border adjacent to the Copper Belt. These groups were formed from among persons who had developed some contact by mail with the Brooklyn, New York, office of the Society or with the Cape Town office. The extent of the communications was limited to literature orders and donations. The one corresponding became recognized as the group leader and those associating with the group acknowledged him as such.

Because of continual harassment from the secular authorities and lack of organizational direction, most meetings were limited to small groups in homes. Nevertheless, sincerely devoted Christians were pursuing a serious study of God’s Word with the limited material available.

A young man looking for direction was Thomson Kangalē. In 1931, Thomson, in his early twenties, found himself looking for employment after the closing of the Bwana Mkumwa Mine due to the world depression. He thus sought and found new employment with the Nkana Mine at Kitwe. Soon he was assigned to supervise two football teams of mine employees. Sharing accommodations with him was a young boy, a goal-keeper. One Sunday, this young lad chanced upon the local meeting of Jehovah’s witnesses, and returned with a pocket edition of a volume of Studies in the Scriptures. Thomson, stimulated by this boy’s determination to understand the contents of the book, decided to go to these meetings and see for himself. At the meeting he attended, special emphasis was given to the use of The Harp of God, and Thomson procured a copy. He records that he devoured the contents of his new book, and soon “capitulated all my feelings heartedly to do God’s work,” qualifying as a candidate for water baptism in the same year. Brother Thomson Kangalē entered the pioneer service on October 13, 1937, and has served as servant to the brethren, and district servant (circuit and district overseers), taking the good news into the areas of Tanganyika and Uganda on assignments from the Northern Rhodesia branch office.

However, looking back a few years prior to Brother Kangalē’s contact with the truth, we see that the preaching work was greatly opposed in Northern Rhodesia. All efforts of the Society from 1927 to 1934 to send European representatives on a permanent basis to supervise the work in Northern Rhodesia were either refused or ignored. The two latest applications made in that period were, one on October 12, 1932, and the other on September 20, 1934, the latter being acknowledged but no considered reply sent. Subsequent events proved that a scheme to suppress the work entirely was then afoot.

By this time some of the Society’s literature such as The Harp of God and a number of booklets had been translated and published in Cinyanja. The Harp of God was the textbook used by interested Africans in their studies. An incomplete report in the 1935 Year Book of Jehovah’s Witnesses showed that 11,759 pieces of literature were distributed during 1934 by a handful of publishers in the two Rhodesias. This activity aroused the ire of false religionists and political elements, who charged the beliefs and misdeeds of members of indigenous movements against the representatives of the Society, and engineered mischief by law.​—Ps. 94:20.

‘TROUBLE FRAMED BY DECREE’

This mischief was framed by an amendment to the Penal Code of Northern Rhodesia that was piloted through the Legislative Council by Attorney-General Fitzgerald, an ardent Roman Catholic, on May 3, 1935. This law became known as Ordinance 10 of 1935. It was obvious that it was aimed at the literature of the Watch Tower Society. Said Mr. Fitzgerald: “It makes it an offence to sell or distribute seditious newspapers; it also gives power to certain officers to search packages in the post with a view to seeing whether they contain seditious matter; and, finally, a most important section, it gives the governor power by proclamation to prohibit importation into the territory of any newspaper, book or document.” He also admitted that they acted on the advice of others, undoubtedly that of a missionary conference held at Victoria Falls! Some of the freedom-loving members of the Council opposed this bill. The bill was, nevertheless, passed and proved a ready tool in the hands of the enemies so that the sudden outbreak of the 1935 riots in tile Copper Belt gave them just what they were waiting for to get at Jehovah’s witnesses.

Right from the outset it was evident that enemies of Jehovah’s witnesses were determined to make them the “scapegoats.” At the time of the riots there were only 350 witnesses of Jehovah in both Rhodesias. In an effort to bring the work in Northern Rhodesia in line with the way it was done in other countries, the African Witnesses had held an unofficial assembly at Lusaka, May 10-12, to discuss the preaching work and the need for clean Christian living. Doubtless thinking that the Lusaka meeting had some connection with the Copper Belt disturbances toward the end of May, C.I.D. (Criminal investigation Department) raids upon Jehovah’s witnesses took place throughout Northern and Southern Rhodesia. At Luanshya six of Jehovah’s witnesses were arrested on June 5, and kept in prison for three days, after which they were released with no charge filed against them. At Ndola an orderly in the government hospital lost his job because he was one of Jehovah’s witnesses. All over the country the same treatment was meted out to Jehovah’s witnesses at the instigation of government officials. In a letter dated July 1, 1935, to the Chief Secretary of the Government of Northern Rhodesia, the branch overseer in Cape Town defended Jehovah’s witnesses against all these false charges and asked him to take the necessary steps to stop the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses.

The evidence taken by the Commission of Enquiry into the disturbances and which was published two volumes proved that not a single one of Jehovah’s witnesses was implicated in the uprising. To the contrary, Mr. J. L. Keith, district commissioner for Ndola, went on record as saying: Jehovah’s Witnesses and the Watch Tower itself as an organization took no part in the strike.”

Evidence given clearly proved that the Awemba, who were predominantly Catholics and very opposed to Jehovah’s witnesses, were behind the disturbances and that the chief causes were the increase in head tax and the way it was introduced. Said the manager of the Roan Antelope Copper Mine (Luanshya): “It seemed every time we asked anybody the cause of the disturbances it constantly kept coming back to the increased tax.”

Just before the hearing of the Commission, which started on July 8, 1935, the Cape Town branch of the Watch Tower Society received an answer to its persistent requests for permission to send a European representative to Northern Rhodesia. A letter from the Northern Rhodesia government, dated June 24, 1935, stated: “The Government . . . will now raise no objection to any such move which may be conducive to better supervision and control of your followers in this country.” It was decided to send Piet de Jager, but the Northern Rhodesia government objected to this, stating they wanted “some more senior member of the Society’s staff.” When they were assured that he was being sent only to make investigations and submit a report and that a man of British extraction would eventually be in charge, they agreed. But because the Watch Tower Society and Jehovah’s witnesses had been drawn before the Commission of Enquiry through false accusations and the Government had submitted a number of specially selected “extracts” from certain of our publications to determine their “subversive character,” it was decided to send Brother de Jager in time to give evidence on behalf of the Society. He gave an excellent witness explaining all those so-called subversive “extracts,” which even Mr. J. L. Keith, a government official, admitted were no more subversive than extracts from the Bible.

The findings of the Commission were published on October 2, 1935. In summing up, it said: “The Commission find that the immediate impelling cause of the disturbance at Mufulira was the sudden bawling out by the mine police in the evening that the tax was increased all round to 15s.; and that it was the false announcement of the success of the strike at Mufulira, together with the challenge to the natives to show that they were not old women, which was the immediate impelling cause of the disturbances at Nkana and Luanshya.” But the enemies of Jehovah’s witnesses gloated over the following statement about the Watch Tower Society: “The Commission find that the teaching and literature of the Watch Tower bring civil and spiritual authority, especially native authority, into contempt; that it is a dangerously subversive movement; and that it is an important predisposing cause to the recent disturbances.

This was just what they wanted, so on October 4, 1935, the governor, Hubert Young, used the powers given him by Ordinance 10 of 1935 and banned a whole list of our books, including The Harp of God, the only book in Cinyanja widely used by the natives, and another that had been out of print for ten years! Eventually all but two booklets written by J. F. Rutherford were banned.

Much publicity was given in the public press concerning the report of the Commission and the subsequent banning of our literature. Most of it was prejudiced and adverse, but the Cape Town branch defended the truth in every case. An excellent witness was given through a special issue of the Northern Rhodesia Advertiser, October 16, 1935, of Ndola, which published the Society’s evidence before the Commission, written representation and correspondence in full. In this edition the editor extended an invitation to the people to come and see the banned books at his office. “We have the whole range for reference in our office. Any one that wishes to consult them can see them here. . . . Do not be afraid; come and see what all the talk is about and form your own opinion.” As soon as the Commission’s report was published, copies of the booklets Government and Intolerance, with a covering letter, found their way into the hands of every European in Northern Rhodesia.

SOME SUCCESS ATTAINED

The Northern Rhodesia Advertiser, in drawing the attention to some inconsistency in the administration of Northern Rhodesia, said: “Whether we agree with Jehovah’s Witnesses or not, it is plain that there is something radically wrong with the administration of this country if the Governor of Nyasaland welcomed these people in 1933, while as Governor of Northern Rhodesia he (the same man) allows them after much hesitancy. Then, after two months he requests them to leave the country without any valid reason whatsoever, and that while wrongful practices on the part of natives of the ‘indigenous Watch Tower,’ so-called, were due to the fact that the Government had not allowed them into the territory before.”

The editor of the newspaper was referring to the fact that the Society was asked by the Northern Rhodesian government to recall Brother de Jager after two months “as formal protest has been made by European residents of Ndola against his presence there, and his activities appear to have a disturbing effect. In answer to this, the Cape Town branch pointed out that the Northern Rhodesian government had granted permission to send a European representative “after mature consideration of the whole situation,” and that Brother de Jager’s mission to Northern Rhodesia was only a preliminary step to establishing permanent control over the work there. It was then proposed that the Society send the European representative, Llewelyn Phillips, whom they wished to take permanent control of the work and immediately open a depot in Lusaka, by this time the new capital of Northern Rhodesia. They received a letter stating “that the matter is under consideration and that a decision will be communicated to you in due course.” This subject was broached again by the branch overseer in a letter dated November 25, 1935, to the State Secretary of Northern Rhodesia “to inquire if I may complete my arrangements to send Mr. L. V. Phillips to act as our representative in that country.” The reply: “It is unlikely that you will receive a definite reply for some time.”

In the meantime Brother de Jager, a fearless fighter for the truth, stayed on at Ndola and, wishing to test the validity of the law banning our literature, he offered copies of two of these books to the editor of the local newspaper on October 21, 1935, which led to his being charged under the proclamation, convicted and fined £2 by the magistrate of Ndola. The case was appealed to the High Court of Northern Rhodesia.

While this appeal case was still pending, the matter of Jehovah’s witnesses and the Watch Tower was raised in the House of Commons in England, when Mr. Thurtle asked for “an assurance that Jehovah[‘s] Witnesses and the adherents of the Watch Tower movement would get fair play in Northern Rhodesia.” Mr. J. H. Thomas, Secretary of State for the Colonies, “stated that he was in consultation with the Governor of Northern Rhodesia in regard to the policy to be pursued.”

The branch office in Cape Town acted immediately by sending the following cable to the Secretary of State for the Colonies: “Respectfully request opportunity submit representations our work Northern Rhodesia before you decide future policy. Writing you Airmail.” That same day a long letter went off to him with detailed explanations of the plot to crush our work in Northern Rhodesia, starting at the missionary conferences, covering the Mwana Lesa episode, the Copper Belt disturbances, and telling of the struggle to get a European representative established to direct the work and help the sincere Africans. It also told of the persecution the African Witnesses had to endure. Then came the appeal: “Sir, I call upon you to take steps to end the unjust discrimination that is going on against Jehovah’s witnesses in Northern Rhodesia; to have the prohibition of the literature removed, and to see to it that our genuine adherents are permitted to exercise their God-given rights to worship Jehovah God according to the dictates of their own conscience, without interference.”

This had the desired results, because the Cape Town branch overseer received a letter from the Northern Rhodesia Secretariat in March 1936. The Chief Secretary wrote: “I am directed to . . . invite you to send Mr. L. V. Phillips as your representative in place of Mr. P. J. de Jager, to set up a Depot in Lusaka. . . . Also to refer to your letter dated 11th December addressed to the Secretary of State of the Colonies and to say that the Secretary of State has carefully considered the matters raised therein. His Excellency the Governor has already recommended that a European representative should be admitted to Northern Rhodesia and the Secretary of State has now approved of the proposal.” What a victory after a long battle!

ANOTHER BATTLE CONTINUES

But the fight for freedom of worship was far from being over, for our literature was still prohibited and the appeal case was pending. The case came before the High Court on May 20, 1936, and judgment was handed down on June 18. It dismissed the appeal. Brother de Jager immediately applied for leave to appeal to the Privy Council. On September 15, 1936, the High Court of Rhodesia refused leave of appeal. However, the Society did not leave a stone unturned in this fight for freedom of worship. The help of legal counsel in London was engaged to work with the Society’s legal counsel in Northern Rhodesia to try to get the case before the Privy Council. The final outcome, however, was that the judicial committee of the Privy Council in London refused to hear the case.

In January 1936, copies of a special letter by the Society’s president, J. F. Rutherford, addressed to the members of the Legislative Assembly of Southern Rhodesia were also sent to the Northern Rhodesian members of the Legislative Council, the Governor and the Press.

During 1936 Jehovah’s witnesses in the Union of South Africa were also very active distributing 50,000 copies of The Golden Age, No. 425, and 20,000 copies of a special publication containing the same information were distributed in the Rhodesias. Herein were set forth the facts establishing ‘the innocence of Jehovah’s witnesses in Northern Rhodesia, including a very strong letter from the president of the Society, Brother Rutherford, sent to Alison Russell, the Chairman of the Commission of Enquiry, after their report was published. So the public was fully informed as to the schemes of the enemies of the truth to suppress it.

ANOTHER TASK IS UNDERTAKEN

At long last the Society’s efforts to have a depot in Northern Rhodesia were crowned with success! The depot was opened on July 16, 1936, in Lusaka, just opposite the police station, with Brother Llewelyn Phillips appointed as depot servant. But a tremendous task remained. It was to cleanse the organization of all undesirable elements due to the influence of the indigenous “Watchtower movements” and lack of supervision, to educate the sincere ones in sound Bible doctrine and to organize the work on a proper basis.

The first thing Brother Llewelyn Phillips did was to visit many of the main centers. There, by arrangement with government officials, he met many of the persons claiming association with the Watch Tower Society. What did he find? He tells us: “It became abundantly clear that the vast majority were like the people of Nineveh in Jonah’s day who ‘did not know the difference between their right and their left hand.’ Many were sincere; some prouder ones felt the Society held out a measure of autonomy unequalled by any of the other religious organizations. Some, as Jude put it, were ‘ungodly men, turning the undeserved kindness of our Lord into an excuse for loose conduct’ (like having community wives which they called ‘the baptism of fire’!).”

Apart from the confusion caused by the indigenous “Watchtower movements,” there was the problem of lack of literature due to the ban and the illiteracy of the majority of the brothers. There were many unscriptural tribal customs. The women, for instance, sat separately from men at meetings. Also, an African sees his wife as the mother of his children, the cook, the gardener, the carrier of loads and the part builder of his home. She is seldom, if ever, considered as a real companion or “complement to him.”​—Gen. 2:18.

In addition, most of the brothers had difficulty in relating to everyday life the truths they were learning. The brothers had read our literature and knew that the Kingdom was established in the heavens in 1914, but if asked how many years ago that was they had no idea. Many knew that the worldly governments were under Satan’s control, but they did not understand their proper relationship to those governments. Because of the isolation in small bush villages and little or no contact with the outside world, many of the things in the Society’s publications were beyond their comprehension. For example, the only contact that many villagers had with the government was through the local district commissioner and their own native court. The African’s only contact with religion might be a local mission school and all he knew of business, apart from his own bartering, was the local trading store. Thus when religion, politics and commerce were discussed in the Society’s publications as being world forces, what would come to the minds of these brothers were the local mission school, the district commissioner and the trading store.

A reassessment of the number of real Kingdom publishers had to be made, because many, although very willing, did not Scripturally qualify to share in the work due to their lack of understanding and their way of life. The first full service-year report under the depot arrangement showed that there was a monthly average of 756 publishers, with a peak of 1,081, during 1937. These brothers were visited by pioneers who acted as regional overseers, and who had first received training at the depot, with detailed instructions on doctrinal, moral and organizational matters.

These visiting brothers needed a real love for Jehovah to stick to their assignment, for they had to put up with many hardships. Some of the villages were situated as far as 1,000 miles from the railway line, as there was only one railway line that transversed the country, with no branches apart from that to the Copper Belt. These brothers had to travel most of the time by bicycle or walk hundreds of miles through dry, hot and dangerous country to the scattered groups of interested ones. Furthermore, they needed a lot of patience and love to get new congregations going. Sometimes they had to stay with a new congregation at least two months before anything like organization could be effected. They had to fight the tendency among some to be a “chief” in the Lord’s organization, which made these hesitant to accept the arrangement of the Society. But their hard labors were blessed, for by 1939 the average number of publishers had increased to 1,191, with 7 pioneers, and a new peak of 2,378 in 1940, with 88 congregations in operation.

A STRONGER ORGANIZATION IN SOUTH AFRICA

While this battle was going on in the northern territories the African brothers down in Johannesburg were, on a much smaller scale, winning the battle against bad elements of the “Watchtower movement” there.

Also, changes had been taking place at the branch in Cape Town. In March 1933 the Society arranged for the branch office in South Africa to move to bigger premises in Cape Town. These consisted of two office rooms on the sixth floor of a large office block, No. 623 Boston House, and the basement storehouse in a neighboring block, Progress Chambers, Progress Lane, which was used for the little printing press, storage of literature and shipping. The small amount of printing done at that time was handled by Brother Phillips, and also by a local brother in Cape Town. These new premises were more central and more commodious, and were to be the center of theocratic organization for southern Africa for nearly twenty years.

Two years later, in 1935, a brother with a knowledge of printing was sent out by Brother Rutherford to help with the printing work in the Cape Town branch. This was Andrew Jack, who, in addition to being a qualified printer, had been in full-time service in the Baltic States of Lithuania, Latvia and Estonia. The ban on the work there was followed by his deportation and return to his home country of Scotland. On arrival in South Africa, Andrew Jack soon arranged to obtain more type and other printing equipment and before long their little one-man, one-machine factory was going at full speed. In the year 1937 the first automatic printing press was installed. It has turned out millions of handbills and forms in the last thirty-eight years and is still going strong today in the Elandsfontein branch, South Africa.

PRODUCTIVE SOUND SERVICE

Out in the field, transcription machines with Brother Rutherford’s powerful talks, either in the hands of the congregations, or in sound cars provided by the Society, were doing a tremendous work. For example, in Pretoria the congregation had obtained permission to broadcast the talks every Sunday evening on Church Square, the very center of the city. After a while complaints were lodged with the city council, and the brothers had to remove the transcription machine from the Square. But that problem was soon overcome. Brother Smit had a friend who lived in an apartment overlooking the Square and from an open window of the apartment the Sunday-evening program continued without hindrance.

In the mid-1930’s, one of the Society’s sound cars was being run by Robert Nisbet, and he used it widely among the Africans in the nearby territory of Zululand. This is a large area of northern Natal and for many years has been the homeland of the Zulu nation. Especially at the sugar mills and the coal mines of northern Natal, large numbers of Africans gathered to hear the music and talks presented by the sound car. This led to the placement of large quantities of literature. In fact, later, when the book Riches was being featured, Brother Nisbet’s house car came to be known as “Imoto Yobucebi” (“The Riches Car”).

In 1935 the brothers in all countries were thrilled at the new light on the subject of the “great crowd” of Revelation 7, and those not of the anointed were overjoyed at the prospect of living forever in happiness on the earth. With the greater understanding of the “other sheep” class and more attention being directed to the “great crowd” from then on, these numbers were soon on the increase.​—John 10:16; Rev. 7:9.

While working in the mining section known as the Reef, pioneer Iris Tutty had the privilege of serving with one of the sound vans, and she describes it in this way: “This was a very neat affair, black and highly polished and on top it had a loudspeaker. On each of the panels were the words, ‘Kingdom Message, Serve God and Christ the King,’ and on the back door a linen banner announcing the latest talk by J. F. Rutherford. This van came to be well known all over Johannesburg and the Reef as the ‘Bible Van.”’ Various congregations on the Reef had worked out a schedule for using this van. On the weekends this schedule was a very tight one, since the van was used to cover a wide area, giving recorded lectures in many different places, including boys’ homes, hospitals, market squares, and the steps of the Johannesburg City Hall.

On one occasion, at the last-named place, during the period just before World War II started, and when political tension was mounting, the lecture being played was “Fascism or Freedom.” That evening there was a particularly large audience. As the talk progressed, shouting and screaming broke out. Bottles and tomatoes were thrown at the publishers. The mob was just about to attack the equipment when police suddenly arrived. With a baton charge they cleared the whole area, flung a cordon around the brothers and then helped them to pack up and get out of the danger zone. The brothers were most grateful to Jehovah for his protection.

Undoubtedly the sound cars did a wonderful work in those days, covering all parts of the country and reaching many people with their powerful loudspeakers. By 1937 there were five sound cars in constant use, with two pioneers traveling in each van. Furthermore, there were twelve large transcription machines in action in various parts of the country. It was in the same year that work with portable phonographs began in real earnest after a special appeal by Brother Rutherford. The branch at Cape Town was busy making recordings in Afrikaans, Cinyanja, Sesotho, Xhosa and Zulu.

By 1938 the Society was handling literature in thirty different languages, having established congregations at eighty centers. The main publications at that time, such as the book Riches, the booklet Uncovered and others, were outspoken against the Catholic Hierarchy, and these religious leaders were getting worried. Their newspapers warned the people against Judge Rutherford’s leaflets and booklets that were flooding the country. The Catholic press made the suggestion that halls should be denied to Jehovah’s witnesses to prevent them from holding public meetings.

PIONEERS PERSEVERE

The pioneers in South Africa had, by 1938, reached the total of 30, among whom, as already mentioned, was Iris Tutty of Johannesburg. On one occasion Sister Tutty had to climb a long flight of steps to reach a door. As she arrived at the top, the door was flung open by a woman. Her face crimson with rage and screaming abuse, she pushed Sister Tutty right down the steps and then slammed the door. As Sister Tutty picked herself and her scattered belongings up, she felt like weeping but decided that prayer was the best solution. It so happened that at the very next house a man and his wife were kindness itself. They gave Sister Tutty a cup of tea, and said they were deeply shocked at what had happened at their neighbor’s house, especially as the woman happened to be the wife of their minister. This turned into a very fruitful call, and in course of time led to this couple’s becoming baptized witnesses of Jehovah.

Along with other publishers, the pioneers found that the mines along the Reef were a very fruitful field for placing literature. They used to stand at the shaft head and offer the publications when the miners, whites and blacks, came up after doing their shift. Men still wore their lamps glowing in the front of their helmets, and were wet with the slime of the underground passages. The African miners were very keen to obtain literature in their own languages and sometimes pioneers would have a line of men waiting their turn. They were anxious to obtain Bibles or books to send to their families and children at home. Years later Sister Tutty had the pleasure of meeting a little group of Africans in Johannesburg who recognized her. One of them, with a broad smile, said: “You remember me? Me buy Bible, and now me go to Bible meeting.”

CONFRONTING THE CLERGY

In the late 1930’s the message of the Kingdom began to take hold in a very conservative community in the eastern part of the Cape Province. This was in the neighborhood of King William’s Town, about thirty-nine miles north of East London. Many of the local farmers and inhabitants were descendants of German people who settled there in the mid-nineteenth century. As a result, the dominant religion of that area is Lutheran, and it was while doing some building work on the house belonging to a Lutheran clergyman that a certain Mr. Kieck obtained literature from a Kingdom publisher. Mr. Kieck enjoyed what he read and ordered more, and soon started spreading the message among his relatives and friends, most of whom thought he had gone mad. Eventually, however, several of his relatives began to take an interest. In 1938 they arranged for a public debate between three of their Lutheran clergymen and Mr. Kieck, with some hundred church members present. During the debate Mr. Kieck produced a German Bible used under Hitler’s regime in which some of the Psalms as well as other verses of the Bible were missing. This embarrassed the clergymen somewhat; but that was nothing compared to their feelings when powerful scriptures were read from the Bible. At one stage one of the ministers actually threw the Society’s literature on the table, saying: “Damn these books!” As a result of this episode, six of the church members who were already interested became convinced of the truth and took their stand on Jehovah’s side.

There is a very interesting sequel to this. In 1938 the Minister of the Interior for South Africa banned the importation of the book Riches and several booklets on the grounds that they were “objectionable.” This was done in spite of the fact that in March 1938 the highest court in South Africa, at Bloemfontein, had ruled that the Society’s literature was not seditious and had no subversive intent. It is good to keep in mind that the book Riches and other publications show clearly the connivance between Fascism, Nazism and the Catholic Church. It came to light later that certain Lutheran clergymen were responsible for maneuvering the action of the government in banning this literature. But soon after this these same clergymen were interned, as it appeared that they were furthering Nazism in the country during World War II.

The Society made an appeal to the Minister of the Interior, protesting against the decision to ban the publications; but he would not change his mind, give any explanation or allow any appeal to the court. Consequently, the Cape Town branch published a large four-page pamphlet entitled “A Protest.” It included bold-print headlines: “Religious Intolerance in South Africa, Banning of the Bible Study Book ‘Riches.’” The pamphlet contained convincing proof that the German Lutheran clergymen of the eastern province of the Cape had provoked this ban and that the book Riches had been included in the June 1938 prohibited list of sex and crime magazines. The pamphlet published in English and Afrikaans was widely distributed throughout the country, and many orders for the book Riches were received.

ZONE WORK BEGINS

In that same year, 1938, the zone work was organized. Thereby traveling representatives of the Society visited the congregations and isolated publishers, giving them instruction and encouragement.

One of the first zone servants in South Africa was Frank Taylor, whose wife Christine had recently arrived from England. Christine found working among the Africans a strange but interesting experience, and her husband says that he will never forget the look on her face when she placed her first booklet with a Zulu woman who was dressed only in beads and a skirt. The woman took the contribution for the booklet, a coin called a “tickey” (3d), out of her woolly hair!

Soon after starting on zone work Frank and Christine went to East London where they had the happy job of getting together that little group of interested families, the Kiecks, the Horrmanns and the Schanknechts. They had broken away from the German Lutheran Church in King William’s Town. In the course of time the East London European congregation was formed with these new ones, most of whom are still alive and active today.

KINGDOM WORK PICKS UP MOMENTUM

The month of January 1939 saw a further step forward taken by the branch in South Africa in that the Consolation magazine was published in Afrikaans for the first time. Piet de Jager, who up to this time had been translating the Society’s books into Afrikaans while pioneering, was now called into Bethel to serve as full-time Afrikaans translator.

This meant more work for Andrew Jack in the little printing department at the branch, since the text had to be composed from hand type. This was the first magazine of the Society to be printed in South Africa. As yet no magazines were being produced in the local African languages.

Yes, the Kingdom work in southern Africa was really developing quickly now. In 1939 there was a new peak of 555 publishers in South Africa. It is worth noting that of these only 180 were Colored and African. The monthly average for publishers in South Africa was 439; for Southern Rhodesia, 473; Northern Rhodesia, 1,198; Nyasaland, 1,041; Portuguese East Africa, 17; and St. Helena, 11. This made a grand total of 3,179 publishers in the field for all the territories under the Cape Town branch, and in that year they devoted 1,042,078 hours to ‘the preaching work. This shows clearly that since receiving clarification on the “great crowd” in 1935 the increase was coming much faster and many new ones were taking their stand.

WAR STIRS UP KINGDOM PUBLISHERS

When Hitler began his blitzkrieg on Poland in September 1939, the world was plunged into a period of violence and suffering such as it had never known. As the Nazi-Fascist war machine took over country after country, the Kingdom work in Europe suffered terribly. South Africa, under its new prime minister, Jan Smuts, took up the conflict against Germany, and many South Africans saw action in the north of Africa and Italy.

South Africa, being far from the main theater of conflict, did not suffer very much from the war conditions that prevailed in many other countries. In course of time, there were shortages of certain food items and other restrictions. But the Kingdom work in southern Africa by 1940 entered a period of growth and expansion such as it had never seen before. The stupendous events of the war shook the complacency of many people and directed their minds to the fulfillment of Bible prophecy.

By this time the Consolation magazine in Afrikaans was having great success. So, the Watch Tower branch in Cape Town decided that it was time to publish the magazine The Watchtower in Afrikaans. In January 1940, the Informant (later called Kingdom Ministry) outlined new work with the magazines​—street work, house-to-house work and magazine routes. It was clear that greater quantities of magazines would be needed. A linotype machine was installed as well as a folding machine. Also, a brother from Durban, with experience in printing, was called in to help Brother Jack in the little printing department. So, as of June 1, 1940, Die Wagtoring (The Watchtower in Afrikaans) was first produced by the Cape Town branch.

The timing of this first issue was perfect and was obviously done under Jehovah’s guidance. Though the first few months of 1940 were very quiet as far as the war in Europe was concerned, suddenly Hitler’s “panzer” divisions began their onslaught on western Europe. Until that time Afrikaans-speaking brothers in South Africa had relied upon the Dutch issue of The Watchtower, coming from Holland. But in May the Society’s branch in Holland suddenly had to close down and supplies were cut off. The brothers in Cape Town did not know this was going to happen. But exactly at the point that the Dutch copies of The Watchtower stopped coming through, the new translation of The Watchtower in Afrikaans filled the breach!

The brothers took up the magazine work joyfully and enthusiastically, so that, as a result, the monthly distribution of the magazines went up to 17,000. As in other countries where the work was not underground, magazine bags began to appear on the streets, with the publishers calling out slogans.

By the end of the 1940 service year Brother Phillips, in his office in Cape Town, was able to report to Brother Rutherford an outstanding increase in publishers. The new peak for South Africa was 881 publishers, with an average figure of 656, which was an increase of 50 percent based on the previous year’s average. The war had really stirred up the Kingdom publishers in South Africa.

CATHOLIC MALICE LEADS TO A BAN

The chief publication of the Catholic Church in South Africa, the Southern Cross, in its issue of October 2, 1940, carried a leading article drawing attention to what had taken place in Canada (where a total ban was placed on the Kingdom work in July 1940) and then made the following malicious statement: “The activities of these people [Jehovah’s witnesses] who condemn loyalty to the authority of either the State or the Church are even more dangerous in a country like South Africa, with its huge Native population. The Government should certainly curtail the spread of their propaganda here.” Immediately thereafter subscribers’ copies of The Watchtower and Consolation began to be seized by the censorship authorities, and when the branch office wrote to find out why, the authorities refused to give any explanation.

Since it was known that the Catholic Church was behind all of this, a special copy of Kingdom News was prepared in reply to the Catholic attack in the Southern Cross and 200,000 copies were quickly distributed in all parts of South Africa. This was followed up by a statement giving the facts concerning Jehovah’s witnesses and their work. Copies were sent to every member of parliament, the judiciary and the press. For members of parliament and the judiciary, copies of the article dealing with the subject of Christian neutrality, in The Watchtower of November 1, 1939, were also included. Sometime later the police were instructed to seize all copies of this Watchtower article. An appeal was made to the prime minister, and a reply was received from the Chief Control Officer of the Union. Among other things, it said: “Although your intentions may have been, and are, of the best, it cannot be accepted that you should be allowed to thwart the steps taken by the Government for the successful prosecution of the war. If your Society succeeds in its efforts to convert everyone in this country to this point of view the enemy would meet with no active opposition, and it is, therefore, difficult to see how you can expect the Government to sit still and refrain from any action against you.”

The next move of the branch was to prepare a petition addressed to the government. It complained about the seizure of the publications of the Society and respectfully petitioned the government to release this Christian literature and thus restore freedom of worship in the country. In a short space of ten days, 50,000 signatures of Europeans living in all parts of the Union were obtained. About the same time the official announcement was made that The Watchtower and Consolation had been banned by the government.

Further action by the government consisted of seizing complete shipments of magazines as they arrived. It soon became clear that a total ban had been placed on the importation of Watch Tower Society literature. The very first booklet to be seized was Theocracy. In quick succession, six or seven shipments of literature all met with the same fate. The reason given for the seizure was that these publications were considered “objectionable.”

All of this was due to the influence of the Catholic Church and also the emergency situation of the war, since many of the publications under ban had been admitted into the country for many years without any difficulty. The branch office took steps to claim the seized literature, and this led to court action. The case came up before the Supreme Court in Cape Town. Although the circumstances seemed to weigh heavily against the Watch Tower Society, the brothers who attended the hearing were thrilled to find that the judge displayed an impartial attitude and ruled that the minister responsible for the ban should give reasons for his action and also grant an interview for further representations to be made.

The legal struggle continued for some time, and it was not until April 1942, after the fight had been on for a whole year, that the grounds upon which the publications were supposed to be objectionable were presented. The branch was given fourteen days in which to reply to these points, which was done, and at the same time Brother Phillips expressed his desire to make personal representations in harmony with the decision of the court. However, the court had not fixed the time limit for these representations to be made or received, and the months rolled by. It was two years before the matter was settled.

During August 1941, all the outgoing mail from the Cape Town branch office was seized by the censorship authorities. It was not until several weeks later that the branch became aware of this, when letters were sent by brothers in the field, and a protest was lodged. It was acknowledged, but no explanation was given. The suspicions of the authorities that the Society was engaging in correspondence bearing on the war effort were found to be quite unjustified.

In September 1941, the Minister of the Interior issued an order under the emergency regulations to seize all of the Society’s publications in South Africa. The results of this at the branch were quite exciting. At ten o’clock in the morning, the C.I.D. (Criminal Investigation Department) arrived to execute the order. They came with trucks for the purpose of removing all of the Society’s stock of literature. But the branch overseer was alert. He quickly checked the order and saw that it was not in harmony with the regulations. He then took prompt action, making the C.I.D. officers wait at the Society’s office while he personally made an urgent application to the Supreme Court for an interdict to restrain the Interior Minister from seizing the literature. His application was successful. At twelve o’clock the interdict was obtained and the police had to clamber back into their empty trucks and drive off! Five days later the minister withdrew the order after paying the Society’s costs. One can imagine how pleased the Cape Town branch Bethel family was at this important victory!

THE BATTLE GOES ON

Our fight continued. The Afrikaans edition of Consolation was banned under the Customs Act, which governs importation. Since the magazine was printed and published in South Africa, it was obvious that this was a mistake. Nonetheless, a pioneer was convicted at Kroonstad for distributing the magazine. The case was appealed and the Supreme Court reversed the decision. Later, on September 12, 1941, the Government Gazette intimated that the ban had been withdrawn. Another round to the Theocracy!

Much of this stirring action was reported on fully in the newspapers, and this caused tremendous publicity to be given to the Kingdom message and to the work Jehovah’s witnesses. Realizing that the public in general needed enlightening on this matter, the branch published two special booklets, Why Suppress the Kingdom Message?, and Jehovah’s Witnesses: Who Are They? What Is Their Work? These booklets were given a very wide distribution in English and Afrikaans during October 1941.

Such a wide-scale clarification of the work being done by Jehovah’s witnesses was very necessary because many of the newspapers were carrying distorted reports about them, and rumors and charges of their being “Fifth Columnists” and “Nazis” were being spread about. One of the leading dailies, the East London Daily Dispatch, published an article that made a libelous attack on the Society’s president, J. F. Rutherford. Since the editor refused to publish a letter of explanation, a libel action was begun and the paper was sued for £5,000 damages. When the editor saw that the brothers were determined, he quickly backed down, published an apology and paid all the costs the case.

REACTION TO THE BAN

The reaction of the brothers to the ban on some of the publications was to hide the banned literature in their homes. They were “cautious as serpents.” (Matt. 10:16) In Johannesburg the police made various raids on publishers’ homes, but there they usually had advance notice of such raids from an interested person in the detective force. In Pretoria, Frans Muller, still a schoolboy, under the direction of his parents, dragged carton after carton of literature into narrow passages underneath the low wooden floor of their home where they knew the precious books would be quite safe. All this meant that the publishers had less literature to work with in the field, but locally printed publications such as the book Children were used to a great extent. As one Colored brother in Cape Town says: “Supplies were limited, but this did not slow down the work. We were told to’loan books to people and start studies with them. This we did and it was amazing to see how our Bible studies shot up. Many started coming into the truth during this period.”

The peak of publishers went up to 1,253, and they were working hard. The attendance at the Johannesburg assembly that year rose to about 800, with 186 baptized. Many new congregations were organized, the figure going up from 127 in 1940 to 172 in 1941.

Although the Watchtower magazine coming from America was on the banned list, Jehovah lovingly provided spiritual food. The brothers at Cape Town were never short of material to print on their presses and to send out under the name “Food Convenient.” One of those who, during the war, never missed a single copy of his subscription for The Watchtower and who always sent it to the Cape Town office after reading it himself was a Brother J. J. van Zyl, since his copies came addressed to “Sergeant J. J. van Zyl, South African Police, Kranskop, Natal.”

VICTORY AT LAST!

Certainly, the fight against God and his Kingdom work in South Africa was unsuccessful. From 1941 the fight for the removal of the ban and the release of our literature went on without letup. Toward the end of 1943, stocks of literature at the branch were running very low and the brothers were praying earnestly that the literature that had been seized might be released. Then things started to happen. A new Minister of the Interior was appointed. Another letter was sent by the branch overseer to the Controller of Censorship requesting the removal of the ban. A copy of the letter was sent to the new minister, together with a request for a personal interview, which the previous minister had agreed to but never granted.

In January 1944, the interview took place and the minister agreed to release the seized shipments, remove the ban on the magazines, and release the other publications that had been seized. He also promised to rescind the order issued under the Emergency Regulations declaring all the literature to be subversive. A week later the branch received confirmation of all this in writing, and a few days thereafter that huge stock of literature (about 1,800 cartons) was delivered to the branch office. It was none the worse for being detained for three years. How happy the brothers in the branch and the field were about this! What a wonderful victory in answer to their prayers!

BOOK BANNING ELSEWHERE

In the early part of World War II there was a real book-banning craze in many parts of the British Empire and other countries. It was just as Jehovah had long ago caused the prophet Daniel to foretell​—the ‘small horn’ (of which the British Commonwealth of Nations was a part) was ‘putting on great airs,’ “throwing truth to the earth” and committing “transgression” against the holy things of God. (Dan. 8:9-12) This extended to the three British protectorates in southern Africa​—Basutoland, Bechuanaland and Swaziland. An official ban on the Society’s literature was imposed in February 1941. It remained in force until 1960 in spite of all efforts to have it removed. Even the King James Bible was banned, if it happened to be printed by the Watch Tower Society. This occurred in spite of the fact that in those three countries in 1941 there was not a single witness of Jehovah.

FRUITFUL YEARS IN SOUTH-WEST AFRICA

The eventful year 1939 opened another chapter in the history of the work in South-West Africa. No groups had been formed in those parts yet and this large field was lying open. A pioneer couple, Barry Prinsloo and his wife Joan, fell the urge to go and witness to the people of that territory.

Barry bought a truck and transformed it into a house car. On it he also mounted a gas-plant installation, correctly anticipating a shortage of gasoline due to the war. To get to South-West Africa from Johannesburg, they had to travel through the Kalahari Desert. There were hardly any roads and they had to follow tracks left by a previous car or donkey cart, and even these were completely obliterated at times.

They finally reached Windhoek, and from there pushed farther north, preaching and placing literature. For a time the police followed them and collected the literature that they had placed. Eventually they were apprehended and charged with selling without a license. On the advice of the Society, they had the case postponed, pending the outcome of some cases of a similar nature in South Africa. A few weeks later Brother Prinsloo appeared in court and a favorable verdict was handed down.

News of an assembly in Johannesburg reached them, and although it meant an arduous trip of some 1,000 miles, they decided to go. But tragedy struck. Most rivers in South-West Africa are no more than dry, sandy ravines that only flow when there is an exceptionally hard downpour. Trying to cross one of these rivers, their car got stuck. That night the river came down in a flood, sweeping the house car a few hundred yards downstream. There they found it the next morning, broken in two and with the chassis buried deep in the sand. They salvaged what they could and notified the Society of the disaster and their disappointment at not being able to attend the assembly. But, very promptly, they received a gift sent from the branch overseer, and a telegram explaining that it was for a “little holiday.”

After the assembly they returned and camped near the disabled house car to repair it. At the same time they witnessed to the Ovambo farm laborers, using Johannes as interpreter. Johannes was a Bushman whom they had hired to accompany them on their travels through the territory, and he may well have been the very first Bushman to have accepted the truth. The Bushmen are a nomadic tribe of desert dwellers who make a living mainly by hunting with bow and poisoned arrow. By far the smallest of all the Africans in the southern part of Africa, and comparable in size to the Pygmies of Central Africa, these hunters are extremely primitive in their living habits. Communication between them and others is rendered very difficult, not only due to the inaccessible places that they inhabit, but also by their language with its limited vocabulary and incessant flow of click sounds. Some of them, however, do become farm laborers. Due to the banning of literature and the general situation, the Society eventually recalled the Prinsloos to South Africa.

So, although pioneers went into South-West Africa during 1929, 1935 and 1942 and placed many pieces of literature, there was no real cultivating of the field, with the result that little fruitage was forthcoming. The year 1950, however, marked a turning point in the history of the work in South-West Africa. The Society now sent in four missionaries, Gilead School graduates, namely, George Koett, Fred Hayhurst, Gus Eriksson and Roy Stephens. Early in 1950 a missionary home was established in Windhoek.

Although these brothers were not merely to concentrate on the placement of literature, but on the finding and feeding of the Lord’s “other sheep,” they still had excellent placements. (John 10:16) At the same time they were able to make contact with five African brothers who had moved into the nearby African location from the Union of South Africa, and these were organized into a company (congregation). One of the missionaries also started no fewer than twenty-five studies in this African location. To all appearances the work in this territory, especially among the Africans, was off to an excellent start with good prospects for increase.

[Map on page 77]

(For fully formatted text, see publication)

SOUTHERN AFRICA

ZAÏRE (Belgian Congo)

UGANDA

KENYA

TANZANIA (Tanganyika)

ANGOLA

ZAMBIA (Northern Rhodesia)

MALAWI (Nyasaland)

MOZAMBIQUE

RHODESIA (Southern Rhodesia)

SOUTH-WEST AFRICA

BOTSWANA (Bechuanaland)

SWAZILAND

SOUTH AFRICA

Johannesburg

Durban

Cape Town

LESOTHO (Basutoland)

[Picture on page 93]

George Phillips typesetting by hand in Cape Town office

[Picture on page 98]

A Zulu home

Part 2​—South Africa and Neighboring Territories

SMOOTH TRANSITION

At the end of 1941 Brother Rutherford, who had served faithfully and zealously as president of the Society for twenty-five years, was already very sick. He was then seventy-two years of age and for many years had not spared himself in Jehovah’s service. On January 8, 1942, he sealed his earthly Kingdom service in death. Within a few days the board of directors of the Society met at Brooklyn Bethel and elected Nathan H. Knorr as the new president. The reaction from the field was very different after the death of Brother Rutherford from the way the brothers felt after the death of Brother Russell. In 1942 there was no outcry of “what shall we do now?” Of course, when Brother Rutherford died, the enemies of the truth were jubilant, and were saying: “Now that their leader and speaker is gone, their work will soon disintegrate.” But they were quickly disillusioned on that point.

In August 1941, not long before his death, Brother Rutherford had been present at the assembly in St. Louis, Missouri, U.S.A., where one of the highlights had been “Children’s Day” and the new book Children had been released. The features of this outstanding assembly were duplicated on a miniature scale at a convention in Johannesburg, in April 1942. The attendance this time went right up to 1,700, including 340 children who joyfully received copies of the new book. At that assembly 400 symbolized their dedication to do God’s will, more than double the previous peak. The assembly organization, for the first time, ran a cafeteria to serve 6,000 meals, which was an outstanding success, and gave them more time for good association. All the brothers were very much invigorated and refreshed and went home very, very happy.

Especially encouraged by this assembly were a number of young pioneers who had only recently started. In 1942 the number of pioneers swelled to sixty-five in South Africa. One of them was Brother Piet Wentzel, who had taken his stand for the truth at the little town of Bonnievale in the Cape Province. By December 1941 he started in the pioneer service in Kimberley. In 1945 he was joined by Frans Muller, who, at the age of sixteen, had just left school and already had some good training and experience in the work with the Pretoria congregation. The two young brothers were assigned to the town of Vereeniging, some thirty miles south of Johannesburg. They worked hard, one of them averaging 210 hours per month that year.

In spite of the pessimistic predictions of opposers, the Kingdom work did not slow down in 1942 after the death of Brother Rutherford. Instead, it swept forward at a faster pace so that, at the end of the service year, George Phillips could report a new peak in publishers of 1,582, a 26-percent increase based on the peak figure attained the previous year. What a marvelous difference from the tiny band of about 100 in 1931’

SERVANTS TO THE BRETHREN

With Brother Knorr, the new president of the Society, directing the progress of the work, among the first new developments was the servant-to-the-brethren work. It began in South Africa in February 1943. (Zone work had come to an end in 1942.) Servants to the brethren had to be single men and they needed good health and plenty of vigor to keep up their busy schedule. At first the small places received only a one-day visit, and larger congregations two or three days. This entailed much traveling, under difficult conditions, and catching trains and buses at very awkward hours of the day and night. The job was not only to check the records of the congregations carefully but chiefly to spend much time in the field with the brothers and train them in the field service.

One of the new servants to the brethren appointed in 1943 was Brother Gert Nel, who had come to a knowledge of the truth as a schoolteacher in the northern Transvaal in 1934, and as a Kingdom publisher had been very zealous and active. As a zone servant and a servant to the brethren, Brother Nel had the privilege of helping numerous publishers, both African and European, and many brothers still remember his faithful and loyal service. He was called into Bethel in 1946 as a translator for the Afrikaans publications.

An African brother who became a servant to the brethren was Thomas M’kele. It was old Brother Mulenga, one of the first African pioneers in South Africa, who helped him to come to a knowledge of the truth. Brother Mulenga was out in the field one Sunday morning when he found a group of men sleeping on the ground. On his asking them what was the matter, they said they had not slept the previous night as they had been praying the whole night at the church. At that point their minister, then the “Reverend” Thomas M’kele, asked Brother Mulenga what he had in his bag. He accepted the booklet Where Are the Dead? The next week he took several volumes, and the week after that he attended an assembly. Before long he resigned from the church, was baptized, and within the year he was pioneering with Brother Mulenga. Later, as mentioned, he became one of the servants to the brethren. He died faithful at the end of 1945.

A NEW SCHOOL HAS TELLING EFFECT

One of the new arrangements instituted by the Society’s president, N. H. Knorr, that has had a great effect on the field is the weekly Theocratic Ministry School. This very fine arrangement succeeded in a short while in helping many brothers who had imagined they would never be public speakers to become very efficient on the platform and more effective in the field. In all parts of South Africa the brothers welcomed this new provision of Jehovah and put it into operation with enthusiasm. This was done not only by the European publishers but also by the African brothers despite great obstacles of language and lack of education.

One who became a school overseer in 1943 was Brother Samuel Mase. Back in 1938 he had been a member of the Communist party. About that time he bought the book Riches with the hope in mind that it would give him a good knowledge of business! Samuel was also troubled by wicked spirits and he used to pass terrifying nights. Various visits to witch doctors did not help him. But as soon as he started attending the Watchtower magazine study, his whole life changed and improved. What impressed him more than anything was the love of the brothers belonging to different tribes. He found a wonderful unity among them that he had never found among his political associates. He became school overseer in an African congregation on the Reef and later took up pioneering and was used as a circuit overseer.

The Theocratic Ministry School helped the African field to develop more quickly. In Pretoria the little group formed by Hamilton Kaphwitt had by 1945 developed into a large congregation with 181 associated. About that time the government started to move Africans to native townships away from the city of Pretoria itself. Already the African congregation was nearly twice the size of the European congregation. This shows the wonderful development that took place in the African field during World War II. At the beginning of the war the European publishers outnumbered the African publishers by two to one, but by the end of the war the position was changing and, in many places, the Africans were outnumbering the European brothers.

By 1945 Johannesburg had one European congregation of 113 associated and four African congregations with a total of over 500 African brothers associated.

Expansion was also taking place down in Cape Town. While the total of European brothers associated was 135, the Salt River Colored congregation in Cape Town had come up to 138. Very soon after that the Colored congregation was divided up and four new congregations were established.

A man who got the truth about that time was Nicholson Makhetha, an albino African. He was baptized at an assembly in 1944. Brother Makhetha became a pioneer in 1946 and later was used for several years as a circuit overseer. Since he had a good command of English, at large assemblies he was very frequently used as an interpreter from English into Sesotho. He also has been privileged to translate the Society’s publications into the Sesotho language, in his own native land of Lesotho.

ADVANCEMENT IN NYASALAND

By 1940 the number of Christian congregations in Nyasaland had grown to sixty. Religious opposition to Kingdom-preaching also was growing. Roman Catholic priests were telling the people that if the country were under Roman rule our work would have been stopped long ago. Anyway, they said, the pope would soon destroy the Society’s work and “dump Rutherford and all of Jehovah’s Witnesses into the middle of the sea.”

What happened on one occasion illustrates the underhanded methods of the false religious teachers: The playing of a record in Cinyanja upset five Roman Catholic African teachers. These men then sent in a report to the District Commissioner complaining that someone with a Gramophone was going around the villages telling the people that Armageddon is here and that all Europeans are going to be destroyed. This, of course, was done deliberately to arouse the anxiety and the animosity of the white officials, but investigations by the authorities proved the report to be false and so the matter was closed.

Superstition usually plays a big part in the life of an African. But the truth makes him free from these mental shackles. In return the slaves of superstition often use their special weapons against Jehovah’s servants. For example, when a congregation of Jehovah’s witnesses were preaching from village to village, a lion followed in their wake, taking a toll of village life. This caused the superstitious to blame Jehovah’s witnesses for bringing the lion’s attention upon them! Of course, Roman Catholic teachers made capital of this superstitious trend.

With the outbreak of World War II further pressures arose against the Kingdom work in Nyasaland, but the attitude of the government continued to be fair. This is reflected in the statement made by the governor, Sir H. C. D. Mackenzie-Kennedy, who said: “I have known the Watchtower people for twenty-five years. In some countries I have known them to be persecuted and not recognized. In this country I am not going to stop them from going about so long as they keep the law.” Some of the African authorities also played their part in keeping the way open for the Kingdom message to go in.

By 1943 the work had increased so well that the average monthly figure for publishers was now up to 2,464, with 144 congregations operating. However, in that year a new governor was appointed and also a new commissioner of police. A large consignment of the book Riches in Cinyanja was held by the government. In June 1943, Government Notice No. 77 announced a total ban on the importation of all the Society’s publications. However, this did not affect the work in the country very much, since considerable stocks were already in Nyasaland.

What did have a powerful effect was the existence of the “Watchtower movements” that were still operating and bringing reproach upon the Society’s name. In 1937 Elliott Kamwana was released from banishment in the Seychelles Islands and came back as a leader of one of these false movements. Willie Kavala was also running his little show, making false claims to be under the leadership of Judge Rutherford. With this situation existing it was a good thing that the Society issued special identifications to those who were recognized as publishers and supplied the government with the names of the people to whom they issued such identifications. In this way a clear distinction was made between Jehovah’s witnesses, under the direction of the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society, and pagan movements bearing a similar name.

During 1944 the expression “the New World of Jehovah” made a real hit with the population of Nyasaland. One brother, in delivering a talk on the New World, explained: “When Adam sinned no children were born to him in the garden; all were born in the ‘bush’ and, friends, we are still in the ‘bush.’ We have not yet returned to the garden. But the time is near now when we will leave this ‘matekenya’ (jigger flea) world to enter the new fully established world of Jehovah.” In one part of the country the interested people followed Jehovah’s witnesses around from place to place drinking in the promises of God’s Word.

By the following year the glorious heat of Bible truth was drying up the soggy fields of false religion. A number of African clergymen, after hearing a talk on the New World, went en masse to a European missionary and said: “Why have you kept these things hidden from us? Today we see young boys and girls calling on the people and telling them the most wonderful things they have ever heard! And here you have given us doctrines to preach which are now revealed to be false! And when we stand up before the people to preach we appear foolish and are without any foundation whatsoever!”

TRIUMPHING OVER HARDSHIP IN SOUTHERN RHODESIA

In 1939 the number of European publishers in Southern Rhodesia was about 15, whereas the figure among the Africans was about 460. A very big help for the African brothers had been provided in the form of the first booklet in Chishona, the main African language of the country.

Our isolated publisher on his own gold mine, Jack McLuckie, was meanwhile bringing up his family in the truth. His home was a very simple one made of wattle poles and mud, with a floor made of senga​—cow dung made liquid with water and left to dry so that it becomes hard. When it becomes hard, there is no smell, and it can be swept daily. Jack was faithfully training his children in the truth, one of his methods being to read a few verses from the Bible and then to ask questions to see what they had understood. Ian, the youngest boy, was very young then but he remembers these study sessions. This early training stood him in good stead when he later became a pioneer and a Gilead School graduate and missionary.

It was in 1939 also that another McLuckie family appeared on the scene in Southern Rhodesia. This was Bert McLuckie with his wife Carmen, their baby boy Peter and two children from his previous marriage. Bert McLuckie first contacted the truth in 1927 and had helped many of, his relatives to accept it. In fact, the McLuckie “clan’ is quite well known in central and southern Africa.

Soon after the outbreak of World War II in 1939 the two McLuckie families and other publishers in Southern Rhodesia were in trouble. The government clamped a prohibition on the importation and distribution of the Society’s literature on November 15, 1940. Even the English translation of the Christian Greek Scriptures entitled “Emphatic Diaglott” was banned. The false grounds for the prohibition or ban were that it would foment opposition to the war effort. The Cape Town office lost no time in sending an appeal to the king of England, the British prime minister, the secretary of state for the colonies, the governor of Southern Rhodesia and all members of parliament. No official acknowledgment of this letter was received. Some days later a member of the C.I.D. called on George Phillips at Cape Town on behalf of the government of Southern Rhodesia. They were anxious to have information about the antecedents of the writer!

Bert McLuckie says that some of the brothers did fade away because of fear at the time of this prohibition of the literature, but most of them carried on with greater zest, determined to test the legality of the law by distributing the literature, come what may. This resulted in arrests, prosecutions, and inevitable convictions. Books, Bibles, phonographs and records were confiscated, later to be burned on the order of the court. Some of these cases were taken to the High Court of Southern Rhodesia, but in those years, under the pressure and fever of the war, the decision went against the Society.

According to Jack McLuckie, the number of European Witnesses at that time was about sixteen and most of them were imprisoned at one time or another for distributing the banned literature. Some went to prison two or three times. About that time, too, many brothers were imprisoned for their neutral stand in connection with the war. They used the time in prison to give a good witness and some of the warders attended Bible studies with the Witnesses after the brothers were released.

On one occasion Bert McLuckie’s wife, Carmen, was also arrested and sentenced to the usual £25 or three months. She was pregnant at the time. An unsuccessful appeal case delayed matters and meanwhile Carmen gave birth to a little girl. In the course of time a policewoman came to arrest Carmen, and Brother McLuckie had the unhappy experience of seeing his wife and baby taken away to prison in Gwelo. They could have kept the child behind, but they decided that it would be best for both mother and baby to be together. While in jail with her mother, the infant Estrella had as a nursemaid a murderess who cried bitterly when the mother and child were released after the three months’ sentence.

Brother Bert McLuckie was himself in jail a couple of times. In jail, Brother McLuckie was mixing with people who were convicted of filthy and wicked acts and he said that never before or since has he heard such vile language. Nevertheless, with two of them he found a hearing ear for the Kingdom message. So right inside prison a small immersion ceremony took place, with Brother McLuckie baptizing two prisoners while everybody else had gone outside to the courtyard for exercise.

In 1942, the European brothers in Southern Rhodesia published the booklet Jehovah’s Witnesses: Who Are They? What Is Their Work? They mailed copies to the governor and other officials and began a general distribution. Brother Bert McLuckie remembers this very well. In fact, his wife was again arrested while engaged in this work one day. But her case fell through and she was not charged.

By 1943 the average number of publishers was up to 1,090, and the crowd of Kingdom publishers was swelling rapidly in Southern Rhodesia. The following year assemblies were arranged for the African brothers. At the Bulawayo African assembly there was an attendance of 1,028 and at Mrewa they had 347 for the public talk. Fifty new ones were baptized at these two places. The European assembly was also at Bulawayo and had a peak attendance of 73. The brothers were thereby encouraged to carry on with the work while they eagerly awaited the time when permission would be granted the Society to open a depot, and they would have an official representative here.

ZEAL IN THE FACE OF PERSECUTION

During 1940 there was another riot in the Copper Belt in Northern Rhodesia, and at one center several Africans were killed. This time the enemy failed to make Jehovah’s witnesses the “scapegoat.” The ringleaders were all Roman Catholics, but the government made no mention of this. Jehovah’s witnesses in the Copper Belt were by that time much stronger and more zealous than ever before.

In December 1940, a government proclamation was issued prohibiting the importation and distribution of all the Society’s literature. The homes of the brothers were raided, and a number of them were sent to prison for possessing literature. In one instance, two brothers, Gibson Chembe and Lamond Kandama, were severely beaten several times because they refused to burn their books in the presence of many persons, including chiefs. These acts were committed with the knowledge of the local police chief and magistrate. The report sent to the Cape Town branch was held up by the censors and Llewelyn Phillips was sent for by the security chief. When the facts were presented, the chief promised an investigation. A protest was lodged with both the government headquarters at Lusaka and the Colonial Office in London. A commission of enquiry was appointed by the government. They reprimanded the magistrate and police chief, and there were no more efforts at compulsory burning of books.

Next came a government notice that was published in March 1941 calling upon all Europeans and Africans to surrender all Watch Tower publications to the nearest Boma (Court) within two months, failing which, prosecution would follow. Needless to say, all genuine witnesses of Jehovah refused, and this led to further arrests. The Society’s depot was raided. The depot servant, Llewelyn Phillips, took a bold and firm stand and refused to surrender the literature in his possession. He was sentenced to six months in prison. Earlier the same year, Llewelyn Phillips had been in prison for a month because he refused military service.

Things did not ease up during the next year. Llewelyn Phillips was again arrested on the military issue, but he appealed. He spent three more months in prison before his appeal was heard. He tells his own story of this: “The appeal, which came off three months later was a full dress affair with the Lord Chief Justice on the Bench and the Solicitor General (then K. C. [King’s Counsel]) prosecuting. The judge produced a Bible with several strips of paper pointing out from different chapters. He started by asking what right Jehovah’s witnesses had to refuse war when Moses was a man of war. On being reminded that this faithful man could not have been a Christian because he lived 1,500 years before Christ, enthusiasm for Bible questions dwindled and before long the Bible was laid aside. On its being suggested that, had the apostles been alive, they would probably have been in the dock too, the judge was visibly moved.” Brother Phillips’ sentence was then reduced to the time he had actually served so he could leave the courtroom a free man. For eight of the twelve months of the 1942 service year he was in prison.

In spite of hardships due to persecution, food shortage and lack of literature due to the ban, the work went ahead. To counteract the shortage of literature, questions and answers with related scriptures had been prepared for the brothers to use in the Bible studies. Due to the war there was also a lack of cycle parts and tires. This meant that most of the Africans were deprived of their main means of transportation on the primitive tracks of the bush. Nevertheless, the work in Northern Rhodesia was making wonderful progress; the average number of publishers in 1944 was up to 3,062, a 116-percent increase since 1941! And in spite of all their difficulties they were spending an average of 30 hours per month in field service. By this time the good news had also penetrated the nearby Congo.

Up to this stage no Europeans in Northern Rhodesia had openly associated themselves with Jehovah’s witnesses. Why? A suggested reason was given in the 1943 Yearbook: “There is a deep-seated fear in the minds of many Europeans who appreciate our message, because they feel that if they make this known openly or actively their positions will be jeopardized.” Several Europeans, including government officials, had, however, manifested considerable kindness to the Witnesses. One district commissioner, in fact, paid two Witnesses 5 shillings each as a compensation for having been wrongfully detained in prison by his predecessor. Another official met his houseboy (who had been imprisoned for possessing our literature) with his car when his sentence had expired, and took him back to work! This change in attitude on the part of many Europeans was undoubtedly due to the fine witness the brothers gave through their conduct, as reported in the 1944 Yearbook: “The Society’s adherents have the best reputation of any in this [labor] Corps and it is well known that farmers and other employers specify that they specially want them.”

In 1945 Brother and Sister Bridger, a couple who got the truth in about 1916 in the Orange Free State from Japie Theron, moved from Johannesburg to Luanshya, where Brother Bridger started pioneering among the Europeans. He relates how he covered the whole town, placing 1,000 booklets. Here he contacted a family, a Mrs. Scheepers and her daughter Mrs. Joubert, with whom he had previously studied in Johannesburg. This whole family, up to the great-grandchildren today, has accepted the truth. Brother Bridger also heard of several people who “had no faith in Christmas celebrations.” He succeeded in contacting them and so came in touch with four other persons who had been associated with our work in South Africa. He started a study with them, and this formed the nucleus of the first European congregation in Northern Rhodesia. Brother and Sister Bridger also worked among the Africans at the compounds.

ON TO BAROTSELAND

Some more help came from the Union in 1945 in the person of Brother C. Holliday (husband of Sister M. Holliday mentioned earlier in this story). He was invited by George Phillips, the branch overseer in Cape Town, to serve as “traveling servant and assist Brother Llewelyn Phillips.” While in Northern Rhodesia he visited Barotseland, an area of 284,000 square miles situated on the upper reaches of the great Zambezi River, west of Victoria Falls. He was accompanied by an interested European and an African “servant to the brethren” who acted as guide and interpreter.

It was quite a difficult journey. They first traveled on a private timber train to Massesse, where they stopped over, had a meeting with some Witnesses and arranged the nucleus of a congregation. The next lap of their journey was on a borrowed ganger’s trolley, which was pushed along the rails by two Africans to a point where the travelers could get a ride on a government truck. This took them to Katima Molilo, from where another lift took them to Ngwesi. There they were met by brothers who had walked down from Senanga, to meet them and serve as their porters. For the rest of the trip to Senanga they traveled most of the way by three canoes. At one point they had a hair-raising experience with a hippopotamus. To Brother Holliday’s terror, the huge beast lifted one of the canoes into the air. But the paddler skillfully kept his balance and struck the animal with his oar. This had the desired result and the hippo swam off, to everybody’s relief.

On reaching Senanga they were welcomed by a huge crowd that had assembled. To be present, some had journeyed on the road for eight or nine days. All were intensely keen and curious about what was in store for them. This was the first visit from a European brother and many of them had never seen a white person before. The unofficial assembly they held was indeed spiritually refreshing.

While visiting the congregation at Mufulira, Brother Holliday met Mr. Ford, the compound manager, who was very impressed by the good work and reliability of the “Watch Tower boys.” He was one of the officials mentioned in the report in the 1946 Yearbook of Jehovah’s Witnesses: “The official mind is one of nonrecognition still, but individually there are some encouraging instances of a definite respect for the cleanliness, decency and industry of Jehovah’s witnesses. The huge numbers now associating with us in the mining centers (and it is no uncommon thing to attend a gathering of 800) are beginning to impress deeply those who directly control Africans, and, as an instance of this, after four months of correspondence with the Mufulira Town Management Board a free plot has been granted for the erection of a Kingdom Hall. Credit is due for this to some officials who spoke boldly for us.” This building was the first of its kind in Northern Rhodesia.

So, in spite of persecution the work was really forging ahead in Northern Rhodesia during the first half of the 1940’s. That also was true in the other countries under the South Africa branch.

PREACHING DESPITE A BAN IN BASUTOLAND

In the early 1940’s, Brother and Sister Frank Taylor made a visit to Basutoland (now Lesotho). There they found that the interest was so great that in many places the Africans actually ran after them for the literature. But the authorities were watching them and threatened to confiscate all their literature and thus forced them to move on.

During February 1941, a total ban was placed on the importation of our literature into Basutoland. As strange as it may seem, the ban was imposed before there was even one Witness living in the country. But during the period of the ban the Kingdom work started up and progressed very well. Brothers with the Society’s sound cars had toured the country, broadcasting the Society’s recorded lectures and distributing literature, but it was not until 1942 that the branch office received a report from two publishers in Basutoland. One of these first publishers was Brother L. Ramosena, who actually first heard of the truth while working in the town of Vereeniging, in Transvaal. Brother Ramosena was so enthused with the message and felt such a keen desire to spread it in his own country that he went home and began witnessing diligently, starting in a place called Teyateyaneng.

Soon Brother Ramosena was joined by another brother who had accepted the truth in Johannesburg and the two of them cycled to neighboring villages, spreading the good news. They organized little meetings and the group grew. A year later, 1943, there were four publishers​—a 100-percent increase!

Sharing in the preaching work from house to house in Lesotho is quite different from in most other countries. Whether the householder is inside the house or outside, the publisher will greet with a clear, friendly “Khotso!” meaning “Peace!” The householder will reply with a “Khotso!” The publisher will then be invited in and given a seat and they will inquire about each other’s health. The traditional greeting having been completed, the publisher can now begin to explain his mission.

Although the Catholic Church and the French Mission are well established in the country and many people belong to either one or the other of these religions, many Basutos have still held on to their pagan traditions of ancestor worship and, until recently, ritual murders, the killing of humans to obtain certain body parts for so-called medicinal purposes, took place. But, despite these obstacles, the little group of Kingdom publishers grew and in 1948 there were nine publishers of the good news.

Since many of the chiefs are Catholics they are often opposed to the Kingdom work, but there were some honest-hearted ones among them. In 1951 a pioneer visited a chief’s kraal in Leribe. He was invited to a meal. Two clergymen were also present. The pioneer gave a witness to the chief and as he made each point he proved it from the Bible. The two priests became annoyed and left in a huff, but the chief was delighted and a study was started with him. Later he encouraged the people of his area also to have studies, resulting in so many wanting Bible studies that the local pioneer could no longer handle them all. The work was developing well and by 1951 there were five small congregations in Basutoland. The following year there were 53 publishers, on the average, as well as 10 pioneers.

THE LIGHT BRIGHTENS IN TANGANYIKA

Farther north, in Tanganyika, the work among the African brothers also made progress. During the years since 1936 isolated letters that reached the Society’s Cape Town branch from Tanganyika showed that rays of truth were shining in this part of Africa, although dimly. In 1942, 158 brothers had some share in the work. According to the Yearbook of 1945, the reports from Tanganyika indicated increased opposition and confiscation of literature, but there was a monthly average of 75 publishers reporting just over 8 hours per publisher in the field. The only avenue by which to encourage these brothers was through correspondence, and this the Society did. By 1945 the nearly 6,000,000 inhabitants in this country were witnessed to by only three organized congregations consisting of 144 publishers. Their work consisted mainly of oral testimonies, return visits and studies. Once in a while reading matter reached them and there was great rejoicing. They made good use of such items to the benefit of all. By 1946 they had increased to 227 publishers and 7 congregations. These brothers experienced considerable opposition from the organizations of false religion and were in great need of closer supervision and literature in Swahili.

In January of 1948 a Cibemba-speaking servant to the brethren was sent from Northern Rhodesia to visit the congregations in Tanganyika. He worked with the eight congregations in the Mbeya district, encouraging and building up the brothers. The only other congregation, on the border of Northern Rhodesia, was served by another servant to the brethren. Results were forthcoming and even chiefs were manifesting an interest in the truth. Also, Tanganyika now came under the newly formed branch in Northern Rhodesia. Today Kenya, Uganda and Tanzania are directed by the Society’s branch in Kenya. The Kingdom work is developing swiftly in that area and bringing much honor to Jehovah’s name.

A NEW CAMPAIGN BEGINS

The public meeting campaign began in South Africa during June 1945 and received enthusiastic support from the brothers in the field. As a result of the Theocratic Ministry School, many speakers were now available. The outlines provided were translated into the main African languages and the brothers in that field also began to organize this new campaign.

Of course, many of the brothers felt shy and fearful about speaking from a public platform. Among these were Piet Wentzel and his partner, Frans Muller, serving as pioneers in Vereeniging. When the Informant (later called Kingdom Ministry) discussed the campaign, they both agreed that this was not for them. They had never been on the public platform. However, reminders in the Informant encouraged them, so they selected talks and started on the preparations. For practicing their delivery they chose a quiet spot on the river bank and, placed sufficiently apart, began to “address” their softly flowing “audience”​—the river! For about a month they went down to the river every lunch hour and practiced until they felt sufficiently confident to speak to a real audience. Handbills were ordered and much advertising was done. When the date came, they had 37 at their public talk and were very grateful for such a fine start.

STRONGER ORGANIZATION IN EVIDENCE

In comparison with the previous years, 1945 was a comparatively quiet year as far as opposition was concerned. There were several small incidents, however, one of which occurred in the town of Kimberley. This has been an important diamond-mining center ever since the 1870’s when diamond digging began in that area. For no apparent reason the Town Council of Kimberley passed a resolution to the effect that Jehovah’s witnesses should not be permitted into the municipal locations (for the Africans) to spread their beliefs. The superintendent of the African locations was instructed to stop any activities of the Witnesses and close down their meeting places. A local paper published the item under the caption “Russellites Banned in Local Locations.”

The superintendent of the locations, a man by the name of O’Brien, lost no time in taking action. In the absence of the brothers, he broke into the Kingdom Hall, seized their literature and transcription machine, and smashed to pieces the little handcart for wheeling the machine around. Then he triumphantly handed the pieces to onlookers for firewood. The branch also lost no time in reacting. The Town Council was given a 48-hour notice to return the seized property and to pay damages for the cart; otherwise legal action would be taken. As a result, the Town Council was £10 out of pocket for damages, and O’Brien had to back right down and personally restore the seized property to the Kingdom Hall. To cap all of this off, the local press published an item showing that Jehovah’s witnesses had won another victory and were carrying forward their educational work in the local locations as usual!

At long last, in May 1945, in Europe the war that had lasted almost six long weary years came to an end. Hostilities still continued for a while in the Far East, until the atomic bombs shattered the resistance of Japan. South Africans, generally, heaved a big sigh of relief. But although the Witnesses had fought and won the “battle of the ban,” their long-running fight with the “seed” of the Serpent was not yet over.

However, at nineteen places God’s people held the United Announcers’ Assembly during the World War. For the first time in the history of the Kingdom work in South Africa, the brothers were able to enjoy the same good things simultaneously with the brothers in America and elsewhere. The program and the new releases were all there on time.

Down in Durban the number of publishers had come up to approximately 100. This small band put on a powerful campaign to advertise the public talk. Leaflets to the number of 50,000, 2,000 special invitation letters, 1,000 posters plus many banners, large and small, were used. The city was electrified. They had never seen anything like this before. Attendance at the public talk was 900, of which number approximately 750 were the public. The nationwide attendance for that series of assemblies reached a new peak of 5,001.

At the branch office in Cape Town the family was now up to fourteen, still all living out in private homes and boardinghouses and having their meals at local restaurants. The little printery had been having a busy time and in 1945 produced an all-time peak of 2,562,817 pieces of printed material. The new book “The Truth Shall Make You Free,” published in 1943, had been translated into Afrikaans, Zulu and Sesotho.

So the organization in southern Africa emerged from World War II far stronger and much larger than at the beginning. The work had progressed and grown in spite of all the efforts the opponents, had made, the banning of the literature, the “smear’ campaigns by the religionists, adverse publicity in the press, court cases, police raids and arrests. The number of congregations in South Africa had more than doubled, having increased from 115 to 244. In the whole of southern Africa the average number of publishers had risen from 3,179 (in 1939) to 12,289 (in 1945), an increase of 286 percent. Even more marvelous was the increase in the Union of South Africa, from 439 publishers in 1939 to 2,991 in 1945​—an increase of 580 percent!

BUILDING TO THE FUTURE

In view of the tremendous increases during the war years, the Kingdom work in South, Central and East Africa had to be well organized if it was going to be productive in the years that lay ahead. An increase from 3,179 Witnesses in 1939 to an average of 14,089 in 1946 is what the records show. About 25,000,000 people then lived in all the territories under the supervision of the South Africa branch office at Cape Town. Ninety percent belonged to the various African tribes in the southern half of the continent. The majority of the Europeans (white people), however, lived in the Union of South Africa itself.

The next few years were to see further amazing growth. New branches of the Watch Tower Society would be opened in these territories, so as better to care for the interests of the sheeplike ones.

There was still much misunderstanding about the work in many areas. When a few of the African brothers from Northern Rhodesia wanted to come to Johannesburg for the convention in October of 1946, immigration officials would not permit, them to do so. One asked: ‘Has not the Watchtower been guilty of subversive activities?’ The facts were laid before these officials, but the brothers were still not permitted to enter the country. The reason given was that there would not be sufficient accommodations for them in Johannesburg, where thousands were already living in makeshift structures in the African townships. The authorities did not want to accept the fact that Jehovah’s witnesses themselves would care for the accommodations of their visiting brothers.

Publications such as “Let God Be True” and “Equipped for Every Good Work,” released at the 1946 Cleveland, Ohio, assembly, were enthusiastically received by the South African brothers at their assembly in Johannesburg some two or three months later. These publications did much in making the servants of Jehovah more qualified as real teachers of the Word. The work with the portable phonograph and recorded Bible lectures was still going on, but now it was time for Kingdom workers of all races to learn how to do more of the preaching and teaching themselves, with their own mouths.

One of the African circuit overseers at that time, M. Nguluh, reports that quite a few African clergymen of various religions accepted the truth during this period. One of these, Bethuel Rikhotso of the Swiss Mission Church, was contacted by Brother Nguluh while Brother Nguluh was on a circuit visit to Graskop in the northeastern part of Transvaal Province in 1946. This man accepted the truth on the first evening it was presented to him, and at the next visit of the circuit overseer he had arranged for a special talk to be given at the “kraal” (group of huts) of the paramount chief of the Shangaan tribe. This led to a powerful witness being given and, in later years, a large congregation developed in this area. Rikhotso himself became a pioneer in January 1947.

CIRCUIT WORK AND ASSEMBLIES

The work of the African circuit overseer was sometimes perilous in those days. Brother Nguluh mentions that twice he nearly drowned when crossing flooded rivers. Even today, to get from one congregation to another, African circuit overseers have to walk many miles through the bush, loaded with luggage, and often accompanied by a wife and a baby.

In February 1947, a new circuit arrangement went into effect and South Africa was divided into fourteen circuits.

In some areas the interest of the African people was remarkable. One African circuit overseer tells of giving the same public talk three times the same day! He had been sent to a certain area to organize a new congregation and he arranged for a public lecture on a Sunday in August 1947. The attendance was 173, nearly all newly interested ones. He writes: “After the lecture those present went away to invite others to come to hear the truth. At 3 p.m. I had to deliver a second public lecture. At 5 p.m. another large group came to the hall and earnestly asked ,me to repeat the talk as they had heard from the 3 o’clock group that the truth was being spoken in that hall. So from 6 to 7 p.m. I gave the talk for the third time that afternoon.” This type of interest was to set the pace for marvelous increases.

In April 1947, the first circuit assembly in South Africa was held in Durban. Milton Bartlett, a graduate of the fifth class of the Watchtower Bible School of Gilead for missionaries and the first Gilead missionary to come to South Africa, was the district overseer at this assembly. The African brothers had a whitewashed hall in a municipal compound near the center of the city. This was a happy occasion. Brothers had traveled considerable distances, as the entire province of Natal was included in the one circuit at that time.

Brother Bartlett gives this very vivid description of local color at this African assembly: “It was a thrilling experience to see the attitude of the African Witnesses. They were so clean, quiet, neat in their person, so sincere and eager to learn more of the truth, very eager for field service. Although they were right inside the compound (hostel grounds) they had their three-legged pots and had slaughtered a beast and did their food preparation in that compound. Every Witness had brought with him his own enameled plate, his enameled cup and a tablespoon, or soup spoon, that he used for all his eating requirements. But when it came time for eating the mealie meal (maize porridge) in its stiff form they rolled it in their hands and immersed it in some of the soup in the bottom of their dishes and then popped it into their mouths.”

The brothers enjoyed their circuit assemblies very much. The branch report for that year tells of African brothers in Zululand walking seventy-eight miles to get to a circuit assembly and then home again, all together five days of walking. As the branch overseer said: “The zeal of many of these friends is really remarkable and it does one’s heart good to see their eagerness to learn and take to heart the instruction received.”

Accommodations problems do not worry these brothers either. They come with a bundle containing a blanket and a few personal belongings, a baby on the back of some of the women, and a small wooden box for their books and Bible. The box is often used as a seat at the assembly sessions. Should they have to spend a night or two on the journey to the assembly place, they easily find some friendly Africans willing to give them a corner in which to sleep. If they have to sleep in the open, they have their blankets to keep them warm.

Now and again there is no hall available and so the assembly is held in the open with the vault of heaven as a ceiling. On the other hand, a temporary structure is made of poles covered by a tarpaulin. Temporal needs are met by appetizing meals consisting of mealie meal (maize porridge) and meat. If they have a plate of their own, good and well. Otherwise, they eat out of a common dish. If someone does not have a spoon​—well, fingers were made before knives and spoons!

JOYOUS VISIT UPBUILDS SPIRITUALLY

The highlight of the Kingdom work in South, Central and East Africa during 1948 was the long-awaited visit of the Society’s president, N. H. Knorr. What a joy this was to all the brothers in southern Africa! Ground then was purchased for the building of a new branch office, factory and home near Johannesburg.

January 3 to 5, 1948, were the days set for the national assembly in South Africa. It was held in Johannesburg; but owing to official requirements the European and Colored brothers had to meet in one place and the Africans at another. Although the brothers were given short notice, some 3,600 attended the opening sessions and 9,246 came to the two public meetings. A total of 416 were immersed, of whom 378 were African brothers. After the assembly, Brother Knorr and his secretary, Milton Henschel, spent three days in Cape Town at the branch office, giving counsel and encouragement to the Bethel staff.

In all the countries and territories under the direction of the branch at Cape Town there was a peak of just over 27,000 publishers in 1948. As a result of Brother Knorr’s visit that year, some new branches were organized to function on their own in the central parts of Africa, rather than being mere depots sending reports to the Society’s Cape Town office. It seems appropriate at this point to consider the progress in some central African lands till then under the supervision of the branch in Cape Town.

KINGDOM PREACHING PROSPERS WITH RESTRICTIONS REMOVED

In Southern Rhodesia (now simply called Rhodesia), the battle to remove restrictions on Kingdom activity continued. The Cape Town branch had been faithfully sending off applications for the removal of restrictions and in 1945 assurance was given that the application would receive consideration at an early. meeting of the cabinet. The following year saw restrictions finally removed, and once again the Society’s literature could be freely circulated in Rhodesia.

By 1947 Bert McLuckie’s family circumstances were such that he felt free to take up pioneer service again. To his great surprise and happiness, he was assigned to open a depot for the Society at Bulawayo, then Southern Rhodesia, on July 1, 1947. Thanks primarily to Jehovah, the long, hard battle for the Kingdom work to be established fully and represented properly in that land had been won! By that year the peak of publishers had passed the 3,000 mark, with 82 congregations organized.

The first depot office was rather a family affair, with Bert McLuckie working in the home of his fleshly brother Jack McLuckie. In the beginning, Bert McLuckie did all the work himself. Then he called in two African brothers to translate Watchtower magazine articles, one into Chishona and the other into Cinyanja. For quite a time they made copies of these translations on a mimeograph machine, and the magazine had to be collated, folded and stitched by hand. As Brother McLuckie himself admits, the final product left much to be desired. Now in 1975 these magazines are produced with a very high standard of quality on a modern rotary press at the Elandsfontein branch, with the Cinyanja translation having a printing of 25,000 and the Chishona translation a printing of 13,900 copies per issue.

All these developments and improvements naturally brought great joy and encouragement to the hearts of the Kingdom publishers in Southern Rhodesia. But we can imagine how thrilled they all must have been when the news came through in October 1947 that Brothers Knorr and Henschel were due to visit them in January 1948. Thousands of leaflets, hundreds of posters and many banners were prepared to advertise the talks to be given by Brother Knorr to Africans and Europeans in Bulawayo and Salisbury. About this time, Eric Cooke, Southern Rhodesia’s first missionary from Gilead School, also arrived on the scene.

Difficulties arose in Salisbury when the Native Administration Department canceled the arrangements previously made for the use of the hall in Harari Township for the convention period, January 16-18, 1948. They also canceled the sleeping accommodations that had previously been arranged for African brothers. So on January 13 Brother Cooke had an interview with the director of the Native Department to find out the basis for his objections. It was found that he had a wrong idea concerning the Society, believing that it was ‘against the government.’ Brother Cooke overcame this erroneous idea by reading a section of the Yearbook Jehovah’s Witnesses. This impressed the official so much that he restored the use of the hall in Harari and made sleeping accommodations available for the thousands expected to attend the assembly. Thus the way was opened for a successful assembly of Jehovah’s witnesses, with a peak attendance beyond the 6,000 mark.

During his short visit Brother Knorr took time to call on government officials to discuss certain important restrictions on the Society’s literature due to shortage of dollars in sterling countries. Brother Knorr ironed out this problem with officialdom by saying that all literature supplies for Southern Rhodesia would be sent in free, thus avoiding currency problems.

It was during this visit that Brother Knorr arranged for the depot to become a branch office on September 1, 1948, with Eric Cooke as the branch overseer. It was the beginning of a new chapter for the Kingdom work in Southern Rhodesia. At that time the peak in publishers there was 4,232.

WAKING UP NYASALAND

Much the same pattern is seen in the history of the work in Nyasaland (now Malawi) in those days. By 1946 Jehovah’s witnesses were really making their presence felt in Nyasaland. The number of publishers passed the 3,000 mark for the first time, and the brothers were really waking the country up.

The public meeting campaign was now in full swing and having much success in awakening people everywhere. Of course, the false religionists made every effort to prevent Jehovah’s witnesses from conducting these meetings in their villages. Permission had to be obtained from the village headmen to give a public talk. So, if the headman came under the influence of the local religious leaders, no public meeting could be held. In the Zomba area, the deacons and elders of a certain church threatened to deprive one headman of his chieftainship, but he just told them to go ahead. As a contrast, the headman of a neighboring village actually beat up two of Jehovah’s witnesses who had approached him to make arrangements for a public meeting in his village. The man was taken to court, but he being an influential person and a member of the church, the local African court said: “We can do nothing in the matter.” However, when the district commissioner heard about it, he gave both the court and the opposed headman a severe reprimand.

Many chiefs now began to send invitations to Jehovah’s witnesses to give talks in their villages. One chief, who, at a public talk in a place called Lizulu, had heard the truth about the condition of the dead, shortly afterward attended a funeral service conducted by some religious leaders. The audience was told that the child who had died “is now an angel in heaven.” The old chief grunted, climbed stiffly to his feet, turned to his induna (headman) next to him and asked for some snuff. Then, snuffing vigorously, he moved off the scene, saying: “Huh, we heard at Lizulu where the dead are; this is all lies!”

So powerful was the message of Jehovah’s witnesses that false religionists were trying to imitate our expressions and methods. They were trying to say: “We, too, are preaching the new world.” Some of them had attempted making return visits on their members; but in a few weeks they had to give it up.

At one open-air public meeting, widely advertised by word of mouth and by notices pinned on trees, some 300 people gathered under the shade of mango trees to hear the talk. It so happened that a clergyman came by on his bicycle at the crucial moment when the speaker quoted from Micah 3:11, “the priests thereof teach for hire.” (King James Version) The clergyman became offended and complained to the local headman, who ruled that Jehovah’s witnesses should stop holding public meetings. Of course, the brothers could not accept this and they appealed to the next-highest native court, where the decision was reversed with the warning that from then on anyone found troubling Jehovah’s witnesses would be fined £5. By the time it had all quieted down, some fifty interested persons had taken their stand as active publishers of the Kingdom!

Many headmen of the villages that had been opposed became friendly and admitted that they had been influenced by the religious leaders. When a circuit overseer approached a village headman, also a Roman Catholic, with a request to hold a public meeting in the village, he was told: “You hold a meeting here? Why, at ​——​ village you held a meeting and now the church there has tumbled down; you were received at ​——​ village and at ​——​ and in both cases it has happened. Now you want to enter into my village and pull down the church that we have built here! No, never!” However, the next morning two hundred brothers marched through the village singing as they went. The Roman Catholics tried to cause a disturbance by shouting and beating their tom-toms, but a large crowd joined the brothers in their march and all went to a place just outside the village where a very successful public meeting was held.

FIGHTING THE BAN

Part of the waking-up process in Nyasaland was accomplished by a petition circulated during the 1946 service year requesting the release of our literature, which the government had been holding. This somewhat isolated British colony was impressed by this energetic move on the part of the brothers. The petition forms were signed by 47,000 people, and this really worried the authorities.

The branch in Cape Town sent a long and powerful letter dated 5th September, 1946, to the Secretary of State for the Colonies in London. This letter pointed out that the conduct of Jehovah’s witnesses in Nyasaland had been irreproachable, that those who had been responsible for imposing the ban on the literature had been strongly influenced by the Jesuits operating in Nyasaland, and that bans on the Society’s literature had already been removed in other parts of the British Commonwealth. The response was encouraging, in that the governors of the four different British territories making up the East African bloc (Northern Rhodesia, Nyasaland, Kenya and Tanganyika) were called upon by the colonial office to make a joint recommendation concerning the Watch Tower Society and Jehovah’s witnesses. The governors were requested to keep in mind two main points, (1) the principle of freedom of worship for all, and (2) that prohibitions similar to those then existing in these lands had been withdrawn in every other part of the Empire. However, the matter was shelved by the authorities, who said that they would carefully examine the Society’s literature.

A VISIT GIVES IMPETUS TO THE WORK

A very special event for Nyasaland took place on January 13, 1948. A plane landed on a short flight from Salisbury, Southern Rhodesia, with four brothers on board. They were Brothers Knorr, Henschel, Phillips, the branch overseer at Cape Town, and I. Fergusson, a new Gilead graduate assigned to help in Nyasaland. A meeting had been arranged at the Blantyre Town Hall for the Europeans and Indians. Considering the fact that there were then only 250 Europeans in Blantyre, an attendance of 40 to hear the public talk was good. The next day the group attended the African assembly near Limbe where Bill McLuckie interpreted the talks of the speakers into Cinyanja. For the public talk in the afternoon there was an attendance of 6,000. As there was no public-address equipment, the brothers on the program had to speak with strong voices so that all could hear. At one point heavy rain interrupted the talk, and the public began to scatter to the shelter of trees or houses nearby. But the brothers remained and Brother Knorr brought his talk to a close while holding an umbrella over his head. The very fact that the president of the Society, a European, stood in the rain to finish his talk showed the Africans that the people associated with the Society are truly interested in their welfare, for local Europeans would never have done that.

During the visit Brother Knorr talked with the Chief Secretary of the government and the Police Commissioner and was able to clear away doubts and misunderstandings about the Society’s publications. The government representatives promised to review the entire matter to see if the ban on the literature could be lifted.

The visit of Brother Knorr gave a tremendous impetus to the work in the country and 1948 was certainly memorable in the history of the Kingdom work in Nyasaland. The peak of publishers was now past the 5,000 mark, and new ones were joining the ranks very fast. By 1948 the number of publishers in Nyasaland was increasing so fast in some places that it was hard to find sufficient territory in which to witness.

On September 1, 1948, a branch was established in Nyasaland and Bill McLuckie was appointed branch overseer. This marked another forward move in the history of the Kingdom work in Nyasaland, resulting in the further strengthening of the brothers. The next year, 1949, saw the arrival of two British graduates of Gilead missionary school, Peter Bridle and Fred Smedley.

TRUE WORSHIP ADVANCES IN NORTHERN RHODESIA

Northern Rhodesia (now called Zambia) was not lagging behind at all during this period. Much of the increase centered around the progressive copper-producing area. Here in the Copper Belt the organization was expanding by leaps and bounds. To cope with this great influx, a ten-day course was arranged at the depot for all full-time workers and any who wished to enter their ranks to produce more competent servants to the brethren.

This advance of true worship really worried the false shepherds of Christendom. One parson, in an effort to stem the tide, arranged for members of his congregation to call at the huts of the people like Jehovah’s witnesses and invite them to “church.” But some were met by astonished householders who, after listening to their halting talk, told them that they had no message like the “Watchtower people.” After this unsuccessful effort the dispirited churchgoers returned and their congregation was no larger!

Whole villages accepted the truth in Northern Rhodesia. Some missionaries of Christendom showed a meek disposition, like the European missionary at Mumbwa who, impressed by the zeal of Jehovah’s witnesses, started reading the Society’s books and visiting the local presiding overseer of the congregation.

Here the Witnesses were harassed for years by a government official who had imprisoned the publishers, broken down the Bible study shelters, and disrupted their meetings. This magistrate was fined for illegal conduct and replaced by a man that was fair and just. The depot overseer visited this district and had an interview with all the chiefs and counselors at their quarterly meeting. The result? Permission was granted for the erection of study centers throughout the district. Within a short time little grass shelters or stronger structures had popped up over all this district and even headmen were seen attending the studies regularly. Fourteen of them told their chiefs that they had accepted the truth, and their numbers kept increasing.

Also in Barotseland, the chiefs and royal family received an excellent witness when permission was granted for a European representative of the Society, who was there to attend a circuit assembly of 2,800 publishers, to address the khotla, the supreme Barotse ruling council. So from the throne, with the paramount chief beside him, he was able to explain why our work is different and what our message is about. All of this was in the presence of the chiefs, the stewards and the royal family. Thereafter the royal drums were beaten with traditional vigor.

One of the old members of the royal house who accepted the truth, though too aged to walk, used to ride daily on a donkey to the fork of a native path and there he would call the people passing to witness to them. An enemy killed his donkey with a spear and he was sad indeed, but he was given another by a publisher so that he could continue his work.

A great burden carried by the interested ones at this time was illiteracy. Many publishers memorized scriptures and sermons. But they have since learned to read and write their own language through the literacy classes arranged by the Society.

In early 1947, representations were made to the British Colonial office in London by a personal visit from the South African branch overseer on his way back to Cape Town from the Gilead School. This was supported by a petition presented to the government that was signed by 40,909 persons who deplored the action banning the work of distributing Bible literature, which they knew to be a beneficial Christian educational work. In response to this petition, the government of Northern Rhodesia promised to reexamine the position regarding the literature, and on June 19 some items, notably “The Kingdom of God Is Nigh” and The Coming World Regeneration, were removed from the proscribed list. However, the Society’s official magazine The Watchtower was still not free for circulation. Hence, efforts to make available to the brothers this necessary spiritual food could not be relaxed. In fact, the need was greater than ever, as 1947 ended with 6,114 preachers of the good news in 252 congregations.

By 1948, the once trackless and malaria-ridden bush country of the Copper Belt had become the home of some 25,000 Europeans, mainly to augment the mining fraternity. They lived under conditions that compared favorably with the standards in the countries ‘from which they had come. Until this year, little public preaching had been possible among this English-speaking population.

ORGANIZATION RECEIVES AID

Fortunately the organization in Northern Rhodesia received help at this stage in the form of two Gilead missionaries, Harry Arnott and Ian Fergusson. Brother Arnott arrived just ahead of Brothers Knorr and Henschel, who made their first visit to this country in January 1948.

During the visit of Brothers Knorr and Henschel, accompanied by George Phillips, they spent a few hours at a four-day assembly in Lusaka. This gathering was held on a plot of ground belonging to a European lady who not only stuck to her promise for them to use her ground regardless of pressure from enemies of the Witnesses, but also attended the assembly. Indeed, the setting was picturesque. The brothers had gathered clay and built up an earthen platform. Poles were implanted in the dirt and a grass roof was made to cover the platform. This time the audience was still separated, with the sisters on the left of the speaker and the brothers on the right. Brother Knorr was so impressed with the singing that he asked for a recording to be made. The booklet “The Kingdom of God Is Nigh” in the Silozi language was released to an assembled audience of 3,103 during the course of the four-day convention.

Brother Knorr met with the Secretary of Native Affairs and the Attorney General on January 16, 1948, about the ban on some of the literature that the Society wanted to ship to Northern Rhodesia. He was informed that within thirty to sixty days, the officials felt sure, the ban would be lifted, with no further restrictions on the Society’s work. This made a fitting climax to the visit of the Society’s president and his secretary.

With the extra help from the Gilead-trained missionaries, the European field also received better attention. Mid-1948 saw Harry Arnott assigned as a missionary to the town of Luanshya, and Ian Fergusson, who had been in Nyasaland for a while, to Chingola. Intensive house-to-house preaching was soon under way, and the response was exciting. The virgin territory absorbed substantial quantities of Bibles and Bible literature, and home Bible studies developed quickly. Within one year two small European congregations were established in these towns, and arrangements were being made to extend the preaching work to Mufulira and Kitwe.

The arrival of Gilead School graduates was seen as an excellent opportunity for transmitting some of the advanced theocratic organizational benefits to the congregations of Jehovah’s people throughout this central African territory. All appointed traveling representatives, together with those from the pioneer ranks who might qualify for this service, were invited to the branch office at Lusaka to enjoy a “mini” Gilead School. This school for circuit overseers covered some of the groundwork in organization and Bible teaching presented in these early years of Gilead School. Subjects taught were Bible themes, theocratic records, theocratic ministry and related matters. Written reviews were conducted and homework assignments given out for evening work, and they even had “graduation exercises” with a distinct African flavor.

Following the first visit of the Society’s president to this part of Africa, the brothers were encouraged to give more than the usual attention to learning to read and write their own language, and thus be better equipped to study God’s Word and to preach the good news to others. Arrangements were soon made by the branch office for literacy groups to be formed in each congregation. Initially, teaching aids were obtained from the educational departments of the government and used as a basis for these group instruction classes. Often the periods for instruction formed an extension to a congregation meeting, and, for the greater part, the students were the sisters in the congregation. “Each One Teach One” became a familiar slogan in the promotion of the campaign for more literates. Husbands were urged to spend time teaching their wives, and other persons already literate were encouraged to give their time to teaching another in the congregation.

A NEW BRANCH OFFICE

On September 1, 1948, a branch office was established, with Llewelyn Phillips as the branch overseer. At that time there were over 11,600 publishers in Northern Rhodesia’s 232 congregations. The ban on the Watchtower magazine was lifted, but some of the books were still banned.

This new branch in Northern Rhodesia now became responsible for several territories to the north and east, including the territory then known as the Belgian Congo, which up to August 31 had been under the jurisdiction of the South Africa branch. How had the Kingdom work progressed in the Belgian Congo up to this stage?

CHRISTIAN PROGRESS DESPITE CONFUSION

The Belgian Congo (Republic of the Congo, Kinshasa, now called Zaïre) is a vast country of over 900,000 square miles, larger than Texas and Alaska combined, with a population of over 23 million people. It lies to the north of Zambia and Angola and its principal physical feature is the great depression of the Congo river basin. In the southeast, bordering on Zambia, are rich copper mines that provide the main economic wealth of the country. The climate is generally hot and humid and much of the area is thick jungle. In 1885 it came under Belgian rule, with the result that the official language became French and the predominating religion Roman Catholic.

There was no organized Kingdom-preaching work in the Congo until the 1940’s. However, there was growth of the local false “Watchtower movement” or Kitawala. The book Kitawala (in German) by Greschat, page 71, states: “You find whole villages calling themselves Watch Tower, which merely means they have been dipped, baptized, and they vaguely accept various notions about the end of the world and, provided they live in a certain way, think that God will give them rewards on this earth.”

In the Congo, as elsewhere, the native term “Kitawala” was often used when referring to the indigenous “Watchtower movement.” Kitawala is a corruption, it seems, of the word “tower” preceded by the prefix “ki.” Some used the longer expression “Waticitawala,” an obvious native corruption of “Watchtower.” It is not difficult to understand how the uninformed could associate the two together; the names “Watch Tower Society” and “Watchtower” (movement) or Kitawala are very similar. And how gleefully the enemies of truth have used this similarity over and over again to prejudice the minds of government officials and to cause trouble for the true servants of Jehovah!

Uprisings, rebellions, tribal clashes and, in fact, any spectacular occurrences among the native people were often conveniently linked with the “Watchtower” movement. The name became a stench as far as public officials and authorities were concerned. One can imagine what reproach this brought on the name of Jehovah and his true organization in those areas!

As explained earlier, this confusion was initially due to the work of Joseph Booth and his followers in Nyasaland in the early part of the twentieth century. Mr. Booth, along with his disciple Elliott Kamwana and others, misused the early literature of the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society, and this was responsible for the birth of the false “Watchtower movement” in central Africa. From Nyasaland the teaching apparently spread south and west to the Rhodesias and into the Congo.

In the years that followed, the Society sent letters to the authorities in the Congo setting out the facts, but the officials, to one degree or another, for many years chose to continue associating the activities of these indigenous religious movements using the name “Watchtower” with the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society and the work of Jehovah’s witnesses. Church influence and pressures had much to do with this situation.

Regular efforts were made by the Society to get mature representatives into the country, but these were unsuccessful. Direction and help were needed, but Jehovah’s organization was refused permission to send that much-needed help, and for many years the authorities either could not or did not wish to make a distinction between the true servants of Jehovah and the indigenous “Watchtower movements.”

It was early in 1948 that Llewelyn Phillips, the depot overseer in Northern Rhodesia, was sent to the Belgian Congo to intervene in behalf of the persecuted Witnesses there and to try to have the ban on the work lifted. He had private interviews with the Governor-General and other government officials and was able to explain our work and show how far removed our beliefs and principles are from those of the false “Watchtower movement” called Kitawala. Official letters dated March 15 and April 7, 1948, were placed before these authorities so that the matter would be on record. During the interview with him the Governor-General wistfully asked: “And if I help you, what will happen to me?” A very good question, as the Congo was almost completely under the control of the Roman Catholic Church!

What a blessing it was when the work of Jehovah’s people was finally recognized! The branch began working under the official name of “Jehovah’s Witnesses” instead of “Watch Tower Society,” so as to avoid any further confusion. Now the sorting out of the true Witnesses from those associating with the false “Watchtower movements” could go on apace. From that time forward there were tremendous increases in the numbers taking up the pure worship of Jehovah God.

MARKED DEVELOPMENT ON MAURITIUS

After the successful visit of full-time Kingdom publishers (pioneers) in 1933, there was a gap of eighteen years before special representatives were able to visit the island of Mauritius again. Not until 1952 does the Yearbook of Jehovah’s Witnesses tell us that two Mauritians, while serving as soldiers in World War II, came in contact with the Kingdom work in Egypt. The faithful service of publishers in Egypt bore fruit. These two men, although serving in the military forces, became very interested and started writing to the Society’s Cape Town office and getting supplies of literature. Soon they also had a number of fellow soldiers interested. Upon returning to Mauritius, they sought to ‘let their light shine’ and actually sent reports to the Cape Town office during 1951.

In the same year, 1951, two Gilead School graduates, Robert and George Nisbet, arrived in Mauritius to establish the work on a permanent basis. In those eighteen years since the previous visit of Robert Nisbet, great changes had taken place. Meetings were no longer prohibited, and education had been greatly improved. The danger of malaria had been largely eliminated and living conditions had advanced. The Church had lost its political dominance but apparently still had a strong influence.

These Gilead School graduates found quite a number of people who remembered the visit in 1933 and were very glad to make contact with Jehovah’s organization again. One man, on being approached by a missionary, asked, “How is Judge Rutherford getting along?” This well illustrates how the people on the island had been out of touch with the developments of the Society, since Brother Rutherford had died some nine years previously. The same man showed a July 4, 1934, issue of The Golden Age and also a well-worn and well-read eighteen-year-old copy of La Harpe de Dieu (The Harp of God). This man resubscribed for the magazine and a Bible study was started with him.

Brother Robert Nisbet reports that among the first interested ones were two sisters, Mrs. Sooben and Mrs. Vacher, with their families, and these formed the basis of the first congregation. So in 1951, the combined report for the world lists Mauritius under South Africa, with a peak of eight publishers and an average of two pioneers. By the following year the peak of publishers was up to thirteen. The priests were still very busy, constantly collecting literature that had been placed with the people, and threatening them with excommunication.

A GLANCE AT MOZAMBIQUE

Returning to the mainland, let us pause for a moment to see how things were progressing in Mozambique, also known as Portuguese East Africa. It seems that very little had yet been done among the Europeans, except for the work mentioned previously, but progress was being made among the African people. The work had continued to grow steadily, especially in the north, and by 1948 the number of publishers rose to 398 with four full-time workers in the field. Meanwhile, persecution was steadily increasing in intensity and some were being arrested and imprisoned, and deported to penal colonies and work camps. Shipments of literature from the South Africa branch were being seized on arrival in Mozambique.

EMBRACING “THE WAY” IN SWAZILAND

Bordering on Mozambique is the little country of Swaziland, hemmed in on the other three sides by the Transvaal. The west side of the country is mainly high and mountainous, though beautifully green. Toward the east the countryside is mainly flat, covered with thornbushes and often the victim of prolonged droughts.

In previous decades, pioneers visiting Swaziland had been well received by King Sobhuza II, but they were not able to get an organization established. In time, one who embraced “The Way” was Joshua P. Mhlongo. (Acts 9:2) His original desire to learn something of the teaching of Jehovah’s witnesses had been aroused by the headmaster of the school where he was attending as a pupil. The headmaster continually repeated to his classes that J. F. Rutherford taught people not to believe in hell fire or to worship their ancestors. This created in Joshua a desire to learn more about Jehovah’s organization. But he was dismayed to hear that the government had stopped the work of the Witnesses and had placed a ban on their literature. Joshua eventually came into possession of various books through an aunt who was a publisher in Johannesburg. Soon he and his mother were sharing the good tidings with others. During 1943, while still a schoolboy, he symbolized his dedication by water immersion. Brother McCoffie Nguluh well remembers the visit to these isolated publishers. Joshua Mhlongo expressed his desire to become a pioneer upon completing his education, and Brother Nguluh gave him encouragement to do so. Sure enough, he later entered the pioneer service and in time served as the first circuit overseer in the newly formed Swazi circuit.

The four years from 1947 to 1950 saw phenomenal growth. The total publishers for the country increased from 5 to 60.

A strange situation obtained in Swaziland during this period. The ban, which had been placed upon literature of the Watch Tower Society during the second world war, continued in force. In terms of this proclamation it was an offense to distribute any literature published by the Watch Tower Society. Paradoxically, King Sobhuza himself was the proud possessor of an almost complete library of the Society’s publications! The ban on the Society’s literature hampered the spreading of the good news into isolated areas. When brothers and interested persons were found to be in possession of the Society’s literature, they were often cruelly beaten and maltreated by the police. Brother M. E. Bartlett, who at that time was serving as the only district overseer for South Africa and the Protectorates, had his first brush with this law during his second visit to Swaziland in July of 1951. He was charged with importing prohibited literature. The District Commissioner and Magistrate was very friendly toward Brother Bartlett and viewed the ban on the Society’s literature as an anachronism. He jovially requested that Brother Bartlett supply him with some of the “most objectionable” magazines in his possession. When the case was finally heard in September, another magistrate, who was not so sympathetic toward the work, found Brother Bartlett guilty and fined him £1.

It was also during this visit by the district overseer that the Scriptural requirement of monogamy was clearly outlined to the brothers and interested persons. While most were happy to make their lives over in accord with the complete will of God, one presiding overseer refused to accept God’s standards and led a small group away from the sayings of everlasting life. Those who loved God and sought his approval, however, continued to stand steadfast for right principles.

SERVING UNDER BAN IN BECHUANALAND

Going west, clear through South Africa, we come to Bechuanaland, now called Botswana. It covers about a quarter of a million square miles, mostly semidesert, and lies between South Africa, South-West Africa and Rhodesia. The native people are, for the most part, extremely poor. Cattle raising is their principal occupation, along with the growing of beans, kafir corn (sorghums), and so forth. A certain amount of hunting is also engaged in to supplement their diet. In 1970 the population was estimated to be over 630,000.

The area came under British rule in 1884, but in 1967 it gained independence and became known as Botswana. Most of the territory is divided into reserves where the chiefs of the various tribes administer their tribal law, wielding tremendous power over their subjects. These chiefs were generally antagonistic to the work of Jehovah’s witnesses.

It seems that in 1929 the seeds of truth first began to be sown in this hot and dusty land. One publisher was active there that year, but for only two months. Then, toward the end of 1932, two pioneers from South Africa visited the country and were permitted to speak about matters of religion, provided they did not do so among the African people. Nevertheless, 1,676 pieces of literature were placed with the European population.

In 1941, due to the war hysteria, a ban was placed on the importation of the Society’s literature into Bechuanaland in spite of the fact that there were no resident Witnesses there at the time. According to a law passed by old Chief Khama, only three religious groups had the right to establish churches in this country: the London Missionary Society, the Seventh-day Adventists and the Roman Catholics.

There was a lot of movement of people back and forth from South Africa under work contracts. Men who worked in the bigger centers of South Africa would hear the truth in these places, go back to Bechuanaland and talk. about the good things they had heard. Also, Rhodesian brothers and those from Nyasaland would occasionally find employment in places like Francistown, and there they would talk about the truth. So, by 1946 there was an average of sixteen Kingdom publishers in Bechuanaland.

In the early 1950’s, the Society sent representatives into Bechuanaland to present our case to the authorities, but without much success.

For the entire country there was an average of 114 doing the preaching work by 1952. Increases continued to come during the next few years but problems were also building up. Some of the brothers and sisters had not properly registered their marriages with the government, and there was still much looseness of morals among many of the new ones. Through correspondence from the branch and with the aid of visiting overseers, these matters were cleared up. Today the organization is spiritually and morally sound.

NOTABLE INCREASE ON ST. HELENA

Out in the Atlantic Ocean, well off the coast of South-West Africa, we come once again to the lonely little island of St. Helena. Intermittent reports were received from the few publishers on the island and an occasional literature order was filled by the Society. But the Witnesses there needed a great deal of help and training. So it was that in May of 1951 the South Africa branch office sent a pioneer brother, J. F. van Staden, to spend some time there.

The postal service to this little island is very poor indeed and there was no one to meet Brother van Staden. However, he eventually met George Scipio, the son of Thomas Scipio the retired policeman. Brother van Staden gives his impressions of this meeting: “What a wonderful relief this was to me! He quickly took me to his father, the person for whom I was actually looking. It was simply wonderful to see the obvious joy over the help for which they had waited so long.” Brother van Staden lost no time in arranging a meeting with the little group of about ten or twelve persons. At first he had great difficulty in expressing himself in English, but after a few weeks he became much more fluent. He discovered that the only meetings they had been holding were “open-air services,” which they conducted in various places on the island. The brothers had their own little band, consisting of two violins and a piano accordion, which would start off their open-air service by playing Kingdom songs. When they had attracted a crowd, they gave impromptu talks (generally personal testimonies), and different brothers had a share in this.

It was clear that much needed to be done to help the brothers to get organized properly. So Brother van Staden immediately started conducting all the meetings. The local brothers showed wonderful appreciation and gave their wholehearted support. An elderly lady at Jamestown offered a large room in her home as a Kingdom Hall and another family at Levelwood also offered their home for a second meeting place. The meetings made a wonderful impression on all who attended, and the result was that some of those who came for the first time seem to have never stayed away again. In this way they learned the truth and were baptized later without ever having had a personal Bible study.

Getting to the meetings, however, was no easy matter. George Scipio had a little motorcar and with this he would pick up three persons and then drop them off some distance farther along the road. These three would keep on walking. Meanwhile George would turn around and pick up three more, take them some distance, drop them off and turn around again. He usually took the best part of the morning to get all the folks to the meeting. After the meeting the same procedure was followed to get them home. Sometimes this walking took place in pouring rain and they would arrive home late and wet. Yet, they experienced a feeling of deep satisfaction and sincere joy.

Brother van Staden soon had local brothers sharing with him in the house-to-house work. He gave them good training and was surprised to see how quickly they became efficient in preaching the good news at the doors.

Three months after his arrival Brother van Staden arranged for a baptismal service, in August 1951. Since they had difficulty in finding a suitable place they decided to dig a pond and then cement it and fill it with water. However, they were saved the trouble of filling the pond since the night before they had the baptism it rained heavily and the next morning the pond was filled to the brim! When Brother van Staden gave the baptism talk and asked the candidates to stand, he was amazed to see twenty-six getting up to answer the questions. He says: “My cup of joy was indeed running over and deep in my heart I was grateful to Jehovah that he had sent me to such a wonderful privilege. After the talk I baptized all twenty-six in the cold water.” Soon after the baptism a little congregation was formed in Jamestown. A few months later another congregation was started in Levelwood.

All this activity and success for the Kingdom publishers naturally stirred up enemy action. Bitter opposition came from the local Anglican bishop, who succeeded in turning some of the interested people against the truth. The local Seventh-day Adventist pastor challenged Brother van Staden to a debate, but was probably quite sorry that he had done so, since even some of the new publishers were easily able to refute many of his arguments. The worst trouble, though, came from the local commissioner of police. This man continually threatened Brother van Staden, saying that he would have him sent away from the island. Brother van Staden says: “He regularly took me to the courtroom once a month, just he and I, and then he would question me and warn me that I must stop this work.”

This opposition, however, in no way discouraged Brother van Staden or the local publishers. The fine experiences the brothers had more than made up for all the opposition and any difficulties they had with weather and rugged terrain. For example, one morning as Brother van Staden and Brother George Scipio approached a door they heard a man reading from the Bible. They could clearly hear him reading Isaiah chapter 2; so, when he came to verse 4, they knocked. The friendly old man invited them in and they picked up the “thread” from Isaiah 2:4 and started preaching the good news of the Kingdom to him. They arranged for a study immediately. It was conducted regularly and eventually this old man dedicated his life to Jehovah.

The thirteen months that Brother van Staden spent on the island were very busy ones, especially when he reached the point of conducting eighteen Bible studies a week. He left St. Helena in June 1952 and returned to South Africa to take up circuit work in the eastern Cape Province. He had done a good job. In the thirteen months he was in St. Helena the two little congregations that had been formed reached a peak of forty-one publishers.

THEOCRATIC INCREASE IN SOUTH AFRICA

Let us now go back to the Union of South Africa and give you some idea of the conditions and the problems experienced by the brothers in South Africa a quarter of a century ago. The Funk & Wagnalls Standard Reference Encyclopedia, Volume 24, under “Union of South Africa” mentions the Group Areas Act of June 1950 as “providing for the separation of the four main racial groups, i.e., the Europeans (whites), the Africans (Negroes), the Coloureds (part whites), and Asiatics (including Indians), into specific areas, from which the other groups would be excluded.” Some expected that this could create problems for the brothers as far as the preaching work was concerned. As it turned out, however, it was simpler for the brothers and sisters to work with their own people in their own language. True, the law does not attempt to prevent a person of one racial group from speaking to a person of another group about matters of religion. But when it comes to loving Christian association, as the Bible encourages, the brothers enjoy their fellowship together mainly within each racial group, and at the same time they are obeying the principles of Romans chapter 13. The good news is being preached, people of all racial groups are learning the truth and enjoying necessary Christian association.

Jehovah’s witnesses had, for some years, been calling their hired meeting places “Kingdom Halls.” But in 1948 a pioneer was assigned to work at Strand, near Cape Town, and he was privileged to organize the building of the first Kingdom Hall in South Africa. This was in 1949 and 1950. A local publisher, Sister van der Bijl of Gordon’s Bay, helped greatly by financing this project. Bethel brothers came out from the branch at Cape Town not far away, and assisted with the dedication program. The branch overseer, Brother G. R. Phillips, said that he wished he could ‘put the new hall on wheels and take it around the country, not to display the building, but to encourage the brothers to build more Kingdom Halls.’ Since then many Kingdom Halls have been built by European and Colored congregations throughout the country.

During these years more and more help was given to the African brothers and sisters. January 1, 1949, was a great day for the Zulu brothers. It was the date of the first issue of The Watchtower in Zulu. At that time the magazine was printed on a small hand-operated duplicating machine at the Society’s offices in Cape Town. It was not the bright and attractive magazine that the INqabayokulinda (The Watchtower in Zulu) is today; but just the same, it provided the food at the right time for the Zulu brothers and sisters.

It was also during this period that the first special trains were arranged for taking the brothers to assemblies. In 1949, for instance, the “JW Special” had room for 750 to travel from Johannesburg to the assembly in Pretoria, but 1,000 packed into the train. These were Africans from about a dozen different tribes, and yet not one unruly incident occurred. The trip must have been quite a witness for the railway officials. How could Africans from these different tribes get along so well together? Without the power of the truth, which had made over the thinking of these people, there would certainly have been incidents of tribal fighting, so common among the African people. Each tribe considers itself to be superior and ‘faction fights’ often occur.

The organization was further strengthened in 1949 by the release of the booklet Counsel on Theocratic Organization. To push the work further there were now eleven Gilead graduates in the country, and nearly 10 percent of the publishers were sharing in the full-time preaching work.

There were 6,766 at the Memorial celebration that year and 265 partook of the emblems. But the scene was set and the work geared for far greater things. The little printery at Cape Town put out more than 6,400,000 pieces of printed material that year. This was a new printing peak for them and included nearly 135,000 magazines and 625,000 copies of various booklets in 8 languages.

In 1949 and 1950 literacy classes were begun. These were held three or four days a week. Classes were conducted in Zulu, Sesotho, Xhosa, Tswana, Sepedi and English. About thirty lessons were required before the pupils could read.

Polygamy, a widespread custom among native tribes, has been a real problem for many brothers in Africa. When Brother Knorr visited in 1948, polygamy was one of the main points discussed with the African brothers. At first the inclination among new ones was for a man to keep the wife he loved most, usually the youngest one, but later the Society pointed out that it was Scripturally proper to keep the woman he took first as his wife and put away all the others.

Forty-one South Africans were able to attend the international convention at New York in 1950, and nine were invited to stay on for the sixteenth class of the Watchtower Bible School of Gilead. Those who could not attend this international assembly, nevertheless, had the same spiritual feast during their five-day “Theocracy’s Increase” National Assembly on the Reef in October of the same year. It was attended by over 6,000 publishers from all parts of the Union, the Protectorates and South-West Africa. There was tangible evidence of the Theocracy’s increase in the 855 candidates who presented themselves for water baptism. The public talk was attended by 10,185. One of the new releases that really thrilled the brothers was the New World Translation of the Christian Greek Scriptures.

Further proof of the Theocracy’s increase was the fact that over 2,000 persons symbolized their dedication by water immersion during the 1951 service year. New congregations were formed and a second district was organized to care for the 43 circuits then in operation with a peak of 9,586 publishers.

BRANCH OFFICE MOVED

One of the great milestones in the history of the work in southern Africa was the moving of the Society’s headquarters from Cape Town to Elandsfontein in the Transvaal early in 1952. Since 1917 the work had been directed from Cape Town, the southernmost point of the territory. Now the need was felt for moving the branch up to the Reef for several reasons. The greatest concentration of population in South Africa was on the Reef, and, as a result, the majority of the brothers were to be found within a radius of 100 miles of Johannesburg. As the South Africa branch was doing printing for other branches in southern Africa, the Reef would be a more central location from which to carry on such activities, and great savings in railage to these countries would result.

When Brothers Knorr and Henschel visited the country in 1948, it was decided to purchase two stands in a new industrial township of Germiston, Activia Park, near Elandsfontein Station and Post Office. Although this area was undeveloped at that time, this decision later proved to be a very wise one. The new location was only five miles from the center of Germiston, the biggest railway junction in the country, only ten miles from Johannesburg, the largest city in the Union of South Africa, and just five miles from Jan Smuts International Airport. However, certain technical difficulties experienced by the township company from whom the ground was purchased delayed the building program and it was only toward the end of March 1952 that the move was finally made.

To appreciate what a great change this was for the Bethel family, it is necessary to consider what conditions were like before the change. The brothers who worked in the office and factory in Cape Town did not live together as a Bethel family. In fact, the expression “Bethel” was rarely used in connection with the Cape Town branch; it was usually referred to as “the office.” Brother and Sister Phillips lived in a little flat, while the other members of the family were accommodated with various publishers throughout the Cape Peninsula. Some brothers had to travel ten miles by train to and from work daily, while others traveled by bus or walked. Each one had breakfast where he stayed. If his accommodations were close enough he might rush home for a midday meal. Those who could not go home would be given one shilling and six pence extra each day to have something at a café. For the evening meal everyone went home. They never had a Bethel family study of the Watchtower magazine.

Every morning the family met at 7:45 in the change room of the little factory. After a discussion of the day’s text and prayer, they commenced work at 8:00 a.m. In order to get to this discussion in time some members had to rise before six o’clock and start traveling soon after.

The new branch structure at Elandsfontein was one of the first buildings in the township, Activia Park. It was a two-story building with 21,103 square feet of floor space. On the ground floor was an office, factory, a shipping department, laundry and boiler room. The family lived in twenty-two comfortable rooms. Additionally, there was a kitchen, a dining room and a library upstairs for the convenience of the family.

Much additional printing equipment was installed at the new factory. A large new flatbed G.M.A. printing press came from Sweden, and this could take a sheet of paper four times the size of that previously used in Cape Town. An additional linotype machine, large cutter and stitching machine were installed. It now became possible to print The Watchtower in African languages. The Zulu Watchtower, you will recall, was previously prepared on a duplicating machine. When the new press and equipment went into operation, The Watchtower was printed in eight languages and Awake! in three, besides twelve issues of Kingdom Ministry in eight languages.

WORKING ISOLATED TERRITORY

The year 1952 proved to be a time for consolidating the organization and strengthening the brothers. The branch also worked out an unassigned territory campaign. The brothers and sisters spent thousands of hours visiting people in about 400 villages and towns where no regular work was being done by any congregation of Witnesses. As a result, more than 10,000 names of interested ones were sent to the branch office and each one subsequently received a special letter and sample magazines from the Society.

One congregation of about twenty Africans had difficulty getting accommodations when they reached previously unassigned territory. A farmer was not prepared to put them up without their showing a permit from the police. The police station was far away and it was late. Some of the farmer’s employees then took the Witnesses to a minister of the First Church of Christ living near the farm. He refused to assist and was extremely unkind. One of the flock sympathized, condemning the attitude of the minister, and took the Witnesses to a nearby empty house. Hardly had they settled in when the police arrived. The European policeman was very considerate and even gave encouragement after he had been shown the territory assignment card. It was the clergyman who had called the police. The following_ morning, however, the clergyman showed a complete change of attitude, apologized for his behavior the night before and offered his church for the public meeting. He invited his “flock” to the meeting. The result was an attendance of 80 (60 were strangers). All stayed for the Watchtower magazine study afterward. And the clergyman was among those who obtained literature that day. During each of two later visits, the minister offered his church for the public talk. He attended not only the talk but also the Watchtower magazine study held afterward. As a result of the work done there, instead of having only one publisher active in the area eventually there were seven.

A BENEFICIAL VISIT

For the first time in the history of the work in South Africa the total of publishers went over the 10,000 mark in 1952. That year was certainly an eventful one for the development of the Kingdom work in South Africa. To crown the year, Brothers Knorr and Henschel paid a visit to the country in November. Brother Knorr was very happy to see the fine two-story brick and stucco branch building on a nice plot of well-situated land. What a difference he found this time from the small office in Cape Town with no living quarters! He enjoyed a tour of the building and meeting all the members of the family.

A few days later Brother Knorr, along with Brother Phillips, paid a visit to Durban, that fine modern city on the shores of the Indian Ocean. He had to give his talks in three different places, in accordance with local segregation regulations. At the Colored meeting he was happy to see fifteen Indians present and took the opportunity to speak to some of them after the meeting. There is a very large Indian population in Durban and the Kingdom message was just then beginning to break through to them.

The African meeting in Durban was held in Lamontville, a new township on the southern side of the city. The singing of the Zulu brothers at that meeting deeply impressed Brother Knorr. That meeting was held on Sunday afternoon, and in the evening a meeting was held for the European brothers, with 435 present at a hall in the center of the city.

Soon after returning to Johannesburg, Brother Knorr made a call at the office of the British High Commissioner for Basutoland, Bechuanaland and Swaziland. This was in connection with a ban on the importation of the Society’s literature into those three protectorates since the year 1941. Since at the time of Brother Knorr’s visit, there were more than 400 Witnesses engaged in spreading the good news in those territories, the Society was making repeated attempts to have the ban lifted. Brother Knorr was able to speak with the chief secretary of the commissioner, answer all his questions, and present a clear picture of the fine educational work being done by Jehovah’s witnesses. However, the ban continued for several years after that.

By this time Brother Henschel had arrived and an encouraging meeting was held at the Germiston Town Hall, arranged by the Germiston European congregation. Many of the brothers on the Reef came, so that the total attendance was 725.

On December 8, Brother Knorr and Brother Phillips flew to Windhoek, the capital of South-West Africa. The three missionaries there were very happy to see them and to hold their very first assembly in that country. There were about ten at the regular sessions and a peak of 25 at the public meeting.

Back at the Elandsfontein branch, Brothers Knorr and Henschel gave attention to many matters pertaining to the organizing of the work and the problems that had to be handled. The Society’s president was able to help the branch on points that would affect the work for years to come. He also met the traveling servants from the field and gave them much counsel and encouragement.

An assembly was held December 11-14, and was the climax of the visit of Brothers Knorr and Henschel. In Johannesburg, we had succeeded in getting permission to have all three ethnic groups in the one stadium, although sitting in different sections. For all the African brothers to be able to attend from all parts of South Africa and the protectorates, a tremendous amount of work had been necessary to obtain individual passes and permits for those over sixteen years of age. Owing to the language difficulty, there were three addresses of welcome given, first in English, then in Afrikaans and finally in Zulu. The European brothers enjoyed listening to that talk in the Zulu language, with its fascinating clicks, and at the end of it they applauded as heartily as the Zulu brothers!

One of the points that Brother Knorr stressed when he spoke to the African brothers was the need for them to learn to read and write so that they could have a better knowledge of the truth and be more efficient preachers in the field. Unfortunately there was a lot of rain during the four days of the assembly. In fact, at one stage, the weather was so bad that the platform itself had to be abandoned. In spite of this, the assembly was a great success and 339 people of all races were baptized. Saturday evening the attendance went up to 5,441 and for the public talk it was 7,267. The South African brothers all went home happy and grateful for the fine counsel received and determined to press on in the Kingdom work in South Africa.

By late in 1952, the average of publishers of all the countries that had been or were still under the South Africa branch totaled up to 50,087. What a stupendous increase in the twenty-one years since 1931 and that “tiny band” of 100 publishers then!

NEW WORLD SOCIETY ASSEMBLIES

Following the New World Society Assembly held at Yankee Stadium in 1953, nine assemblies were arranged for South Africa​—one European national assembly and eight African and Colored district assemblies. At these, the brothers enjoyed the same program, as the key talks given at New York were also presented in South Africa. For the first time lapel badges were introduced here, and this has since been a regular feature of all district and national assemblies of Jehovah’s witnesses in South Africa. These badges make it easier to get acquainted and they promote a happy, friendly atmosphere among the brothers. Those nine assemblies were all well attended, with a grand total of 11,000 at the public talk “After Armageddon​—God’s New World,” and 634 were immersed.

NEW FILM AN EYE-OPENER

When the Society’s 16-mm full-length film “the New World Society in Action” began to be shown in 1955 the brothers began to realize what a tremendous amount of work was needed to produce the publications they used. The film took the viewer on a tour of the Brooklyn Bethel home, the Society’s factory and Gilead School. This film had a tremendous impact on the brothers and greatly enhanced their appreciation of the organization. It made them realize that the brothers at the Elandsfontein Bethel too were working hard to provide the literature in different languages, especially as new ones were being added, such as the Xhosa Watchtower magazine, in August 1955.

The film also did much to break down prejudice against Jehovah’s witnesses. In some of the African areas, where it usually was difficult for European district overseers to gain entry, permission was readily granted to show the film. The district overseers carried electric generators with them and this enabled them to show the film in many isolated areas where there was no electricity. To many Africans this was the first screen production they had ever seen and some aspects of it amazed them. One little African boy, for example, was very impressed by a scene of a railway train hurtling off in a certain direction. He wondered about this and the following day he asked the farmer on whose land he lived, when this train would be coming back!

At a small circuit assembly of Colored brothers, 200 packed out the hall. It was a warm summer evening and the film was to be shown in the large open courtyard at the back of the hall. Since it was still too bright to start showing the film, the brothers began to sing Kingdom songs. The public was soon attracted by the beautiful singing and in no time 650 had assembled in the courtyard. They were most appreciative of the film.

A RETURN VISITOR FROM BROOKLYN

In October 1955 Milton G. Henschel revisited South Africa. At first it seemed as if he would not be able to attend our assembly, as the Department of the Interior, after having issued a visa for him, later canceled it. Just the day before he was due to arrive, the necessary visa was reissued, but with the reservation that no public speeches would be permitted. In great haste, several brothers at Bethel were assigned to prepare talks and stand in for Brother Henschel, if necessary. However, when Brother Henschel arrived, he had an interview with the Secretary for the Interior, was given the “green light” and everything went forward as originally planned. This decision brought great joy to all the brothers and a sigh of relief from the few hard-pressed Bethel brothers who had been hastily preparing talks to substitute for Brother Henschel.

All three racial groups again had the privilege of meeting at Wembley Stadium, as in 1952, but still observing the law by sitting in segregated groups. How the brothers were thrilled to hear the keynote address by Brother Henschel, assuring them that they were being led in a triumphal procession by their King, Jesus Christ​—a sweet-smelling odor to Jehovah although a stench to the enemy! A total of 10,754 attended the public talk “World Conquest Soon​—by God’s Kingdom, and 407 symbolized their dedication by immersion. The assembly was further climaxed on Sunday when all the new releases were made available that day, as they had arrived in Johannesburg only late on Saturday night.

DIVINE WILL ASSEMBLIES

The eyes of all the Witnesses in South Africa were focused on the Divine Will International Assembly of Jehovah’s Witnesses in New York, July 27 to August 3, 1958. What a thrilling experience it was for 123 brothers and sisters from South Africa to fly together as a party to London and then on to New York!

In South Africa a series of thirteen Divine Will District Assemblies were held to follow up the international assembly in New York, and at these, new publications were released for the South African field. Among these was the book From Paradise Lost to Paradise Regained. It has proved an outstanding help for brothers when conducting their family Bible studies and helping their children to gain Bible knowledge.

In October 1958 the brothers in South Africa heard that their African brothers in Malawi had experienced a disaster. A terrible fire razed to the ground the huge structure they had built for accommodations at an assembly and they lost all their clothing and possessions. Within a few days the South African brothers lovingly collected and sent 3,000 pounds of clothing to their brothers in Malawi.

ANOTHER MEANINGFUL VISIT

The following year, 1959, Brother Knorr made another visit to South Africa and an assembly was arranged to coincide with his visit. Efforts were made to have a national assembly with all races together, similar to the ones held in 1952 and 1955. However, permission was refused by the governmental authorities and the branch had to arrange for two assemblies, held in different parts of Johannesburg. Special trains brought 1,600 brothers from Natal and Zululand. From all over the Union and the surrounding countries the brothers poured into Johannesburg. Much interest was aroused by the preliminary advertising, and hundreds of strangers attended the public meeting “A Paradise Earth Through God’s Kingdom,” and other sessions. The European meeting was attended by 4,541 at Wembley Stadium, while 12,648 Africans met at Orlando Communal Hall, where, the hall itself being too small, several large tents provided extra shelter. The total number of those who were baptized was 546.

When Bethel moved from Cape Town to Elandsfontein in 1952 there were 8,580 publishers, on the average, in the South African field; by 1959 the number had increased to 14,451. Bethel had become cramped and the family had outgrown its existing quarters. Prior to Brother Knorr’s arrival, plans for the extension of the Bethel and factory had been sent by the branch overseer to Brooklyn and approved by the Society’s president. Building work had commenced during his visit. This extension was a neat, handsome structure, bigger than the original building. Twenty-two bedrooms were added, as well as a Kingdom Hall for the Bethel family. The factory extension included a new machine shop, and other new equipment, but also allowed for plenty of storage space. All of this truly was needed, as the production figures show. During the first year after the new factory at Elandsfontein went into production, over 740,000 booklets and magazines were turned out. By 1959 the production figure for magazines alone was almost two million.

But how was the work progressing during this period in the other countries under the supervision of the South Africa branch? Let us consider the work in the three British protectorates, Basutoland, Swaziland and Bechuanaland.

OVERCOMING OBSTACLES IN BASUTOLAND

An obstacle for the average African in accepting the truth is the difficulty he has in breaking away from ancestor worship and witchcraft. Although many people in Basutoland claim to be Christians, their clergy join with the people in making sacrifices to pacify the “spirits” of dead chiefs and forefathers. Clergy and laity alike use the services of witch doctors.

In 1953 a former principal of a Dutch Reformed Church mission school, Joshua Thongoana, was sent to Basutoland (now Lesotho) as a circuit overseer. He and his wife arrived there at a time when Basutoland was still notorious for ritual murders as part of their witchcraft, and it was rumored that foreigners were the targets of such murders. Brother Thongoana and his wife relied heavily on Jehovah, who proved to be a real protection to them. Also, they received much kindness and hospitality from the brothers.

In the Maluti mountains Brother Thongoana had to use a horse to travel from one isolated group to another. His first journey on horseback, from Mokhotlong to Bobete, took a whole day. When they arrived at their destination, the brothers who were used to riding on horseback were all right, but he was exhausted and his whole body ached so much that he could neither sit nor lie down. On their way back they had to cross the Orange River, which was in flood. His traveling companions told him what to expect; if the river was too strong for the horse, it would try to get rid of its rider so that it could swim across. He was terrified, as he was not a good rider. His horse walked into the water and his apprehension grew, but, fortunately, all the horses crossed safely.

Snow often falls in the Maluti mountains and this is followed by biting winds. When they awoke one morning, they saw that the whole area had been blanketed by snow and changed into a winter wonderland. As they walked to their territory, their feet sank into the snow; quite a new experience for them. They desperately needed fire to keep warm, but there was no wood or coal to be had. Nevertheless, they were cared for. When they felt they could not last much longer, an interested person kindly gave them enough dry cattle dung to make a fire.

Basutoland continued to make steady progress in the 1950’s. During 1953 this country had 67 publishers, on an average, and by 1959 this figure stood at 111​—an increase of 81 percent.

BAN LIFTED IN SWAZILAND

A situation similar to that in Basutoland existed in Swaziland, where the chiefs were generally favorably disposed to the Witnesses. Although the brothers in Swaziland continued to operate under ban, the sympathetic attitude of the paramount chief made it possible for them to distribute the literature as long as they exercised caution. Publishers would write their own name in each book placed with an interested person as evidence that they were not selling the literature but were simply loaning it to the interested persons.

In 1958, Dennis McDonald, a district overseer, visited the only dedicated sister at Goedgegun (now Nhlangano). This was the first visit that she had ever received from a representative of the Society. She booked the local courthouse for the public talk. Brother McDonald was a bit apprehensive about giving a public talk in a courthouse in a country where the Society’s literature was banned.

The sister’s husband, who had something to do with the local government, assured him that he would have “quite an audience.” That Sunday afternoon there was indeed “quite an audience,” including two Dutch Reformed ministers, an Anglican minister, the local magistrate, the local policeman, the superintendent of the C.I.D. and a few interested persons. Brother McDonald realized that these men were present for a purpose. The public talk was an exposé of Communism’s failure in contrast with the hope of God’s kingdom. The whole talk was recorded and sent to Mbabane, the capital, to be considered there. It was sometime after this that the ban on the Society’s publications was lifted, and it seems quite likely that this public talk had some bearing on the matter.

The showing of the Society’s film “The New World Society in Action” also helped to overcome prejudice. At one large compound the European manager wished to see the film before giving permission for it to be shown. A private showing was arranged, with seven present. The manager was very much impressed. He remarked: “This is different and most interesting. This is a very big organization and it is well organized too.” He was satisfied that Jehovah’s witnesses stand for clean worship and that they are not mixed up with politics or worldly affairs. He expressed thanks for having had the opportunity to see the film and told the district overseer: “You may show it in the compound hall tonight and I will tell the police boys to assist you.” There was an attendance of 902 that night in the compound hall.

During this period, Swaziland experienced a rapid growth in the number of proclaimers of the good news. The average grew from 126 in 1953 to 289 in 1959​—an increase of 129 percent.

PERSEVERANCE REWARDED IN BECHUANALAND

In 1956 Joshua Thongoana was assigned as a circuit overseer to Bechuanaland. Some of the local brothers had already been flogged by chiefs for preaching. The chief would charge the brothers with bringing another religion into the country, whereas Chief Khama had brought in only one religion, the London Missionary Society. One pioneer twice received lashes and his cattle were confiscated because of his preaching activities. But his cattle were returned when the chief saw his firm stand.

Two weeks after his arrival, Brother Thongoana was arrested along with two other brothers. At the kgotla (court) they were accused of bringing in another religion. The brothers were denied the opportunity to defend themselves, and those present at the kgotla demanded that they plead guilty. After many accusations were made against them by the chief and his kgotla Brother Thongoana was told to leave Bechuanaland the very next day, while each resident brother was sentenced to two months’ imprisonment. Brother Thongoana did leave that area, but instead of leaving the country, he went deeper into it. Later, he was happy to hear that the chief had changed his mind and given the local brothers suspended sentences.

During Brother Thongoana’s next visit, he again was arrested. Great interest was manifested in this kgotla. The local minister of the London Missionary Society was present and was asked by the chief to open the kgotla with prayer. Again Brother Thongoana was charged with bringing in another church, whereas they already had one. This kgotla allowed Brother Thongoana to defend himself, and he quoted many scriptures to show what he preached and why. The minister of the London Missionary Society did not use any scriptures; he did not even have a Bible. Some counselors persuaded the chief to discharge the brothers, and this time the kgotla ended in a theocratic victory.

Until the ban on the Society’s literature was lifted in 1959, many were arrested. However, the brothers stood firm for the truth. The 100 publishers in 1953 grew to 166 by 1959, which was indeed a splendid increase.

SPIRITUAL BENEFITS ENJOYED ON ST. HELENA

After Brother van Staden’s visit, the only regular contact the brothers on St. Helena had with Jehovah’s visible organization was through mail and the Society’s publications. It was therefore something outstanding for these brothers to have the circuit overseer and his wife visit them for a whole month during the 1955 service year. Twelve days were spent with each of the two congregations on the island and the month’s activity was rounded off with a circuit assembly. The attendance at the public meeting was 105 and three were immersed.

Spiritual benefits continued to flow to the brothers of St. Helena. During 1956 the film “The New World Society in Action” was shown eight times to audiences totaling over 1,000. This gave these isolated brothers wonderful insight into Jehovah’s worldwide organization. One man remarked: “I’m not ashamed to tell you, tears were running down my face and other boys were affected the same way,” Why? “To see how the brothers work together in love; if only we could work like that.”

In 1958 the film “Happiness of the New World Society” was shown eight times and attended by a total of 1,095. All who saw it were astonished to see the multitudes of people at the assemblies in all parts of the world.

However, since the first Kingdom seeds were sown in 1933, no publisher on St. Helena had ever been able personally to attend an overseas assembly. Now for the first time two brothers traveled all the way to New York for the Divine Will International Assembly in 1958. Due to poor transportation facilities, they were obliged to leave in May and were not able to return until November. But what a grand time they had in New York and what joy they brought to their brothers at home with all the good things they learned and experienced at that assembly!

MAKING PROGRESS ON MAURITIUS

By 1953 the congregation at Vacoas was making good progress and another congregation was already in formation at Port Louis. In accordance with the law, the missionaries had notified the police of their meetings and the commissioner of police had replied that they had no objection provided there was no religious controversy that might lead to a breach of the peace. However, the police were taking no chances, and so the first to arrive at the meeting were four detectives. It so happened that among the friends attending were a retired detective and several relatives of yet another detective. So the first meeting was almost like a policemen’s reunion! The officers seemed quite satisfied that Jehovah’s witnesses are a quiet, law-abiding people.

The progress in Mauritius continued in 1955, with the publishers reaching a peak of 30. Later that year Brother Milton Henschel paid a visit to Mauritius and a branch office of the Society was established there to look after the Kingdom interests on the three South Indian Ocean islands of Madagascar, La Réunion and Mauritius.

FRUITFUL EFFORTS ON MADAGASCAR

After the two pioneers from South Africa, Robert Nisbet and Bert McLuckie, visited Madagascar in 1933, there seems to have been a gap of twenty-two years during which nothing was done concerning the field there. In 1955 Milton Henschel and Robert Nisbet visited the island to establish the work under the guidance of the Society’s branch office in Mauritius. Soon special pioneers were sent out from France. They worked hard and were very successful, conducting many Bible studies. Before long, local publishers began to spread the good news of the Kingdom. In 1958 the first booklet was translated into the Malagasy language. The following year, arrangements were made to transfer supervision of the work to the branch office in France.

KINGDOM ACTIVITY BEGINS IN ANGOLA

It was in the year 1938 that the first Kingdom seed was sown in Angola. This area of about 481,000 square miles lies on the west coast of Africa between South-West Africa to the south, Zaïre in the north and Zambia to the east.

Two pioneers from Cape Town paid a visit there in 1938 and worked among the white population. In three months they placed 8,158 Bibles, books and booklets and aroused some interest. However, World War II broke out the following year and it was very difficult to maintain contact with the interested people.

Twelve years later, in 1950, an African pioneer was deported from Mozambique. He had had no trial, but was sent to the little Portuguese island of São Tomé on the equator off the west coast of Africa. This was included in the Angola field. Within six months there were thirteen others sharing with him in the witness work on this island.

Two years later this little group on São Tomé had grown to 21 publishers. São Tomé and the neighboring island of Principe are only 377 square miles in area and have a total population of 64,000. It is really a penal colony for Portuguese Africans who have to work as slaves on the rubber, banana and coffee plantations. So the little group of Kingdom publishers there had to carry on under difficulties, with no one to visit or encourage them. As yet, no publishers or organization for the Kingdom work existed in Angola.

However, during 1954, letters were received at the branch in South Africa from a small group of Africans at Baía dos Tigres, a penal settlement attached to a fishing station in the extreme south of Angola. The writer, João Mancoca, said in one of his letters: “The group of Jehovah’s witnesses in Angola is composed of 1,000 members. These have as their leader Simão Gonçalves Toco.” Behind this sensational statement there is a very interesting story.

In 1943 this Simão Toco was a leader of a choir attached to a Baptist mission in Léopoldville, Belgian Congo (Kinshasa, now called Zaïre). He was a capable and successful choirmaster and his group grew to many hundreds. Two booklets of the Watch Tower Society came into his possession and he read these with interest. Toco wrote to Brooklyn for more publications of the Society. Gradually, he introduced some Kingdom teachings into his songs or hymns (which he himself composed), and into discussions with his more intimate associates in his choir. However, followers of Simon Kimbangu, who practiced spiritism, infiltrated Toco’s study groups. In 1949 they felt the urge to go out and tell others and many of them went preaching in the city of Léopoldville. Before long, however, Toco and a large group of his followers were arrested and put in prison. While in prison, Toco stopped using the Society’s publications and even the Bible, and as they depended more on messages from spirit mediums, the truth was eclipsed by the spiritism of Kimbangu. Most of the group originated from Angola. So, after a few months in jail, those who steadfastly refused to give up following Toco were sent back to Luanda. There were about 1,000 of them.

Among those deported to Angola was João Mancoca, an intelligent and spiritually minded African. On the day of his trial he was charged with belonging to the “Watchtower movement” linked with Kimbanguism, a prohibited African sect. The judge tried to set him free, provided he would renounce his faith. Although Mancoca did not accept some of Toco’s interpretations, especially his practice of spiritism, he realized that there was some truth in what he got through Toco and he knew that he would lose this if he abandoned what he had accepted. He thus preferred imprisonment to giving up the little bit of truth he had. Portuguese authorities were undecided about the real origin of the group and what to do with them. They suspected them to be latent subversive elements; and yet the members seemed to be very harmless and sincere. Finally, they were dispersed in groups to many parts of Angola. Toco and many of his group were sent to the north of Angola to work on a coffee plantation. Mancoca, with another group, was in Luanda.

In Luanda, Mancoca tried to persuade them to use the Bible and to stop practicing spiritism. Together with Sala Ramos Filemon and Carlos Agostinho Cadi, Mancoca worked to make Bible truth prevail. An African, who had obtained our books “The Kingdom Is at Hand” and “The Truth Shall Make You Free” in French as schoolbooks for his son, found them to be unsuitable for this purpose and gave them to Mancoca. This thrilled him and his few companions who really appreciated the truth. Then Toco was sent south and on his way passed through Luanda. He was a confirmed spiritist by this time and prohibited the use of the Bible for his followers. Obviously, his “Kimbangu” followers had been a strong influence on him and turned him from God’s Word. Mancoca and his group, however, were dismayed at this and for three months they prayed intensely to Jehovah to open up the way for them to contact the Watch Tower Society.

Some of Toco’s followers did not like the truths Mancoca was teaching. So, they denounced this little group to the Portuguese authorities and falsely accused them of being authors of one of Toco’s false doctrines. As a result, Mancoca and his friends were imprisoned in a dark cell for twenty-one days. One of the guards “smuggled” in a typewriter and some candles. So, by candlelight they secretly made copies of the Society’s booklets in manuscript form. They were deported to the penal colony at Baía dos Tigres, with a four-year sentence that was extended to six years​—all on a false charge!

At Baía dos Tigres, Mancoca and his associates found some Tocoists, whom they encouraged to study the Bible, but without success. So, they dissociated themselves from this group. Mancoca then decided to translate some chapters of “The Truth Shall Make You Free” (which he had in French) into Kikongo, their own language. At this stage one of the Tocoists wrote a letter to the Salisbury branch of the Society and got a reply in Spanish, which he could not read. He then brought the letter to Mancoca. This gave Mancoca the Society’s address, and so Mancoca and his companions wrote in French to the Rhodesia branch, which letter was passed on to the South Africa branch. In this way this group at Baía dos Tigres corresponded with the branch for three months and also received some literature.

When news of this strange group reached Brooklyn, the brothers there soon arranged that an English missionary, John R. Cooke, who had already spent several years in Portugal and was fairly fluent in Portuguese, should go to Angola. Brother Cooke arrived in Angola on January 21, 1955. His first conversation was with a lawyer in Luanda, who advised John to be very careful, as the Toco group were considered to be “Mau-Mau” (terrorist) elements or Communist supported.

It was a strange feeling for Brother Cooke to walk the streets in towns like Luanda and Benguela, see members of this group with their distinctive star badges and wonder if these were prospective brothers or just camouflaged Communists! He spoke privately with a few of them in Lobito and Benguela, but apart from finding out that they had the Bible, knew the name Jehovah and held meetings frequently, he could not make any progress. There was a large group in Luanda. He spoke to them and had discussions with their committee. But these men were followers of Toco and not really interested in the Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society. An exception was a young man named Antonio Bizi, who greatly appreciated Brother Cooke’s visits and helped others to subscribe for the Society’s magazines.

After Brother Cooke reported his first impressions to the Elandsfontein branch in South Africa, he received instructions to try contacting Mancoca and his friends in Baía dos Tigres. But Baía dos Tigres is a small fishing station on a sandy desert coast in the extreme south of Angola. It has very little contact with the outside world and is under strict government supervision, being, in fact, a penal colony. John Cooke remembers puzzling over the problem a long time. He took the matter to Jehovah in prayer. Finally, he wrote a letter to the Governor-General in Luanda explaining his mission and asking for an interview. After three anxious weeks, he was called to see Senhor Santana Godinho, the chief assistant of the governor in administration. During the long conversation this gentleman plied Brother Cooke with many questions about the work and beliefs of Jehovah’s witnesses. Finally, he agreed that Brother Cooke could make the trip to Baía dos Tigres. He then staggered him by saying: “In fact, we will give you a free return ticket by plane!” This was a trip of 1,200 miles!

A few days later, a little six-seater plane circled over the small sun-drenched settlement of Baía dos Tigres and then landed on the concrete strip built on the sand. John Cooke climbed out with a few other passengers. After some difficulties, Brother Cooke had his first meeting with the little group. This was Mancoca’s big day. For this he had prayed and waited for years​—personal contact at last with the Society that taught the truth! He dressed up in his best and read a long paper of welcome to the Society’s representative. How pleased Brother Cooke was to find sheeplike ones so anxious to know about the Kingdom’. He spent every evening with these humble, sincere Africans, discussing God’s Word and telling them about the work. They showed him a thick exercise book. It consisted of the booklets The Kingdom, the Hope of the World and The Last Days, translated into their language, Kikongo. Made years before and written out by hand, this volume had been used for a long time as one of their main textbooks. Brother Cooke was surprised to find that they already had quite a good grasp of the truth by having read the publications received from Elandsfontein.

Meanwhile Brother Cooke was lodging at the local lighthouse with the keeper. He showed interest and subscribed for both magazines and ordered a Bible. He then said: “Senhor Cooke, you spend all your time with the Africans. What about us whites? Why not arrange a meeting for us?” This was done, and on the Sunday when a public talk was held in one of the smelly fish-meal factories there was an audience of 80​—10 whites and 70 blacks. This was the first public meeting in Angola! The next day Brother Cooke left on the weekly flight with very warm impressions of the little group, and a letter addressed to Toco groups explaining who he was and encouraging them to accept him as the representative of the Society. With this he hoped to gain a better hearing from the various groups.

Brother Mancoca recalls this visit of Brother Cooke, saying: “I had no more doubt that this was the true organization which has God’s support. I had never thought or believed that any other religious organization would do such a thing: without payment, send a missionary from far to visit an insignificant person just because he wrote a letter.”

But back in Luanda, the local Toco committee were not impressed with Mancoca’s letter. “Who is he to tell us what to do? Now, if Toco were to give you a letter like that, then it would be different.” So the decision was made to try to visit Toco himself.

A report was sent in to Senhor Santana Godinho briefly explaining what had happened on the trip and John Cooke’s impressions of the ones he met. He was soon called up for another interview. Santana Godinho expressed appreciation for the report. He explained that, although the official opinion about Toco’s sect was that it was really subversive, he and others had doubts about that view. So, they were glad to have someone who could get among them and find out. He then made another surprising offer. “Now, where else would you like to go, Senhor Cooke? Just say what you want and we’ll give you your return ticket free of charge!” John made a request to see Toco, located in the “bush” near Sá de Bandeira, a medium-sized town in the south-central part of Angola. This was granted.

Shortly thereafter, Brother Cooke had two long interviews with Toco in the presence of a government official. Toco, a tall, intelligent man, still quite young, said he was glad to meet someone from the Watch Tower Society. He and Brother Cooke discussed Scriptural matters and the formation of the group, and then he also wrote a letter addressed to all his followers in Angola, telling them that Mr. Cooke represented the Watch Tower Society from which he received literature. After a few interesting local excursions as a guest of the Governor, Brother Cooke returned to Luanda thinking that perhaps now this group of 1,000 would more readily accept the truth.

But back in Luanda the local Toco committee would have nothing of it. They were running the “show” and no one else was going to take over. At least that was the attitude of the local leader, David Dongala, although many individuals showed good interest. However, the time spent in Luanda was not wasted. Brother Cooke did much witnessing and had a wonderful time, obtaining as many as twenty-two subscriptions in one day. Also, he was just beginning to have Bible studies with one or two white families and members of the Toco group.

After an uneventful plane trip to Cela, a new agricultural colony, the situation changed drastically. Santana Godinho lost his position as a government administrator. He had proved a real help to Brother Cooke in his difficult assignment and was very friendly. Now there were no more free trips, and a request to extend the five-month visa was refused. Brother Cooke left in June 1955, feeling very grateful to Jehovah for the help given and for the privilege of making important contacts and sowing much good seed in a “virgin” territory.

Kingdom activity had made a start and although opposition and persecution nearly stifled the newborn field, by Jehovah’s undeserved kindness and the steadfast loyalty of the new brothers, it kept growing.

COURAGEOUS EFFORTS CONTINUE

In June 1956, Mancoca and seven other new brothers in Baía dos Tigres had the courage and initiative to write a letter to the governor of the District of Moçâmedes, where Baía dos Tigres was located. This, in part, is what they said: ‘We most respectfully request your Excellency the favor of recognizing us as effective members of the Society of Jehovah’s witnesses.’ The brothers appealed for more freedom of worship, but the only answer they got was more oppression. In spite of this, ten of them were baptized in 1956.

Meanwhile, on the island of São Tomé, several brothers had completed their detention terms of seven years. Those released and sent back to Mozambique included the former presiding overseer.

THE LIGHT IS NOT DIMMED

The light of truth was shining in Angola, and despite hardships it would not be dimmed. Moreover, the European field was to benefit from that light.

On October 26, 1956, Mervyn Passlow, and his wife, Aurora, landed in Luanda to follow up the work started by John Cooke. Brother Cooke had sent the Passlows his list of subscribers and interested ones in Luanda. But all the subscribers’ addresses were box numbers, for no mail is delivered to private homes; so for a while they failed to find these people. Then came a letter from Brother Britten, branch overseer in Lisbon, telling them that a very interested woman named Berta Teixeira was returning to Luanda. She was very surprised when the Passlows called to see her immediately after her arrival. No time was lost in starting a Bible study with her and her family. She was also able to help with the addresses of subscribers, since she had a relative working in the Post Office. A good number of the subscribers became very willing students. Within weeks all of these were talking to their friends and neighbors. The Passlows were invited out every evening and many afternoons to visit these people; within six months studies were being conducted with over fifty people.

Not long after their arrival, the Passlows also began to receive letters from African brothers and interested ones in different parts of Angola. Brother Mancoca, though still under detention in Baía dos Tigres, wrote letters of encouragement to the Passlows. Local African brothers needing spiritual assistance also visited them. Owing to the situation and his being a foreigner, Brother Passlow never went to their meetings. But Antonio Bizi, who showed such interest when Brother Cooke was there, used to visit them regularly for Bible study and training so that he, in turn, could assist the other African brothers. The Africans also obtained much literature, and much of it was taken into the interior.

A couple of months after the Passlows arrived, they began holding regular Watchtower magazine studies in their room. But by the end of the first month the room was too small. Then Sister Teixeira, who ran a language school, offered one of the inner schoolrooms in her college. Since her classes went on until 9 p.m., all the weekly meetings had to begin after 9 p.m. In this way they would attract less attention.

Correspondence continued to come from all over Angola. The writers were Africans, all claiming to be brothers. But by that time the war was on in Angola and it was not possible to contact these people.

Soon after this, a study was started with Senhor Vieira Gonçalves and his wife. He had studied for the priesthood for six years, but became so shocked with the young student priests and their conduct that he quit before actually becoming a priest. He made rapid progress and lost no time in coming to meetings and starting to speak to his friends. By the end of two months he was already conducting a study with another family.

After eight months in Luanda, Brother Passlow decided it was time to have a baptism, as several had expressed a desire to symbolize their dedication. How surprised and delighted they were when a brother from Portugal arrived that day​—Brother Henrique Vieira, en route for South Africa! So, before the baptism, Brother Vieira gave a talk, told some experiences and then performed the baptism in the bay at Luanda.

Soon after this, Brother Passlow failed to get an extension of his visa. He promptly invited Brother Gonçalves to start taking over the care of the little group. This faithful brother, although just a babe in the truth when he took over, carried on for about nine years until he too was arrested, put in prison and finally deported to Portugal.

Brother Passlow had acted just in time. A few days later a van of the secret police suddenly pulled up beside the Passlows when they were on business in the city, and six policemen poured out and surrounded them as if they were desperate criminals. They were taken to their room and many of their belongings were confiscated including Aurora’s cooking recipes, seemingly on the grounds that they contained secret messages! As the police carried out their stock of Bibles, Brother Passlow commented: “I hope you read them.” The man replied: “Do they have anything to say about football?”​—at which they all laughed. The police knew quite well that they were acting merely as pawns for the bishop of Luanda. The Passlows found out later that an interested person had told the bishop about all the good things she had been learning.

An appeal to the British Consul, a devout Catholic, was turned down. Then the police commissioner called the Passlows to his office. He told them that they must leave within the week. From his remarks, it became obvious that he was linking the Passlows with the infamous “Watchtower movement” of central Africa. To reason with him was hopeless.

On June 27, 1957, the Passlows embarked for South Africa. Owing to the attitude of the police, they warned the brothers, especially the African brothers, not to come to see them off. But the bond of love was too great. Police or no police, the brothers, including many Africans, were there to say ‘Adeus’ (Good-bye)! Just before their going up the gangway one of these African brothers who had just before been released from Baía dos Tigres came up close, pressed an envelope into Brother Passlow’s hand and then disappeared into the crowd. The envelope contained a parting gift of money, with the message: “To buy some bread.” As the ship slowly slipped away, the Passlows felt deep gratitude for the indescribable joy of helping some to come to know our God Jehovah.

Some time later, the Passlows heard that on the following day the radio announced that the country had just gotten rid of a great danger in the form of a foreign couple who had been trying to establish Communist and “Mau-Mau” activities, “but, thanks be to our God, that danger has now been eliminated!” Months later, when the terrorist fighting really became fierce, the Angolan press falsely publicized that Watchtower missionaries had influenced the Africans to engage in terrorist activities. There were even photographs supposedly showing missionaries giving away American dollars to Africans to turn them against the white authorities!

It is true that missionaries of Christendom and religious leaders had a lot to do with the terrorist activity in Angola. But not Jehovah’s witnesses! Thanks to Jehovah’s undeserved kindness, Watchtower missionaries had been able to get into the country. In spite of many problems and opposition, it had been possible to establish a small organization of 54 brothers who were determined to stand firm and let the light of truth shine in Angola.

Following all the excitement caused by the departure of Brother and Sister Passlow, the brothers carried on quietly and faithfully. They lacked someone mature to instruct them, but meetings were held and preaching was carried on as well as the brothers could under the difficult circumstances.

During 1958, Harry Arnott, the zone overseer, made a brief visit, which was a source of great encouragement to both Africans and Europeans. In 1959 he was again in Luanda as zone overseer. On arrival at the airport, just as he was meeting a little group of brothers, the police suddenly appeared and arrested them all. Brother Arnott was separated from the others for questioning. His briefcase was searched minutely. He prayed to Jehovah that the list of Watchtower magazine subscribers in the city of Luanda would not fall into the hands of the police. That precious list was in Brother Arnott’s ticket holder. Although the Interpol chief looked at the ticket, he did not see the list. After a lot of questions, the chief said: “Mr. Arnott, just remember: As far as Angola is concerned you are finished, finished, finished, and the Watchtower organization is finished, finished, finished!”

A little later he was taken to another building where the other brothers were, among them Brother Mancoca. The Interpol officer turned to Brother Mancoca, abused him and said: “You know what is going to happen to you?” Brother Mancoca just looked his persecutor right in the eyes and said: “I have endured much already, so all that you can do more than that is to kill me, but I will not turn away from my faith.” He then looked across to Brother Arnott and smiled encouragingly. Brother Arnott says: “He seemed quite oblivious of his own predicament and was only concerned with ensuring that I myself was not discouraged by the situation. It was a most uplifting moment to see this African brother, after years of imprisonment, take such a firm and courageous stand.”

Brother Arnott was put back on the plane and had to leave the country immediately. Meanwhile, the police had found out that the congregation met in the home of Sister Teixeira. So, some of them went there immediately to make an inspection. They searched, but failed to open a door on the ground floor, behind which some fifty brothers and interested people were waiting patiently for Brother Arnott to come and give them his talk.

On that occasion no real harm befell those brothers who had met Brother Arnott, not even Mancoca. He was kept for seven hours of questioning, during which time the inspector actually made out an official order sending him to prison. But at the end the inspector tore it up and said to Brother Mancoca: “Go away, Mancoca, and be careful. Tomorrow bring me all the literature of the Watch Tower which you have in your house. . . . Just give up this Watch Tower business and look after yourself and your children.”

This episode meant making changes in the meeting place for the little congregation and after that the Africans began to organize on their own. However, the local organization was still very small. For 1960 the peak number of publishers reporting was only 17. It was at that time that Angola came under the jurisdiction of the Watch Tower Society’s office in Lisbon, Portugal.

The following year, 1961, terrorist activity broke out in Angola and also intense persecution was unleashed against the brothers. For the next nine years Brother Mancoca was in various prisons and work camps. His experiences were very many and varied but everywhere he went he faced up to persecution with calm determination and absolute reliance on Jehovah. He also witnessed wherever he went and was successful in helping many Africans into the truth while he was in prison.

Again, in 1971, a large number of brothers were arrested and put in prison in Luanda, including, once again, our selfless and devoted brother Mancoca. But the efforts of the enemy are puny in comparison with the invincible purposes and unlimited power of Jehovah. Nothing, absolutely nothing, can stop his message of the Kingdom from being preached in all the inhabited earth, including Angola.

READY FOR EXPANSION

The beginning of 1960 found the Elandsfontein Bethel all geared for real expansion. Jehovah foresaw and provided for the needs of the field in the decade to follow. The enlarged factory now had five linotype machines in use instead of three, and a year later another one was installed. A new Heidelberg platen press and a new Timson rotary press, the latter costing over R37,000, were installed in addition to the G.M.A. flatbed press already in use.

In 1960, the Elandsfontein factory started printing a number of the vernacular magazines semimonthly and in color, instead of just monthly and in black and white. A new monthly magazine was added, namely, The Watchtower in Tswana. Printing of a special Cibemba edition for Congo (Kinshasa) was started in May 1965. The full title of the regular Cibemba edition is Ulupungu lwa kwa Kalinda. But because of the prejudice in the Congo against the name “Watchtower,” the title of this special edition was just Kalinda (meaning “watching” or “to watch”). In 1966 another South African vernacular issue of The Watchtower, in Sepedi, was added to the printing list. So by 1970 the factory was printing 24 issues of The Watchtower and Awake! in 10 languages, and 15 different issues of Kingdom Ministry. Apart from this, the factory was also kept busy with the printing of a number of booklets in the vernacular languages and a “mountain” of forms, programs, leaflets and posters.

In 1960 the ban on the Society’s literature was lifted in the three protectorates, Basutoland, Bechuanaland and Swaziland. Thus this spiritual food could flow freely to them. But how were the brothers doing in these countries?

BLESSINGS AMID HARDSHIPS IN BASUTOLAND

The brothers in Basutoland (now Lesotho) really appreciated the semimonthly Molula-Qhooa (the Sesotho Watchtower magazine). This was reflected by their attendance at their Watchtower magazine studies. In 1960 there was a band of 135 publishers and 15 pioneers taking care of the spiritual needs of a population of 634,000 in this country, and pushing ahead in the face of many difficulties.

By this time the “winds of change” had reached this small British protectorate, stirring up the spirit of nationalism and the desire for independence, which was further fanned by the measure of self-government they obtained in 1960. Civil service was being “Africanized,” with Africans taking over from Europeans. Many felt that “self-rule” and “independence” were the magic passwords to freedom and prosperity. But Jehovah’s witnesses continued to point to God’s kingdom as man’s only real hope.

Most of the people in, Basutoland live in scattered villages, called “kraals,” in the mountains, some so high up that they can only be reached on foot or by pony. In some cases, it took the circuit overseer five to six days to reach isolated groups.

The pioneers did a wonderful work in spreading the good news of the Kingdom in the isolated nooks and corners of Basutoland. One special pioneer couple was assigned to the area of Mokhotlong, right on the “roof of southern Africa,” at an altitude of 10,500 feet in the Drakensberg range. The husband, Philemon Mafereka, had to cross several mountains just to go to conduct one study. Starting at 4 a.m. and walking fast, he would get there by 8:30 a.m. He usually came home that same evening and went in another direction the next day. Their efforts were richly blessed, for within two years he and his wife had ten others sharing with them in the Kingdom work.

Yes, in Basutoland the publishers of the good news often walk two or three hours to their territory and then spend up to six hours at a time witnessing. It is not practical to return for a meal halfway through the day, and so they have learned to work through the day and return in the early evening to cook and eat. Because of the distances between the villages, one may reach only six houses during six hours of work. But these people, too, need to hear God’s Word.

The brothers living in such isolation certainly appreciate the importance of assemblies. But attending assemblies requires great effort and these brothers are real examples to us. One special pioneer walked for four days, crossing mountains and swimming flooded rivers, to get to an assembly of Jehovah’s people. A sister rode alone on horseback for three days, then traveled a full day by bus to get to an assembly. And another sister, six months pregnant, walked twenty-five miles through mountains and snow to get to a circuit assembly. Even a newly dedicated brother walked more than eighty miles through the mountains, with the special pioneer who had helped him, to get to an assembly where he could symbolize his dedication.

Some new ones have had to get their marital affairs in order before they could share in the preaching work and qualify for baptism. In one case, the European district overseer drove into the mountains the week before an assembly and brought a man and his “wife,” who already had three children, to the nearest district commissioner so that their marriage could be registered, qualifying them for baptism at the circuit assembly.

MAINTAINING NEUTRALITY

In 1966 Basutoland became the independent state now known as Lesotho. At that time there were 266 Kingdom publishers, and these, because of their absolutely neutral stand, had won the respect of many in authority. But during a district assembly at Maseru, the capital, a police officer and three jeeploads of policemen charged into the hall, ordering that the meeting be stopped. The brothers in charge could not see the chief of police until the next morning. However, he was acquainted with the Witnesses and soon dismissed the false charge that someone was supposed to have said from the platform that the Lesotho government should be destroyed. The same officer who stopped the meeting was then instructed to provide guards for the assembly to protect the Witnesses! Of course, they had nothing to do, and the brothers took the opportunity to give each one a thorough witness.

The brothers’ strict Christian neutrality in Lesotho proved to be a real protection for them during a period of political unrest and a state of emergency. During this time a great purge was on against those who were not supporters of the government of Headman Jonathan. It was reported that at night the grass-roofed huts of members of the opposition were barricaded and set on fire, burning whole families to death. Not one of Jehovah’s witnesses suffered this fate.

As a result of the neutral stand maintained by true Christians, however, some hardship did come upon them. In 1970 Lesotho experienced a severe food shortage due to years of drought. However, during 1970 they had good rains, but it was decided that only supporters of the government would be given seed maize. Because Jehovah’s witnesses are neutral, they could not obtain any. The brothers in the Republic of South Africa heard about this and arranged for a relief fund to help their brothers in Lesotho. This was announced at the “kickoff” meetings for the national assemblies in Johannesburg and it was suggested that all the donations in the boxes at these meetings go for the relief fund. The response of the brothers was overwhelming​—Rl,714 was contributed and the contributions kept streaming in. In fact, the office had to send out a circular telling the brothers that they had given “enough.” Within a week a European brother in the Orange Free State obtained the needed seed maize and took it through to our brothers in Lesotho. All the needy ones also were provided with cash to buy food until they could supply their own needs. This made the brothers in Lesotho realize more than ever how much their European and other brothers in South Africa care for them and it made them feel even closer to them.

One of the sisters from Lesotho who benefited from this loving arrangement later said: “We reached the point where we had nothing in our house, not even ten cents to buy some mealie meal [cornmeal]. Then the money for food arrived from our white brothers in South Africa. I could only cry and not say anything. The other Witnesses and I were able to overcome our immediate problems, and so, through Jehovah’s provision, we are able to be at this assembly to enjoy also a spiritual feast.”

NOTABLE MILESTONES

At the time when Jehovah’s organization was providing relief from material famine in Lesotho, Jehovah also provided a wonderful spiritual dish for those hungering for the truth. This was in the form of the book The Truth That Leads to Eternal Life in Sesotho, which arrived about the middle of 1970. With this wonderful aid and the six-month study program, growth was seen. A milestone had been reached in Christian activity.

The year 1972 saw another noteworthy milestone in the development of the work in Lesotho​—the erection of the first real Kingdom Hall in this country. The need for a Kingdom Hall in Maseru, the capital, had become evident when the average attendance at the Watchtower study rose to 170, with attendances often over 200. Sandstone, freely available from the nearby mountains at the cost of fetching it, was used for the walls, the stone being hewn into the desired shapes by experienced brothers.

Everybody helped with the building. Apart from providing meals for the builders, the sisters, in traditional style, carried jars of water on their heads for as much as two miles to the building site. Children helped by rolling drums of water to the site and some elderly brothers walked up to twenty miles to have a share in the building work. To stamp down the ground in preparation for the pouring of the concrete floor slab, the sisters sang Kingdom songs and danced to the rhythm of these on the floor area. Today the brothers are happy for the use of a Kingdom Hall that can seat about 250 persons​—a sturdy structure that cost only about $845 to erect!

As in other developing African countries, nationalism sometimes presents difficulties at school for the children and elsewhere for the brothers in general. Recently, for instance, violence erupted on the day that our district assembly ended. On returning home, a new brother, who had formerly belonged to the political party that started the uprising, found soldiers and the local court waiting for him. The question was, What had he been doing during the rebellion? He told them that he had attended the assembly of Jehovah’s witnesses. But that was not enough. They wanted proof. With soldiers accompanying him, the brother was permitted to get his assembly program. After the entire program was read, the chief declared the brother innocent and even encouraged him to continue his preaching activity. The villagers marveled at this, saying: “The God to whom you are praying is the living God!” How grateful this brother was for having attended the assembly!

The latest peak of publishers in Lesotho is 688 and the work continues to move ahead under the blessing of Jehovah. Yet, with one publisher for every 1,477 of the population, it is evident that much remains to be done and our constant prayer is that Jehovah will speed up the work in his own time and way.

BAN LIFTED IN BECHUANALAND

In Bechuanaland (now Botswana) news of the lifting of the ban in 1960 was slow in reaching some parts of this vast country. Some of the chiefs were still making it difficult for the brothers in their areas.

One of the European district overseers from South Africa, Dennis McDonald, had an interview with the brother of the paramount chief, Seretsi Khama, to explain our work. He gave Brother McDonald four signed copies of a letter stating that our work should not be hampered. This helped considerably to change the attitude of the chiefs and made things easier for the brothers.

In the early 1960’s the majority of the congregations and isolated groups were along the railway line. Hardly anything had been done in the interior, except at Shakawe and Maun in the northwest. Brother B. Mchiswe, a special pioneer, worked for some time in Maun. He stuck to his assignment even though food was scarce and for a whole year he ate nothing but mealie-meal porridge (maize porridge) without sugar or milk. This brother made good use of the Watchtower magazine in Tswana, built up a route and delivered each new issue as it arrived. A preacher in the London Mission who enjoyed the magazine even held it up in the church and exhorted his audience: “If you see the man of the Watch Tower with this magazine, you must take it and read it.” So some came to the pioneer’s house for their copies, and he started studying with them.

In a little isolated group at Shakawe, northwest of Maun, and way out in the Kalahari Desert, none had been baptized because they could not attend an assembly and the local queen or chieftainess had prevented the circuit overseer from visiting the group. So they all cooperated and paid for one of their number to attend the assembly at Mahalapye, almost 700 miles away, where he was baptized.

CIRCUIT WORK

Can you imagine what is involved for a circuit overseer to visit these isolated brothers? It means traveling no less than 600 miles on the back of a huge four-wheel-drive truck that can plow its way through the sand, riding day and night, in the heat of the day and the cold of the night. Sometimes Adam Mahlangu, the circuit overseer in 1964, spent up to ten days of his working month on the back of a truck so that he could visit these isolated ones.

Brother Mahlangu, who relates how wild and primitive it is in the northern parts, writes: “When I give a talk up at Shakawe, they always think I am some kind of chief just because I wear clothes.” People there wear hardly any clothes at all. He had much difficulty in trying to get a well-organized public meeting going; first to get the people together and then to keep them quiet during the talk. They were not used to sitting down and listening to someone else. So, when the talk started they considered it a good opportunity to discuss with their neighbors the points that were being brought out. But the visits to these isolated ones resulted in two persons dedicating their lives to God and a total of six sharing in the work.

On one occasion during a severe drought in 1965 to 1966 water was so scarce that it was impossible to find water to baptize some candidates at an assembly. Another time, in Francistown, the brothers also had great difficulty. Brother Piet Wentzel, the district overseer at the time, reports that the first pool they went to was dry. So he took the two candidates twenty miles in his car to a water hole in the dry riverbed, but that also was dry. Another five miles brought them to a muddy pool, quite black in appearance from the cattle standing in it. But it did not deter these young men. It was water and there they were baptized in symbol of their dedication to do Jehovah’s will.

WITNESS WORK ADVANCES IN BOTSWANA

When Bechuanaland gained its independence it changed its name to Botswana. This political change did not alter the living conditions of the people much, although it did have an effect on the preaching work. The new independent government became very strict with Africans who were not Botswana citizens, and a number of pioneers from South Africa were deported.

What is it like to witness in Botswana? The usual custom requires introductory greetings during which each one inquires about the health of the other. This having been concluded, benches are brought forth for all to sit on. The rest of the family plus any visiting friends are called, quite often as many as twenty persons. Most families have their own copies of the Bible and are willing to get their own Bibles and follow along.

In Botswana it is the custom for parents of a boy to pay a deposit of £4 plus a blanket and a dress for the girl whom they wish their son to marry. This is done when she is only ten years old. Thereafter, the boy’s parents continue to support the girl until she is ready for marriage. This is done without consulting the girl. When a fifteen-year-old girl came to a knowledge of the truth, she informed her parents that she did not wish to be unequally yoked with an unbeliever. The parents tried to force her, in view of the money already paid for her, but when she successfully convinced them from the Scriptures that such an arrangement was wrong, they permitted her to have her way.

Because of the difficulty in finding a suitable place for assemblies, and always having to spend a lot of time erecting temporary structures, the brothers were encouraged to build their own Kingdom Hall in Mahalapye. This they did. The brothers made and baked their own bricks. It took a number of years to complete, and then in 1967 their Kingdom Hall was used for an assembly.

Have you ever wondered about the Bushmen of Botswana and whether any of those hunters with bow and arrow, whose click language is only now in the process of being put in writing, would become part of the New Order society? Well, the truth found a local man living consensually with a Bushman woman. A Bible study was started and soon they learned that it was necessary to get legally married. Would this man marry the Bushman woman? Yes, he did and both of them were immersed at a circuit assembly. Within a year they learned to read and write and began giving a fine witness to all in their community, making disciples of still others.

In 1972 some capable European brothers and their families from South Africa responded to a call to move to Botswana to assist the brothers there. Of course, it meant some sacrifices, some even giving up pioneer service because they could enter the country for an extended period only if they had secular work there. But what fine work they and some brothers from Britain have done to build up the brothers there! Some of them have moved even to very remote parts of the country. Their presence was and is much appreciated by the brothers, and the work moved ahead.

QUESTION OF LEGALITY RAISED, THEN SETTLED

Then came a shock. A refusal on the part of the government to register Jehovah’s witnesses as an acceptable organization in terms of a newly published law led to the organization’s being declared illegal on July. 20, 1973. Mere membership in such an “illegal” organization carried with it a penalty of up to seven years imprisonment.

But the brothers were determined to carry on under the altered conditions. When first the possibility of a ban became evident, brothers from the branch office had a meeting with those having oversight of the work to give counsel and encouragement. Just before the ban became operative, by Jehovah’s undeserved kindness, two circuit assemblies were held in Botswana, giving excellent encouragement and direction to all the brothers.

Legal proceedings were immediately initiated to appeal the government’s decision on the basis of Botswana’s constitution. What a joy it was when, on February 20, 1974, the government reversed its decision and registered Jehovah’s witnesses as a legal organization! This did not just bring the brothers back to their situation before the ban. Now they were in position to make use of the privileges extended to registered organizations, including the bringing in of full-time preachers from neighboring countries.

In March 1975 they rejoiced in a new peak of 284 publishers. This means that there was a ratio of 2,220 people to one publisher. Truly, a vast work remains to be done in Botswana, but by Jehovah’s undeserved kindness we are confident that it will be done.

CHRISTIAN ACTIVITY MOVES AHEAD IN SWAZILAND

In 1960 the Kingdom work in Swaziland was prospering, with an average of 380 publishers. Already the publisher-to-population ratio was the best of all the countries under the Elandsfontein branch. The ban on the Society’s literature had been lifted and the stage was set for further growth.

One field in which little growth had taken place up until the 1960’s was the European population. About that time a few European publishers moved to Bremersdorp (now called Manzini). Amongst them was Ian Cameron, a Scotsman, who had served in the Elandsfontein Bethel until his marriage to a South African girl. As he was unable to obtain permanent residence in the Union of South Africa, he decided to settle in Swaziland, so as to bring the message of God’s established kingdom to the European population there. The small group of publishers at Manzini determined to work the entire territory of Swaziland, an area of 6,700 square miles. This entailed many a trip of well over 100 miles to make a return visit or conduct a Bible study.

The message soon began to strike a responsive chord. Vic Dunkin and his wife, Aileen, were assigned by the Society as special pioneers in Swaziland. The corrugated gravel roads across the lowveld, the slippery muddy roads through the Usuthu forest, the tortuous road to Goedgegun and the steep mountainous road to Havelock all battered their motorcar and took their toll upon it. But Brother and Sister Dunkin persisted and soon they were rewarded by fruits for their labor. An English-speaking congregation was formed. Most of its members were persons who had learned the truth, or at least made a dedication to Jehovah, while in Swaziland. Although English speaking, the congregation was really a cosmopolitan one and its publishers represented a cross section of the British Empire.

This same cosmopolitan atmosphere is evident on the streets of Mbabane, where Swazis in their national costume brush past hippies and members of the American Peace Corps in outlandish dress as the latter gaze into shop windows. Inside the shop, a Portuguese businessman may be serving a smartly dressed African civil servant. This situation often calls for the publishers to carry literature in a number of languages.

On one occasion a circuit overseer and his wife came to a Portuguese railway community and, although they could not make themselves understood, they endeavored to share the Kingdom message. They were able to offer magazines in the language of the people. At the second door a young girl acted as interpreter so that her mother could understand what the visitors were doing. After listening carefully, the mother took a book. Before they left, the young girl said: “I am coming with you and I am going to speak for you.” She did just that. At the next five houses she explained the message, interpreting for the circuit overseer and his wife. At the end of each presentation she turned to the publishers, saying: “She wants one,” meaning that the householder wanted a book. Six bound books were placed that morning with the help of this little girl!

CHRISTIAN NEUTRALITY DISPLAYED

In keeping with the worldwide decolonialization movement, Swaziland also was preparing for independence, and the people became more nationalistic. When election time came around, at one polling station the chief announced: “Before we all vote, there are certain people, Shadrachs, Meshachs and Abednegos, refusing to vote in the community. Let them come out one by one if they are still refusing to vote.” The isolated publishers in the community stood out courageously. This prompted an interested person also to take a stand along with the Witnesses. Since voting is not compulsory, no action could be taken against these neutral Christians.

Just prior to the independence celebrations in September of 1967, Jehovah’s people provided a fine demonstration of unity among different ethnic groups. The Swaziland English-speaking (European) congregation belongs to the eastern Transvaal circuit and so it was arranged for the whole circuit to have an assembly in Swaziland and to invite the African brothers to be present. The hall was too small, but this provided an opportunity to show real brotherly love. When it was noticed that many Europeans but not many African brothers were in the hall, the word was passed around to make room for the African brothers. What happened? Later, the African circuit overseer expressed his concern that too many African brothers were inside, while the Europeans were standing outside. The public talk in English and Zulu drew an audience of 652.

After the country gained independence, many of Jehovah’s people were compelled to show where they stood on the neutrality issue. One of the district chiefs called upon a pioneer to attend a political meeting. When the brother did not attend, he was called before the chief to account for his absence. He explained his position as a Christian neutral. The chief threatened to deport him but said that he would first refer the matter to King Sobhuza II, whom he planned to visit. King Sobhuza II advised the chief that Jehovah’s witnesses should be left alone because they did not belong to any political party and were peaceful, neutral people.

The nationalistic spirit has prompted the revival of many tribal customs, such as the umcwasho law. This tribal law required that girls wear umcwasho during a two-year period ending in August 1971. Umcwasho is a form of ornamentation worn around the neck and has a symbolic significance. An engaged girl wore a combination of red and black, and all other unmarried girls wore blue and yellow. During this period all girls were to refrain from sex relations, except those already engaged, who were permitted to have intercourse with their lovers upon payment of R1.00 to the local chief. The institution of this arrangement had the purpose of honoring the local Princess Sidanda. Since it was a form of creature worship and condoned fornication at a price, Jehovah’s witnesses refused to observe the umcwasho period and to wear the umcwasho around their necks. Although this was just a tribal law and could not be enforced by the law of the land, the firm stand of our young sisters brought hardship upon some of them. In one instance, a young girl, whose parents were not in the truth, spent ten days in prison for not wearing umcwasho. But the headmaster of the school that she attended successfully demanded her release.

The children of Jehovah’s witnesses have been helped by proper parental training to realize the importance of worship that is pure and undefiled before Jehovah. (Jas. 1:27) Many had been participating in school hymns and prayers until they realized that this was a form of false worship. An increasing number then refrained from sharing in any religious exercises. This has resulted in many being severely beaten, and large numbers have been expelled from the schools they attended. When that happened, the brothers began teaching their own children privately or sending them to other schools.

BLESSINGS ABOUND AMID DIFFICULTIES

The Truth book in Zulu is another instrument that is proving to be a blessing to the brothers in Swaziland. Many say that it has helped them to understand the truth more clearly than ever before. Certainly, this book is helping sincere people to learn the truth of the Bible and come onto the way that leads to eternal life.

During 1972, the brothers here held their last district assembly to date. After that the constitution was abolished and police permission became necessary for any large gatherings. Thus far, the police have adamantly refused to give the brothers such permission, even though they were registered as a religious organization in Swaziland in October of 1974. Difficulties have also been experienced in the holding of circuit assemblies. The only way these can be held is by breaking them up into smaller gatherings at the regular meeting places used by the different congregations.

The tract work met with enthusiastic response and a new peak of 750 publishers was reached in February 1974, when the first tract was distributed. Our brothers and sisters are very zealous, averaging close to 14 hours per publisher a month during the 1974 service year. In fact, there are now very few places in Swaziland where a thorough witness has not been given.

As in other lands the Kingdom proclamation has irritated the clergy of Christendom to the extent that they have made attempts to have our work banned. On April 2, 1975, the clergy made accusations against Jehovah’s witnesses before King Sobhuza II, saying that they do not mourn when someone dies, but treat the dead disrespectfully. On this occasion only a few of our brothers were present. Hence, the king arranged for another meeting to be held on May 3, 1975, so that more people could be present and the matter could be discussed in greater detail. The meeting was held at Lozitha, out in the open, and all those who attended sat on the ground under a few trees. The king himself was not present at the meeting, but the Minister of Agriculture served as chairman. Anyone wishing to speak raised his hand and, if called on by the chairman, he could go up to the microphone to speak.

At first, when one of our brothers tried to present the truth about how Jehovah’s witnesses feel when someone dies, he was continually interrupted. Nevertheless, during the course of the day some of our other brothers were able to speak. The brothers and sisters turned out in large numbers. In fact, the Witnesses far outnumbered the rest of the crowd. False accusations were made, saying that we kick the corpse when someone dies and throw the coffin into the grave, saying that the person has been defeated by the Devil. It was difficult to get the opportunity to refute these false accusations since the chairman would just call upon anyone whom he desired to speak. This meeting lasted from around ten o’clock in the morning until six o’clock in the evening. Toward the end of the day, since the opposers realized that they could not condemn the Witnesses on the matter of mourning, they brought up other matters, such as their refusing to salute the flag, or sing the national anthem and do military service. By this time the sun was setting, so the chairman said that these other matters would be discussed on another occasion.

Some of the members of parliament, and especially the clergy, are determined in their efforts to curb the work that Jehovah’s witnesses are doing throughout Swaziland. We leave the matter in Jehovah’s hands, knowing that Jehovah will see to it that his will is fully accomplished.

ORGANIZATIONAL IMPROVEMENTS IN SOUTH AFRICA

The Kingdom Ministry School for congregation overseers got under way in South Africa during the second half of 1961 and had a pronounced effect on the brothers and the Kingdom work. The four instructors traveled around the country, and Kingdom Halls were turned into classrooms. This was necessary not only due to great distances involved, but also because of the population-movement control policy of the government, which restricts Africans in one area from going to another area for any length of time. All those who attended these classes expressed great appreciation for this loving provision of Jehovah through his organization.

In May 1961, the Union of South Africa became a republic. From then on more than ever before the spirit of nationalism manifested itself here too. At first it did not interfere with those who practice true worship, but later it did bring a real test upon those who have given their allegiance to Jehovah’s kingdom, as we shall see later in this record.

Jehovah’s witnesses had a marvelous opportunity to show their unity and Christian neutrality during their United Worshipers National Assembly held for the three main racial groups during October/​November of 1961. The opening day of the European assembly here coincided with the general election day. A pamphlet on the assembly (Which Government Will Bring Unity?) was printed at the Elandsfontein factory and this was distributed by the tens of thousands. The result? Our largest attendance ever at the public talk! At the three assemblies the total attendance was 22,551! How different the peaceful association in unity among the various racial groups within the assembly grounds, in contrast to the noisy political division that existed outside!

In time, a number of adjustments were made at Elandsfontein. For instance, African brothers were called into Bethel to serve as translators and stenographers. The African stenographers would translate letters as they typed them, into either Zulu, Xhosa or Sesotho. So the brothers received specific counsel regarding their needs and problems. Most of the other vernacular translators were brought into Bethel too. When visitors now came through Bethel they saw European sisters serving as housekeepers and European brothers as janitors and laundry workers​—activities viewed in South Africa as “native” work—​and African brothers sitting behind typewriters!

MISSIONARY ENDEAVORS IN SOUTH-WEST AFRICA

Meanwhile, what was happening in South-West Africa? Three missionaries began working there in 1950. Starting from Windhoek, they gradually moved into other parts of the territory. In 1951 two of them moved north and were overjoyed at finding two “lost sheep” at Tsumeb, a copper-mining town. These once had contact with the organization and soon were helped to have an active share in the field service. Forty miles south, in Grootfontein, they found Brother and Sister Bogusch, who had been in contact with the truth in Germany. Having now made contact with the organization again, they started sharing in the service again. Two more publishers were located at Otjiwarongo. These had moved in from the Union of South Africa. Then a father and son were found who had been subscribers for The Watchtower for many years. Both progressed very quickly to the point of dedication.

What joy the three missionaries must have felt when, by the end of 1952, the number of publishers in the country had jumped to 29! It is true that many of these moved out, but the work during those years was not in vain. As one of the later missionaries put it: “Many seeds of truth have been sown here. As we attend national assemblies in the Republic [of South Africa], we are greeted by Witnesses who began their studies in Windhoek.”

In 1953 five more missionaries were happily received by the three already there. These missionaries settled in Windhoek, giving the other three brothers the opportunity to take up assignments farther north and south. In a matter of weeks, each of the new missionaries had eight to ten Bible studies, and from then on the work just blossomed forth.

But a problem continued to loom in the foreground​—how to reach the African population effectively with the good news. George Koett, one of the early missionaries, had done some work among the Africans in the Windhoek African Location (township), but the authorities yielded to clerical pressure and canceled his permit to enter the Location. Efforts to get African pioneers from South Africa met with a refusal from the authorities. In 1959 the district overseer applied to the Native Administrator for permission to enter the Location, but he refused coldly. Later in the week, however, he went on holiday, and the town clerk was approached for permission to enter the Location. This was granted and the film “Happiness of the New World Society” was shown to 216 appreciative Africans.

Since 1953 Dick Waldron had repeatedly tried to get a permit to enter the African Location, but in vain. Then Dick and Coralie Waldron realized that they were going to become parents. Would they have to quit their assignment? No, they decided to stay. Later, news came that Coralie’s mother, in Australia, had become very ill. Now the Waldrons decided to leave Windhoek, South-West Africa, and return to Australia. But on the week of their departure news came that a permit had been granted for them to work amongst the Africans and Colored! What were they going to do? Give the permit back, after having waited seven years to obtain it? Brother Waldron canceled his boat booking, and his wife and daughter went on to Australia alone. They spent four months there and then returned. In the meantime, Dick Waldron was able to spend much time witnessing to the Africans and Colored, with gratifying results. At their first circuit assembly for the Africans and Colored they had an attendance of 100 at the public talk.

REACHING THE AFRICAN POPULACE

In order to reach all the Africans, it was essential to get some literature translated and printed in their languages. But as yet there were no educated African brothers to undertake this task. Sometime before, under the direction of earlier missionaries, booklets were translated by worldly translators into Nama, Kwanyama and Herero. Although these were printed and distributed, they did not prove successful, since the translations were far too vague and inaccurate. Although worldly people had to be used again, there would have to be much closer supervision.

Dick Waldron says of efforts to get accurate translations: “Using mainly schoolteachers who were studying and had a little knowledge of the truth, I had to sit with them and work with them to make sure that each sentence was the truth. The Nama language has a limited vocabulary. For instance, I was trying to get the point across, ‘In the beginning Adam was a perfect man. The translator was scratching his head and said there is no word in the Nama language for ‘perfect.’ ‘I’ve got it,’ he said, ‘In the beginning Adam was like a ripe peach.’” Despite the problems, though, eventually the tract Life in the New World was translated into Herero, Nama, Ndonga and Kwanyama.

Brother Erwin Schneid and his wife Gertrud and their daughter Karin had moved from Germany into the coastal town of Swakopmund in 1956. Their relatives were apprehensive about this move, and they themselves were not too sure of what to expect. What strange people were they to meet? What weird-sounding language would they have to learn? What dangers lay ahead in that “dark” continent? They landed at Walvis Bay and were met by white people speaking, of all languages, German! In fact, their new hometown, Swakopmund, proved to be a little town out of Germany, in building style, habits and the predominant tongue. Later, other members of their family also arrived, other interested ones were assisted to accept the truth and now it was possible to form a congregation.

Colored brothers from the Cape Province started moving into the territory in connection with the fishing industry, and they did much to spread the good news among the Africans, especially in Walvis Bay. A great number of these Africans come from their homelands, such as Ovamboland in the north, for one or two years only, on a work contract. Then they have to return. Thus many of them obtained some of the Society’s literature and then took it back with them into Ovamboland. One of the Ovambos, Philemon Kalongela, fully accepted the truth in Walvis Bay, and was able to return to Ovamboland to preach. He actually worked there as a special pioneer for a while.

THE FIRST HOTTENTOT TO ACCEPT THE TRUTH

Ella Crighton was the first Colored person in South-West Africa to accept the truth. She could also speak the Nama (Hottentot) language fluently. It was certainly appropriate, then, that she was the one to assist the very first Hottentot to accept the truth.

Few people can boast of as colorful a life history as that dear old Hottentot brother, “Oupa” (Grandfather) Jod. Captured by the Germans during the Hottentot wars when he was a young boy, he worked and lived most of his life in Windhoek. Incidentally, those wars ended around 1890. Although he had very little education, “Oupa” is able to read, write and speak, not only his own language, Nama, but also German and Afrikaans. When Sister Ella Crighton started a Bible study with him, “Oupa” Jod must have been deep into his seventies. He was a pillar of the church, and his withdrawal from Babylon the Great caused no little upheaval. Ministers from different parts of the country gathered at his house to persuade him to return to his former religion, but nothing would move him. Assisted by Ella Crighton, he was able to resist all their attempts. Relatives wept and pleaded, but to no avail. “Oupa” Jod had found the truth.

RECENT DEVELOPMENTS

Jehovah is speeding up his work in this country of such colorful variety in racial and national groups. By the end of 1973, he opened the way for a witness to be given to the Basters in the Rehoboth area. Until that year no witness of Jehovah had been granted permission to enter the area for the purpose of preaching the Kingdom message. In the northern part of the territory, where there is a “preserve” of approximately half a million Africans, the work is beginning to gain a small foothold. Four groups of publishers are operating in Ovamboland now and a special pioneer living just across the border serves them regularly as a temporary circuit overseer. Although Jehovah’s witnesses are seizing every opportunity to get the good news to the people in this “preserve,” they hope and pray that the door will open wide for them to send full-time workers into that relatively vast area.

From one lonely voice declaring the truth in South-West Africa in 1947 a beautiful expansion has taken place. That one voice has now expanded to a peak number of 322 Kingdom proclaimers in March 1975. If it be Jehovah’s will also to open up more fully the territories in the north, then we can expect the full harvest from that part of the field too.

FAITHFUL ONES ENJOY PRIVILEGES

In South Africa, too, there are wonderful examples of elderly publishers like “Oupa” Jod of South-West Africa, and some of them are right in the pioneer ranks. They have enjoyed many privileges in Jehovah’s service. One of these old faithfuls, Annie Moseleba, an African sister, was the oldest special pioneer. In 1966 she passed away at the age of ninety-one after eighteen years of pioneer service. Because of her old age, she was very highly respected by the people of her community and had excellent success where other publishers failed. She helped scores of people into the truth during her pioneer career. In just one year she helped eight people to take a firm stand for the truth, and conducted thirteen home Bible studies.

Another faithful example in South Africa has been Brother George Phillips. From 1927 on he served as branch overseer and the brothers got to love and respect him deeply for his devotion to Jehovah and the example he set. He proved himself to be a real fighter for the truth, a brother with stick-to-itiveness, always loyally supporting Jehovah’s organization. He piloted the work through those early beginnings and the difficult nineteen-forties. He saw the organization in South Africa grow from a handful of publishers to over 20,000 in 1966. Even though he found it necessary to leave Bethel at the end of July 1966 Brother Phillips’ heart was still in the full-time service, and after a short period he was serving as a pioneer in the Strand, near Cape Town.

There was a very capable brother available to take over the branch from Brother Phillips, namely, Harry Arnott, former branch overseer of Zambia, who, with his wife, had been deported from that country the previous year. He was well known to the brothers in South Africa, having served this country for many years as zone overseer. Brother Arnott had the full confidence of the brothers and for two years served as branch overseer until he too had to relinquish this privilege of service due to the expected arrival of a firstborn.

From June 1968 onward Brother Frans Muller has been serving as branch overseer. Since 1960 he had been the assistant to the branch overseer, and serving on the service desk. Brother Muller had served the whole country as either circuit or district overseer before he and his wife were called into Bethel in 1959.

These quick changes from one branch overseer to another had no adverse effect on the work. Everything continued to run smoothly. It just proved to all the brothers once again that Jehovah’s work does not depend on any individual, and that Jehovah can use anyone who is willing to be used by him.

“TRUTH” BOOK AIDS SHEEPLIKE ONES

During the district assemblies in 1968 the book The Truth That Leads to Eternal Life was released and the six-month Bible study method was introduced. Things started happening!

Literature placements in the Republic of South Africa skyrocketed. Return visits and Bible studies increased. When the Truth book became available, the shipping department at the branch experienced something they had never seen before. During the period 1960-1967 an average of approximately 90,000 books had been shipped out per year. But in 1968 it jumped to over 125,000. Then the Truth book appeared in Afrikaans in 1969 and at the end of that year it was released in Zulu, Xhosa and Sepedi. During the 1970 service year the branch shipped out more than 447,000 books!

With the Truth book available in so many of the vernacular languages, a special effort was made to reach as many farmers as possible on large stretches of land in this country. Most of these farms are miles apart and can be reached only by car. At the Society’s branch office these farm territories were mapped out and congregations were encouraged to apply for farm territory. The response was good. Some congregations accepted territory more than 200 miles from their homes. Thousands of miles were covered in order to reach these farmers with the good news of the Kingdom. One car group covered about 200 square miles, visiting 100 farms and placing 90 Truth books. Many truth-hungry people have been found and assisted by means of correspondence or by return visits from these brothers.

THE PORTUGUESE FIELD IN SOUTH AFRICA

In the story of Angola, we mentioned that Henrique Vieira visited Luanda on his way to South Africa. He settled in Johannesburg, and served in one of the congregations there. But Brother Vieira was not the only immigrant from Portugal. Due to South Africa’s prosperity and fine opportunities for employment, thousands of Portuguese, Greeks and persons of other nationalities have moved in from Europe. It is estimated that there are about 80,000 Portuguese people living on the Reef.

By 1965 Brother Vieira and his wife already began to find good interest among these Portuguese immigrants. Very few of them learned English, and so it was felt that there was a need for some Portuguese-speaking Witnesses to help these people get the Kingdom message. In January 1966, a group of eleven Portuguese publishers was formed in Johannesburg. In Johannesburg the Portuguese are not all located together in one place, so publishers often spent a whole morning locating and witnessing to one or two families, and some Sundays they did not find any at all. In spite of this, the little group grew very rapidly and by the end of 1967 a new congregation was formed with some 50 publishers.

There was steady growth within the Portuguese field thereafter, not only in and near Johannesburg, but elsewhere. In other cities of South Africa there are also Portuguese immigrants. So, before long, there were groups of Portuguese brothers in Durban, Port Elizabeth, Cape Town and Bloemfontein.

From time to time these Portuguese brothers go home for a visit and always do so with the main objective of witnessing to their families and friends in those Catholic towns and villages of Portugal. For instance, when one new brother and his wife went back to Portugal on a vacation, they were wondering how they might start witnessing to their family. To their great surprise and delight, one of the family members started witnessing to them! One can imagine what a happy family reunion that was!

GREEK FIELD IN SOUTH AFRICA

Early in 1969, a small Greek congregation was formed in Johannesburg to care for the interest among the Greek community of approximately 30,000 on the Reef. At that time there were only twenty-four Greek brothers reporting field service. But after only sixteen months this congregation had grown to sixty-two publishers, including five regular pioneers, and every month three or four temporary pioneers. Here was another fine start, in an important field of service.

The Greek population is scattered all over the Witwatersrand, over a stretch of more than sixty miles. So, by means of a telephone directory and the help of the English- and Afrikaans-speaking congregations, the Greek congregation began compiling an ‘address territory” of all the Greeks. Not long after the forming of the Greek congregation in Johannesburg, small groups of Greeks were built up in a few other places, even as far afield as Durban. These people, who have been under the heavy yoke of religious bondage to the Greek Orthodox Church, quickly recognize the truth and do not dally in making a decision. Almost from the time a Bible study is started with them they begin attending the meetings and witnessing to their friends and relatives.

ASSEMBLIES WITH INTERNATIONAL ASPECTS

With all these foreigners coming along, assemblies in South Africa are taking on a real international flavor. At district and national assemblies, there are special stands for these brothers where a program is presented for them in their own language.

Talking about an “international assembly”​—the “Peace on Earth” International Assemblies in 1969 overshadowed everything previous in the theocratic history of South Africa. First there was the anticipation. Then there was the realization, when over 500 brothers from South Africa attended the London assembly and quite a number went to the assemblies in other parts of Europe, including the mammoth convention in Nuremberg.

For some, this was not their first international assembly. But for most of the delegates, the 1969 “Peace on Earth” Assembly in London was the thrill of a lifetime. Among these were the first African brothers from here ever to attend an international assembly. Ten of them were full-time workers who were sent by the Society by means of the convention travel fund. They were absolutely overwhelmed by this experience. For many it was the first time they had a close-up view of a plane, let alone travel in one. Yet, the novelty of air travel was not the thing that impressed them most. Of course, the spiritual food received at the assembly was most impressive and beneficial. But these African brothers also were moved deeply by the love and hospitality they received from their white brothers on the plane, and the experience of staying with white brothers in their homes in England, something that is deprived them by law in the country of South Africa. Nicolson Makhetha of Lesotho, when asked what impressed him most, apart from the assembly program, said: “To be with European brothers in their home and see how they apply the counsel of family life received from the organization.”

This experience proved to the African brothers that Jehovah’s witnesses are indeed the same all over the world, and they came back with much to tell the other African brothers. How grateful they were for the generosity of their fellow Christians that made it possible for them to have this experience!

The delegates to the “Peace on Earth” International Assemblies enjoyed the spiritual fare so much that the looked forward to enjoying the same program again at the South African “Peace on Earth” National Assemblies from December 31, 1969, to January 4, 1970. And what huge audiences! The combined attendance for the three public meetings was 45,821, with 1,294 baptized.

FINE ADVANCEMENT ON ST. HELENA

At the international assembly in London, July 1969, some of the brothers from South Africa met George Scipio and his daughter from St. Helena. Brother Scipio could tell them that witnessing to the same people year after year on a small island such as St. Helena is a real test of faith and endurance. Nevertheless, marvelous progress has been made there over the years.

The territory has been so well worked, and our literature so well distributed, that when a householder is asked to get his Bible, it is not uncommon for him to come out with a copy of the New World Translation. With the arrival of the Truth book, the Bible study average went up to 1.2 per publisher in 1969. Quite a number of persons who had known the truth for some time were helped to take a definite stand. This book also helped to revive inactive publishers.

As their ranks continue to swell, the chorus of Kingdom proclaimers becomes ever louder on St. Helena. A peak of 99 publishers was reached during the 1975 service year. The territory has now shrunk to the point where every publisher has, on the average, a territory comprising 51 persons. And still good interest is being found.

ASCENSION ISLANDERS HEAR THE GOOD NEWS

The first time a report was received from this island about 700 miles northwest of St. Helena was in 1965. It was from Sister B. Taylor whose husband was working for the Cable and Wireless Company and who had been sent there by that firm. At that time the population of this island of approximately 34 square miles was just over 300. It was a real challenge to this sister to work all alone. But she accepted it and averaged 23 hours and three Bible studies each month.

By 1968 the population on the island had grown to 2,000. That year Sister Taylor went to England for a visit. So, George Scipio from St. Helena went over to care for the interested ones. His comment: “The people on this island are like sheep without a shepherd. The interest he found caused Brother Scipio to move his whole family over to Ascension Island. This was a great boost for the work.

In one case a home Bible study had to be conducted at 10 p.m. because the man worked shifts until after nine o’clock some weeks. As it was very hot, they used to have the study on the veranda, in the open, where the neighbors could see them. This resulted in ridicule from the neighbors. As the man progressed and realized he was learning the truth, he commented: “Now I see why more people are not Jehovah’s witnesses, because they are afraid of what their neighbors would say and think.” The family began attending meetings and enjoyed them. After hearing at the Tuesday book study how urgent the time is and about the work still to be done, the man started witnessing to all his workmates the next day and was overjoyed to find one man who asked for a Bible and book so that he too could study.

Brother Scipio and his family had to return to St. Helena after nine months. However, they kept in touch with some of the Bible students by writing letters. One of these interested ones was a young man who had come to the pioneer’s home during a morning break at work and asked if he could have a glass of water. The next day he came again for a glass of water, stood there for a while and then nervously asked the pioneer’s wife if she had any Bibles to sell. Immediately he was supplied with one and was invited to the book study. He got himself a book and came. The pioneer’s thirteen-year-old son started a study with him and he made steady progress.

After Brother Scipio left, this young man took a firm stand for the truth. When he was asked by his employer to paint military or church buildings he refused. Even the head foreman with all his arguments could not make him change his mind.

We have not received any field service reports from Ascension Island for the last three years. The sole publisher on the island made regular trips to the United Kingdom and reporting was rather irregular. Though we are not sure what happened to her, perhaps Jehovah yet knows of sheeplike ones there to be brought ‘into the pen.’​—Mic. 2:12.

UPHOLDING GOD’S LAW ON BLOOD

From time to time the blood issue comes to the fore in South Africa. To illustrate: An African sister, six months pregnant, suddenly started hemorrhaging. At the hospital the doctors ordered a blood transfusion. Brother and Sister Marsh explained their Scriptural position, only to be ridiculed by the doctors and nurses. She was examined every half hour. Later. one of the nurses informed her that she could not detect the fetal heartbeat and believed that the baby had died inside her. The doctor now wanted to remove the “dead” fetus, but not without a blood transfusion. Although the sister said she could still feel fetal movements, the medical staff insisted that the baby was dead.

Brother and Sister Marsh left that hospital and went to another. En route the brother encouraged his wife to remain faithful, come what may. On arrival at the other hospital, their stand on blood was explained and the nurse on night duty asked them to sign a statement to that effect. An examination revealed that the baby was still alive. Treatment was given and our sister made rapid recovery. but had to come in every two weeks for a checkup. The doctor agreed to perform a cesarean section without blood. When the time came for the delivery, the sister was admitted to the hospital. But while the staff was preparing for the operation, she gave normal birth to twin boys. How happy this brother and sister are that they remained faithful to Jehovah’s law!

INDIAN FIELD PROVES PRODUCTIVE

There is quite a large Indian population in South Africa, and in recent years many of these people have come into the truth. There are now a number of Indian congregations in the Transvaal and Natal. Formerly, some of these persons were Hindus, some nominal Christians and others Moslems. Now, however, they unite with the rest of Jehovah’s servants in South Africa in worshiping Jehovah with spirit and with truth.​—John 4:23.

EXPANSION ONCE AGAIN

For many years the brothers in South Africa and neighboring territories had been looking forward to another visit from the Watch Tower Society’s president, N. H. Knorr, who had last been in South Africa in 1959 when he arranged for the extension of the branch quarters. It was time again to expand the Bethel facilities, which by 1970 were taxed to their capacity, with 68 members in the family. When the June 1970 Kingdom Ministry announced that the district assemblies had been canceled in in favor of a national assembly, hopes were running high that there would be a visitor from Brooklyn. But it was not until November that the Kingdom Ministry announced: “Brother Knorr Is Coming.”’ The brothers were overjoyed and nothing could stop them from coming to the “Men of Goodwill” Assemblies that were arranged for January 7-10, 1971.

Due to racial segregation in South Africa and the fact that the various racial groups live in separate townships, three different assemblies had to be arranged. The Europeans met at Milner Park Show Grounds, the Colored in the Union Stadium in the Colored area, and the African brothers met in Mofolo Park in the huge complex of Soweto where hundreds of thousands of African people live.

Mofolo Park is just an open park flanked by trees, with no facilities whatsoever. So, the African brothers, with the help of many European brothers, undertook the gigantic job of constructing seating for 30,000 people and setting up various departments. They even installed flush toilets for the anticipated crowd. Municipal officials who visited the site made the remark: “We are amazed at what you are doing. Why, you have built two cities!” They were referring to the Zulu and Sesotho sections of the park.

At these assemblies something was tried for the first time with great success. That was to use one set of players to pantomime the action of a drama, while the dialogue was heard simultaneously in two languages in different sections of the stadium. This was a tremendous task, involving many hours of work. But it was greatly appreciated by the brothers who could all benefit from the excellent lessons of the dramas in their own languages.

Brother Knorr was kept busy racing from one assembly to another, to be on time for his parts on the different programs. His extemporaneous talk, “This Is the Way,” was especially appreciated, and the brothers long afterward continued to talk about the wonderful counsel they received through it. The public talk was the grand climax. At the Colored assembly 2,770 attended, 12,252 at the European, and 33,757 at the African, making a grand total of 48,779! This was a wonderful attendance when it is considered that there were only about 22,000 Witnesses in South Africa at the time.

In his very encouraging closing remarks Brother Knorr told the assembled brothers of plans to expand the Society’s factory, office and Bethel home at Elandsfontein. He also explained how the publishers could help.

The Bethel family itself greatly appreciated Brother Knorr’s visit to the branch. He observed that the family consisted mostly of young people. Nearly all of them had been reared by dedicated parents and they were happy to be at Bethel.

The Bethel family at Elandsfontein has some older ones too. For example, there is Andrew Jack, now eighty years of age and still doing a full day’s work. Gert Nel, our former “servant to the brethren,” still translates The Watchtower into Afrikaans, although he is now seventy-one years old. The family at Elandsfontein is happy, dwelling and working together in unity. The family includes fourteen African brothers and sisters. There is a warm spirit of love and unity in the family, in spite of the fact that its members come from so many different backgrounds. While English is the official language of the Bethel home, this family serves people in many languages​—Zulu, Sesotho, Xhosa, Tswana, Sepedi, German, Greek, Afrikaans and Portuguese. They are happy to serve their brothers, not only in South Africa, but also in the Congo (Kinshasa, now called Zaïre), Mozambique, Rhodesia and Zambia, for whom they do printing.

When Brother Knorr informed the brothers of the size of the extension to the buildings at Elandsfontein and that the brothers were going to build the extension themselves, the response was overwhelming! Contributions started pouring into the office. So many offers of loans were received that the Society’s branch office had to tell the brothers they had enough. But at that time there was a scarcity of cement in the country and the brothers were wondering whether they would get all the cement needed. Just then an Indian brother phoned and asked them please to pick up a donation of 500 bags (50 kg. each) of cement. Others offered their trucks to do transport for the Society, one brother transporting from forty miles away all the face bricks they needed. An African pioneer sister paid a firm to deliver 20 cubic yards of building sand. The brothers were indeed offering their material things willingly for the expansion of the Kingdom work.​—Prov. 3:9, 10.

A number of well-qualified builders, carpenters, electricians, and other artisans made themselves available for the whole period of building operations. Others came for several months. Hundreds from nearby congregations helped over the weekends. The response was marvelous. Toward the latter part of the building work, when lots of help was needed in cleaning up, there were sometimes as many as 200 helpers on the job. The brothers thoroughly enjoyed working together, and a grand spirit of peace and unity prevailed among them all.

Very few things were done by outside firms, as there were brothers who could do almost anything​—yes, the architect, engineer, electricians, plumbers, carpenters, and so forth, were all dedicated brothers, happy to have a share in the building work. Also, this building project provided a fine opportunity for brothers of the various races to work together in Kingdom service. Because of segregation laws, they generally meet separately, each one in his own community and language group, but here African, Colored, Indian and white brothers were working together in a unity that this world can never achieve.

To illustrate the generosity of the brothers, note what took place on the day they poured the concrete slab on the first floor. There were many brothers on hand to help, in fact, so many that some were given other work to do. Work commenced at 6:00 a.m., while it was still dark, and by 4:30 that afternoon 184 cubic meters of concrete had been placed and the slab was finished. The brothers were happy and there was such a marvelous spirit prevailing among them that many wished to supplement their contributions of labor by financial donations. When they came to the end of the day, they found that, with the discount, the slab cost about R3,300 and when the contributions from these workers were added up, they exceeded that amount! What a marvelous spirit!

Support came from everywhere. A heartwarming letter was received from two young sisters on St. Helena island who wrote: “Dear Brothers, Please accept this as a donation toward the building fund. Sandra and I made a bag from nylon string and sold it for £1. I am nine years of age and Sandra is six years. Christian love.”

Building operations were started on May 6, 1971, when the approved building plans were received. By October the branch overseer was hurrying the brothers to get the building finished by the end of December. “Why the hurry?” some brothers would ask. But they kept at the job, and building work was just about completed by the end of December. Only the finishing touches, painting, and the like, had to be done. By Sunday, January 30, 1972, the job was completed and many of the older members of the Bethel family had moved into some of the seventeen beautiful new bedrooms in the new wing of the Bethel home. The factory was now enlarged by over 9,000 square feet.

On Monday morning, January 31, 1972, the branch overseer announced that a few hours later the Society’s president, N. H. Knorr, and the Brooklyn factory overseer, M. H. Larson, would be arriving at the Jan Smuts Airport for a visit to South Africa. What a surprise! And what a wonderful visit that was! Brothers Knorr and Larson were delighted with the building and so were the 577 brothers who attended the dedication of the new structure on Wednesday evening, February 2.

All of this was accomplished because Jehovah’s people offered themselves willingly. (Ps. 110:3) Now they have a beautiful building, built by dedicated hands, and that for about half of what it would have cost if a commercial firm had done the work. All praise to Jehovah for the willingness manifested among his dedicated servants!

NEUTRALITY AGAIN BECOMES AN ISSUE

During 1972 the neutral stand of the young brothers became quite a hot issue in South Africa. Formerly, Jehovah’s witnesses received exemption from military service; but now, due to much political activity in Africa, every young white male was to undergo military training. Because these young brothers refused to do this, they were invariably sentenced to ninety days’ detention in barracks where they would be locked up in their underwear because they refused to put on a uniform. However, before the ninety-day sentence was up, they would again be asked to don the uniform and, they refused, they would be given another sentence of ninety days. It appeared that those young brothers would be kept in prison indefinitely.

As time went on, more and more publicity was given to this issue and fair-minded persons spoke up on behalf of the Witnesses, even in Parliament. Eventually, the law was changed. Now any brother who refuses to undergo military training is sentenced to detention barracks for one year, after which he is exempt from military service. Whereas neutral Christians formerly were kept in solitary confinement, they now are assigned to look after themselves in one section of the detention barracks where they do some gardening for themselves, in addition to doing nonmilitary work on rugby grounds and other general sports grounds.

AIDING NEEDY BROTHERS

On October 13, 1972, newspapers in South Africa carried reports telling of the persecution of Jehovah’s witnesses in Malawi and that they were fleeing into Zambia. The South Africa branch contacted the Society’s Zambia branch to inquire in what way the brothers in South Africa could be of help.

After an on-the-spot check, the Zambia branch sent a cable to South Africa: “Malawi refugees urgently require waterproof shelters. Can you obtain army surplus tents, heavy-gauge P.V.C. or plastic sheeting, canvas ground sheets or similar? Telephone details for import licence. Approximately 7,000 persons involved.” On the 18th of October, an appeal went out to the congregations of Jehovah’s witnesses in South Africa. The response was quick and generous. From all over the country, money and clothing poured into the Society’s office at Elandsfontein.

Over a thousand ex-military tarpaulins were bought at a sale. Many of these had small holes or tears and these had to be repaired. The weekend of October 21-22 produced a scene never to be forgotten. A steady stream of cars, vans and trucks loaded with clothing arrived at the Bethel home. Two sections were set up in the shipping department for sorting clothes into men’s, women’s and children’s groupings. Only good articles were packed. Outside there were about 150 brothers and sisters patching and sewing up tears in the tarpaulins. More than ten industrial sewing machines were going all the time. So many volunteered that a number had to be turned away. Everyone just wanted to have a share in doing something for their brothers who were in the camp at Sinda Misale, Zambia.

By Sunday morning the two trucks that were volunteered arrived. On Monday afternoon, October 23, these two huge trucks left for the camp at Sinda Misale with 948 large canvas tarpaulins, 157 large boxes and crates of clothing and 1,111 blankets, rolls of rope, hammers, saws, shovels, and so forth. These two trucks carried a load of approximately 34 tons. The brothers in South Africa were extremely happy that they had been able to share in this way, in addition to offering fervent prayers on behalf of their Malawian brothers.

By the end of that week, the trucks were in Zambia. One was unloaded in Lusaka and then returned to South Africa. The other, plus five smaller trucks of the Zambian brothers, took the donated items, plus food and contributions given by the Zambian brothers and set off for the camp. Three trips to the camp were required to transport everything that the brothers had donated.

When the trucks arrived at the camp and news spread among the Malawian brothers that their fellow believers in South Africa and Zambia had sent them covering, clothing and food, tears of joy flowed freely. Here was tangible evidence of the truthfulness of Jesus’ words at John 13:35: “By this all will know that you are my disciples, if you have love among yourselves.”

Soon the brothers were sent back to Malawi. Then because of further persecution they fled to Mozambique. Every effort to get more truckloads of clothes and food to these brothers in the camps in Mozambique failed. So the brothers in South Africa started sending clothing by mail, making up parcels of ten kilograms each, for which the postage came to R4.44 for each parcel. Some sixteen tons of clothing were sent in this way. Additionally, the brothers showed their genuine love for their Malawian brothers in the refugee camps by making monetary contributions to buy food. In addition to individual contributions sent to the camps by many brothers in South Africa, an additional R100,000 ($142,000) was spent on Malawi relief. The brothers in South Africa were happy for what they could do for their Malawian brothers when they were in Mozambique, and their loving concern for them continues.

JOYOUS INTERNATIONAL EVENT

For Jehovah’s witnesses in South Africa, 1973 was international assembly year. First of all, nearly 1,000 from South Africa traveled abroad to attend international assemblies in Europe, England and the United States of America. Their enthusiasm helped to build up zeal for their own international assembly in Johannesburg. For the first time South Africa was on the list of international assemblies and was expecting many visitors from Europe and other parts of the world.

The brothers planned to have three different assemblies, one for the white brothers, one for the Colored and Indian brothers, and one for the African brothers. They were planning to combine all three assemblies on Sunday afternoon for one session, as they knew that they would not get permission to have a combined assembly for the whole period. But problems were encountered.

First, permission to have an African assembly in Johannesburg was refused. So African assemblies were arranged in five different centers. Instead of a defeat, this proved to be a blessing for Jehovah’s people, since many African brothers who would not have been able to attend could afford the expense of getting to a nearer assembly.

But there were further problems. Because of the military issue in this country, the Department for the Interior did not look with favor upon Jehovah’s witnesses. Consequently, many prospective visitors who stated that they were coming to attend the assembly of Jehovah’s witnesses were refused visas. Included in these were the American branch overseer, Milton Henschel, and the Society’s secretary-treasurer, Grant Suiter. The South African brothers were most disappointed.

However, the assemblies were still a divine victory! Many brothers from Europe came in as tourists and enjoyed fine fellowship with the South African brothers. The African assembly for the Johannesburg area was moved to Benoni, a city about twenty miles to the east of Johannesburg. On Sunday, January 6, 1974, the program started at 9:00 a.m. and ended at twelve o’clock. All arrangements had previously been made, and between twelve o’clock and three o’clock all the brothers at the two Johannesburg assemblies and the one at Benoni were moved to the Rand Stadium in Johannesburg for the combined final sessions. Everyone marveled at the smooth changeover from the three sites to the one, at Rand Stadium. By car, by bus and by train they arrived at Rand Stadium in one continuous stream and poured in until the stadium was full​—a total of 33,408 in attendance. Many were standing.

It was indeed a beautiful sight for Jehovah’s witnesses there to see their African, Colored and white brothers all associated together in worship of Jehovah. There was no segregation. Those who knew English could sit anywhere and the brothers made use of the opportunity to be seated with their brothers of other races. Those who preferred Zulu could sit in the Zulu section; those speaking Sesotho, in the Sesotho section. There were also Afrikaans and Portuguese sections. It was truly a “mixed” company and everybody was very happy. In fact, they were so joyful that it was difficult to restrain them from applauding too much. Never have the brothers been so happy, and many described the occasion as an “unforgettable” afternoon.

How did this come about? Under divine guidance and without realizing it, they had booked the one stadium in Johannesburg set aside for international, interracial gatherings! No permit was needed for this one session. The total attendance at the public talk for all the “Divine Victory” Assemblies came to 56,286, and 1,867 were baptized.

UNPARALLELED ISOLATED-TERRITORY CAMPAIGN

The year 1974 proved to be the best yet in the preaching of the good news of the Kingdom. The Witnesses tried to reach people living on the vast farmlands of South Africa and in African “homelands.” Some of these places never had received a witness. So, during the isolated territory campaign, a special effort was made to reach all these people. City congregations willingly accepted territory assignments hundreds of miles away. Special maps were obtained showing each European farmhouse, as well as all the African villages on the farms. The European congregations undertook the covering of all the farms, including witnessing to the African residents. Where Africans could not understand the European languages, European publishers used small cassette tape recorders to play pre-recorded sermons in the people’s own languages. There was such a demand for literature that they ran out of almost all bound books during this campaign. The African congregations concentrated on the “homelands” that Europeans are not allowed to enter. During the three months of the campaign, 140,000 bound books and over 92,000 booklets, plus hundreds of thousands of magazines, were distributed. Some special pioneer groups traveled over 9,000 miles during the isolated territory campaign to reach all the farms in their assignment.

At the end of the 1974 service year, they were happy to report a grand new peak of 4,055 baptized and an increase of 14 percent in average publishers, with a peak of 28,397. The distribution of Kingdom News tracts gave an added impetus to the work.

CONTINUED EVIDENCE OF DIVINE BLESSING

The Kingdom-preaching work truly is moving ahead steadily. Why, already by early June 1975, 2,462 had been baptized during that service year. Another isolated-territory campaign even greater than in 1974 was planned, in order to reach all the people in the assignment of this branch.

In the meantime, magazine production has increased to the extent that the factory, home and offices at Elandsfontein are too small and they have to be expanded again. At the time of writing this report, their expansion plans are being drawn up. They plan to put on an extension that will include doubling the dining room, kitchen and laundry space, adding 20,000 square feet to the factory, building a new office block of 4,000 square feet and adding a large new Kingdom Hall.

The brothers rejoice in all the evidence of Jehovah’s blessing. But they also realize that they must expect opposition from the enemy. At present, they are busy with a legal case in the Supreme Court of Johannesburg to defend the rights of their African schoolchildren to attend school without singing religious songs and sharing in prayers of false religious organizations. Many of the European Witness children are also being expelled from school, but for a different reason. It is because of their refusal to participate in military-form marching, saluting the flag and singing the national anthem. What the outcome of these issues will be they do not know, but they are determined to push ahead with the preaching of the good news of the Kingdom, trusting in Jehovah’s direction.

When they recall that first one-man branch that started in 1910 in the tiny office used by Brother Johnston and compare it with their fine Bethel home today, as well as new branches formed in Rhodesia, Zambia, Zaïre, Kenya, Malagasy and Mauritius​—what a difference! When they think of that little hand-fed platen press shipped from Brooklyn in 1924, and installed by Brother Phillips, and then take a stroll through their printing factory here full of machinery, turning out vast quantities of Kingdom magazines and other items​—what expansion! When they remember the small Bethel family of 21 in 1951, living in separate homes and consider today’s united, happy family of 110 brothers and sisters​—what growth! And when they note that in 1931, in all the territories under this branch office there were a mere 100 publishers, whereas today in the same area there are over 140,000 preachers of the good news, how they are filled with gratitude to God! His acts today are momentous, as were other divine dealings of the past. They can appropriately adopt the words of the psalmist: “This has come to be from Jehovah himself; it is wonderful in our eyes.”​—Ps. 118:23.

[Picture on page 187]

Bethel Home at Elandsfontein, in 1952

[Picture on page 240, 241]

Watch Tower Society’s office and printery, Elandsfontein, S. Afr.

Sri Lanka

Gem of the Indian Ocean. That is what many call the island you are about to visit. You may know it as Ceylon, but since 1972 this island home has been called Sri Lanka.

With an area of some 25,000 square miles, Sri Lanka is a many-faceted “gem.” Tropical and of low elevation all around the coast, it is crowned with central hills and mountains. You pass coconut plantations to reach the hills, many now covered with beautiful tea bushes.

There also are many facets when we consider races, castes, languages and religions. In the central and southern two thirds of the island, most people claim to be Aryans, speaking Sinhalese and practicing Theravada Buddhism. They are friendly, hospitable people. In the northern and eastern sections of Sri Lanka are Dravidian Tamil-speaking people, most of whom adhere to Hinduism. They are known for their industriousness.

Trade prospects once drew Muslims from as far away as Morocco. Early in the sixteenth century, the Portuguese, interested in spices, took the coastal regions. With them came Roman Catholic priests. Great efforts were made to convert the Buddhists to Catholicism. How? By offering them material advantages and also by using much force. Today many coastal cities are predominantly Catholic.

Somewhat over a century later, the Dutch took this “gem” and held only its coastal regions. To help maintain control, they brought soldiers from Malaya and Java, adding another racial type.

More by diplomacy than by conquest, Britain took Ceylon in 1796. Hence, other facets presented themselves in the way of race and many more Protestant churches. As matters developed, however, Ceylon became independent in 1948.

Both the British and the Dutch were very strict about avoiding intermarriage with people already on the island. Nevertheless, many individuals intermarried, and their numerous descendants, known as Burghers, belong to the various churches of Christendom. In fact, about 10 percent of Sri Lanka’s population claim to be Christian. But how did true Christianity reach this “gem of the Indian Ocean”?

THE GOOD NEWS IS HEARD

Legend has it that the apostle Thomas visited Ceylon. (Luke 6:12-16) But it is not legendary that two zealous Christian women, passing through by ship, preached the good news here in 1910.

They contacted Mr. E. W. de Z. Van Twest, a Burgher, shipping master of the port of Colombo. They convinced him to read The Divine Plan of the Ages and another book by Charles Taze Russell, first president of the Watch Tower Society. In time, Mr. Van Twest was telling others the new things he was learning. One who responded favorably was a Wesleyan minister, a Sinhalese individual named D. N. Pieris. Another was H. W. Wendt, Van Twest’s assistant.

Others who gratefully accepted the good news about this time were two more Sinhalese “Christians,” Mr. Edirisinghe and Mr. Baptist. There also was A. B. Chapman, a Burgher who had once worked at Queen’s Hotel in Kandy as a hostler in charge of the horses and carriages, but who was retired. A sanitary inspector, T. E. Karunatilleke, also accepted the truth and began sharing the good news with others. With all this activity, increase was to be expected.

PASTOR RUSSELL VISITS CEYLON

Early 1912 found these families eagerly awaiting the visit of Pastor Russell, as part of a world tour. At the time, Brother Van Twest was ill, but Brother Russell made a special trip to his home and had a short, spiritually strengthening talk with him. A well-advertised lecture about the rich man and Lazarus was given by Brother Russell at the old Public Hall, with over 900 in attendance. Brother Pieris translated Russell’s second talk at this hall into Sinhalese, so that all could understand.

Brother Russell also visited the leper asylum at Hendala, just across the river from Colombo. Here the Parsi individual in charge arranged for the lepers to listen as Pastor Russell spoke and Brother Pieris translated. Some requested and readily received tracts and other literature. Incidentally, while there, Brothers Russell and Pieris were offered the refreshing water from a young coconut. Russell insisted that Pieris drink first. Observers considered it a great thing to see a white man having a “native” drink ahead of himself.

Regular Sunday study classes now were arranged in an annex of Brother Van Twest’s home, ideally situated in Colombo. He conducted these classes, with one of his daughters playing the baby organ and another helping out in singing hymns.

After reading the sixth volume of Studies in the Scriptures, entitled “The New Creation,” Mr. and Mrs. Wendt saw the need of water immersion. So arrangements were made for the first baptism of Bible Students here. This took place in one of the canals the Dutch had built, at Wellawatte, just behind Brother Karunatilleke’s home, on May 31, 1914.

PHOTO-DRAMA COMES TO CEYLON

In 1917 Brother A. A. Hart from England spent about four months in Ceylon. He brought the Photo-Drama of Creation, a photographic slide, motion picture and sound production outlining God’s purpose for earth and man. There were showings in Colombo, Kandy and elsewhere. These presentations were very popular, and it was said that whenever the Photo-Drama was shown the churches were empty.

The climax came in Kandy, where the clergy made representations to the chief of police to get the showings stopped. However, when Brother Wendt showed him the scenario, the police chief said: “I can’t see anything wrong with it, Mr. Wendt, but these people are worrying me to get it stopped.” “These people,” the clergy, had so much influence that Brother Hart was given forty-eight hours to leave the island.

A GLANCE AT EARLY BIBLE CLASSES

While working as a sanitary inspector in 1918, Brother Karunatilleke met Thomas Walmsley, here from England on contract with the Lead Works. Walmsley quickly recognized the truth and soon severed connections with the Baptist Chapel and the Freemasons. His home in Boswell Place, Wellawatte, became a center for one of the daily Bible classes.

Yes, daily! At a different home each day the Bible Students were having classes. These began with a hymn and a prayer, followed by a reading from the Daily Heavenly Manna, forerunner of the Yearbook of Jehovah’s Witnesses. Then a sermon was given. One of Brother Russell’s sermons was read, or it was delivered by Brother Van Twest. Concluding features included another hymn and prayer.

SLOW BUT STEADY THROUGH THE 1920’S

By 1923 more than fifty persons were associated with the local organization in Colombo. The daily classes continued, and about every three months a one-day convention was held, either at the home of the Karunatillekes or that of the Wendts.

The Sunday classes were advertised in the local newspapers, but there was no organized house-to-house preaching. It was a matter of talking to those whom one met, giving out tracts and having long discussions with persons showing interest. Brother Wendt was from Kandy and went there for visits from time to time. Of the train trips, Sister Wendt reports:

“Whenever the family traveled to Kandy, father would settle us in a carriage and then he would disappear. He would go to another carriage and sit and talk with the passengers. If possible, he would sit near a Buddhist priest and then show him some things in the Sinhalese tracts and ask him please to read them so the others could listen. Many would listen as the priest read. At Kandy [Brother Wendt] would arrange to give a talk at a friend’s home and usually his friend would invite the neighbors. With about fifteen people listening, he would talk from the Bible, often about the dead . . . He would stress that there will be a resurrection . . . He told them about celestial bodies and terrestrial bodies. Oh, were they surprised at this! But most of them never gained sufficient courage to take a stand against clergy interference.”

In 1926 Brother F. E. Skinner made a visit from India. Brother Chapman’s daughter Ann helped him to distribute leaflets advertising a talk he was to deliver. For some time, Ann served as a colporteur (today called a pioneer) and was assisted for a while by Katie Mergler from India. They spent some months working the area south of Colombo, distributing much literature.

UPS AND DOWNS OF THE 1930’S

It was exciting to learn that an assembly of God’s people would be held at Madras, India, in 1931. Ann and Ruth Chapman, Brother D. N. Pieris and some others attended. There they met some brothers who had come from England to preach the good news in India. One of these was George Wright, who was working with Brother Skinner in Bombay. Ruth Chapman evidently made a fine impression on Brother Wright, for he went to Kandy to marry her on April 6, 1936.

George was assigned to work out of Kandy as a colporteur. From time to time, some visiting brothers from India joined the Wrights in the preaching activity for extended periods. Much of this work was done up in the hill country on the tea estates, where the Kingdom proclaimers distributed thousands of publications. This fine work continued until George died in 1941. Shortly thereafter, Ruth left for England. Her father, Brother A. B. Chapman, had died in 1933.

Brother Van Twest became quite feeble in the 1930’s and was not able to do much. He died at the age of eighty-six, in May 1938. Brother Wendt died the next month, at sixty-two. Classes now were discontinued, apart from Bible discussions that isolated families had in their own homes. A few did a little preaching, but no record was kept of this activity. Some endeavored to meet for the Lord’s Evening Meal yearly, but the Christian organization in Ceylon grew very weak, almost coming to a standstill as World War II began.

RESTORATION IN THE 1940’S

In 1941 a ban was placed on the Society’s literature and none of it was allowed to enter Ceylon. Brothers traveling through brought in a little, and an airline pilot was able to bring copies of The Watchtower quite regularly from Bombay. These were circulated among some of the brothers and interested ones. In 1943 Juvenal Chapman (son of A. B. Chapman) and another brother attended an assembly in Bombay and brought back some new literature. Juvenal then was a private surveyor at Gampaha, where he did some preaching. He also had a little printing done locally, including the booklet Cure in Sinhalese. The ban was lifted in 1945, making free contact with the Society’s Bombay office possible again.

During the early 1940’s, visiting brothers from India contacted a railway driver, E. L. V. Campbell, a staunch Roman Catholic. Vier, as everyone called him, eventually preached to his fellow workers, and another driver, Robin Tucker, and his family also became very interested. So things were beginning to stir. When Gerry Gerrard from Bombay visited Colombo early in 1947, he was able to aid nineteen persons to share in Kingdom preaching. The great need then was for some brothers to take the lead and organize regular meetings and preaching work.

MISSIONARIES LEND A HAND

About 7:00 a.m. on April 30, 1947, a train pulled into the Maradana Station, Colombo, with four graduates of the eighth class of the Watchtower Bible School of Gilead aboard. Before long, the four missionaries​—Stanley Bowdery, George Griffiths, Frank Stebbing and Ray Matthews—​were preaching in Colombo. People readily took literature. In fact, the missionaries placed 305 books and obtained 238 subscriptions during May, their first month in Ceylon.

A missionary home was rented at Talawatugoda and the missionaries obtained two bicycles and an old motorcycle for transportation. They found many English-speaking ones with whom to study. Brother Matthews recalls:

“From the time of our arrival, regular meetings were held, and soon the Colombo Company [Congregation] of Jehovah’s Witnesses was formed . . . We found the preaching work very easy, as all householders, whether Buddhist, Hindu, Muslim, or ‘Christian,’ would invite us to be seated, order a cool drink for us, listen to all we had to say, and then take at least some literature . . .

“Then we started magazine work on the streets . . . We placed many magazines. . . . To have white people on the streets offering magazines in the midst of the hawkers was quite unknown. . . .

“Next we started public meetings. The first one was held in Earl’s Court and everyone we invited promised to come. So we expected a crowd; but only about twenty came. We noted that large crowds gathered on the Galle Face Green, a large open area near the sea and close to the Fort, the business section. So we decided we would have public meetings there. . . . With two trumpet speakers, people on a large section of the green could hear. At times two or three hundred would listen to at least some of the talk. A witness was given to many and, though we were few, our presence was felt. During the first four months, a peak of twenty-two publishers was reached.”

In March 1948, a small place at Borella was rented for a missionary home. It was not a “classy” place, but at least it was in Colombo and saved the missionaries a lot of traveling time.

PROGRESS AMONG THE TAMILS

Some claim that nearly half the population of Colombo is Tamil, though most of these people know English. One of their number, G. H. G. Abraham, became very interested. He began attending meetings regularly, started in the Kingdom-preaching work in 1952 and was immersed in Calcutta on January 10, 1953.

At the end of 1954, Henry Abraham resigned from his secular job, forgoing desirable pension privileges. Why? For the greater privilege of serving Jehovah as a special pioneer. Since then Brother Abraham has become “father” to many spiritual children.​—Compare 1 Corinthians 4:14, 15; Philemon 10, 11.

A TRULY UPBUILDING VISIT

But, step back to early 1952. How thrilling it was to learn that the Watch Tower Society’s president, N. H. Knorr, planned to visit Ceylon in January of that year! It had been forty years since C. T. Russell had visited the island.

The Railway Institute was used for most meetings during Brother Knorr’s visit, but the Town Hall was rented for the public talk. Anxious that everyone know about this lecture, the brothers distributed many handbills. Furthermore, they mounted a large sign in three sections on bicycles and rode around Colombo. This really was effective. Whereas the average attendance at meetings in the Institute was about fifty, despite a pouring rain 235 assembled to hear Brother Knorr’s public talk “Will Religion Meet the World Crisis?”

Brother Knorr went out to the missionary home for an evening meal. After negotiating the narrow lane flooded with rainwater, stumbling over a heap of sand and getting caught in a clothesline, he managed to make his way to the home. He chatted for a while and then said: “Well, you boys certainly need a new missionary home.”

MORE MISSIONARIES ARRIVE

Three months later, the missionaries moved to 10/1 Vidiyala Place, Colombo 10. A fine two-story home, it had modern conveniences and was very suitable for congregation meetings.

Three missionaries had arrived in Ceylon on September 20, 1951​—Harold Gluyas, John Wesley-Smith and Fred Carroll. In October 1952, Ralph and Betty Johnson arrived, having graduated from Gilead’s eighteenth class. That December, their classmates Charles and Marion Boshnyak joined them.

Now, with missionary sisters to brighten up the home and assist their Ceylonese sisters in the field, prospects looked good. So did the missionary home. There was a big improvement in meals and the home’s general appearance.

EXPANDING THE KINGDOM WITNESS

Early in 1953, plans were made to visit some of the brothers and interested persons in various parts of the island. Since some of the missionaries now had motorcycles, you might visualize a convoy of these traveling through the villages and beautiful jungles. The first stop was Anuradhapura, an ancient capital 120 miles from Colombo. Here some visited a Mrs. Lucas, an interested lady, and her neighbors. Others arranged for a public talk in the evening. It was held on the green by the market. A volunteer in the audience translated the talk into Sinhalese, so that all could understand.

Trincomalee was the next stop. In that area, pleasant association was enjoyed with the Tucker family. Since they lived at China Bay, six miles south of Trincomalee, this meant a short train ride each day. Many Sinhalese and Tamil booklets were placed with the passengers while the brothers were traveling. Meetings were enjoyed by all, and then it was time for the return journey.

Kandy, a city in the hill country, was visited on the way back. Quickly, a public talk was scheduled in the lounge of the Queen’s Hotel. About twenty residents of Kandy were present.

CEYLON BRANCH ESTABLISHED

In November 1953, a very significant forward step was taken in Ceylon’s theocratic history. A branch office of the Watch Tower Society was established in Colombo, with Brother Ralph Johnson appointed as branch overseer. This was sure to mean much closer supervision of the Kingdom-preaching work on the island.

Jehovah’s blessing on this new branch office seemed quite evident. Each month brought a new peak in publishers, so that the average for that service year was 66, a 50-percent increase over the previous year. And, how happy all were that the Memorial was attended by 122!

Through the years it has been necessary to move the branch office and missionary home several times. Today it is well situated at 62 Layard’s Road, Colombo 5. Facilities there include a fine Kingdom Hall, and they are much larger and better laid out than any previous facilities.

Due to his wife’s illness, Brother Johnson was unable to continue caring for the duties of branch overseer. So Douglas King, who had been serving in India with his wife, came and assumed these responsibilities in April 1954.

By now there were two congregations, one in Colombo, the other in Kandy. Ray Matthews was appointed to serve some of the time as circuit overseer, and, with a view to expanding the work, he also traveled to Jaffna and other places.

In May 1954, plans were finalized for Ceylon’s first circuit assembly. It was held in Colombo’s Girl Guide Headquarters. This assembly was upbuilding indeed, and all rejoiced to see an audience of 357 for the public talk.

A TIME FOR EXPANSION

The disciple-making work was moving ahead. More local brothers were responding to the training that they received and were able to care for more congregational duties. This meant that some of the missionaries could go to open up new territories. Hence, in December 1954, John Wesley-Smith and his sister Moira (a graduate of Gilead’s eleventh class), along with the Boshnyaks, opened a new missionary home in Jaffna, at the very north of the island.

Loo Joseph, whom Ian Campbell had met at radio Ceylon, and her stepson Euchie soon started in the special pioneer work. With Loo’s other children, they later went to work in Galle, at the south of the island. This meant that the good news would be preached even at these extremities of Ceylon.

In February 1955, Ian Campbell and Henry Abraham left for Batticaloa. Many people there remembered a Mr. Iyampillai, who had talked about God’s kingdom, reportedly until his death at eighty-three in 1951. Now with the coming of the two pioneers, the work in the eastern province really got under way.

DISTURBANCES OVER LANGUAGE

This tranquil “gem” in the Indian Ocean manifested a fiery facet in May of 1956, when rioting broke out at Amparai. The issue? National language. Moves were afoot to make Sinhalese the national tongue, and the Tamil people vigorously demanded parity of status for their language.

A Tamil individual, Thomas Meadows, working at Amparai, had shown great interest in the truth. Along with Brothers Abraham and Campbell, Ray Matthews, the circuit overseer, had traveled the forty-two miles from Batticaloa to visit him. While they were having a Bible discussion, a riotous, shrieking Sinhalese mob charged down the road, wrecking Tamil homes and ill-treating any Tamils they could find. With the help of a Sinhalese neighbor​—and possibly angelic protection—​the brothers and the Meadows family escaped.

Thereafter, Thomas Meadows progressed so rapidly that within two months he started in the field service. After retirement, he became a special pioneer. Incidentally, a Hindu friend who was visiting him the night of the riot also accepted the truth, symbolizing his dedication to Jehovah in December 1956. He, too, eventually became a special pioneer.

Language riots broke out again in May of 1958, and many atrocities were committed. But loving consideration was shown among the brothers as they moved around in a very tense situation to see if all were safe. Because of remaining neutral and cooperating with the authorities, not one of our brothers was harmed.​—John 17:16.

ANOTHER HELPFUL VISIT

Among the joyful theocratic events in Ceylon was the second visit of Brother Knorr, from December 31, 1956, to January 3, 1957. An assembly was planned to coincide with his visit, and there was extensive advertising of the public talk “New World Peace in Our Time.” For example, four large banners were put up in strategic places and a transportation company carried a hundred bus posters free of charge. Needless to say, everyone was delighted to see a dignified, respectful audience of 435 present for the lecture at Colombo’s Town Hall.

A LOOK AT THE CASTE SYSTEM

In January 1958, Ian and Sheila Campbell, as well as Henry Abraham, left to attend the thirty-first class of Gilead School. They returned that September as Ceylon’s own first Gilead graduates. The Campbells worked out of the Colombo missionary home and Brother Abraham out of the one at Jaffna, where Brother and Sister Harold Gluyas then served.

Concerning Jaffna, Sister Gluyas says: “Here we learned for the first time how strong a hold the caste system has, even among the so-called Christians. On one occasion when we held a [Watch Tower Society] film showing at the home of an interested person who was a nominal Christian, another ‘Christian’ person said that he would not be able to attend, as he would offend his relations, they being of a supposedly higher caste.” Often when Bible studies were conducted in “Christian” homes, some neighbors would come but maintain their imagined lower status by sitting on the floor while others used chairs.

DIVINE WILL ASSEMBLY

The Divine Will International Assembly of Jehovah’s Witnesses, held in New York city during the summer of 1958, was a grand Christian event. But the brothers in Ceylon had their own Divine Will Assembly at Colombo on October 23-26, 1958. All were thrilled with the spiritual food and the new publications, especially the book From Paradise Lost to Paradise Regained. With its simple language and many illustrations, this publication proved to be a valuable instrument for the disciple-making work.

In just two months after the shipment was received, 1,044 copies of the Paradise book were placed. Perhaps because of having such a fine aid, the Bible study work increased by 38 percent during the year.

It might be mentioned that Brother I. R. David began sharing in the field service at the 1958 Divine Will Assembly. He was baptized at a convention in Jaffna on April 30, 1960, and soon was conducting fifteen home Bible studies. One was held with a Mr. Cassim, who became the first Muslim to embrace true worship in Ceylon.

INTERNAL PROBLEMS ARISE

Spiritual prosperity and unity were being enjoyed by Jehovah’s people in Ceylon. But then some internal trouble developed. Satan found opportunity to use his old method of promoting immoral conduct. In 1951 some changes became necessary for the advancement of the work. Accordingly, Brother C. A. Tareha, a missionary, was appointed to care for the circuit work. In December Brother and Sister King opened a new missionary home in Nuwara Eliya, high up among the tea estates, where practically no preaching work had been done.

In January 1962, Ray Matthews took over the duties of branch overseer. These developments helped all to realize that individuals are not indispensable. Rather than looking to humans, Christians must look to and rely upon Jehovah God.​—Ps. 37:5; Prov. 28:25.

BROTHER HENSCHEL VISITS

Many of the newer brothers had never met a member of the Watch Tower Society’s headquarters staff from Brooklyn, New York. So all were very pleased to learn that Milton G. Henschel would visit Ceylon February 9 through 14, 1962. (It was in 1973, some eleven years later, that he visited a second time.) The United Worshipers District Assembly was scheduled for February 8-11, to coincide with his visit.

Brother Henschel’s loving counsel certainly was appreciated. So was his suggestion on trading literature for whatever the people have, if they lack money. Thereafter, it was interesting to see publishers returning from field service with rice, coconuts, eggs, soap, clothes and the like. Having given something in exchange for the publications, the people were more likely to value them.

KINGDOM HALL CONSTRUCTION

The early 1960’s found the brothers of the Moratuwa Congregation busy constructing the first Kingdom Hall to be owned by Jehovah’s witnesses in Ceylon. Brother B. L. Wooding, the presiding overseer at that time, received a legacy and it could have been expected that he would use the money to go home to New Zealand for a visit. Instead, he used it to realize his dream of a Kingdom Hall for the Moratuwa Congregation. Others helped by pooling their resources and selling possessions.

On May 4, 1963, more than 200 were present for the dedication of this Kingdom Hall. Situated on Galle Road at Ratmalana, it has become a landmark so well known that postcards arrive when addressed simply “Kingdom Hall, Mount Lavinia.”

“EVERLASTING GOOD NEWS” ASSEMBLY

For those in Ceylon, New Delhi was the nearest center on the planned route of the 1963 “Everlasting Good News” Assembly, an around-the-world convention. From Ceylon, 109 were able to make the trip, 32 of whom were pioneers.

A major problem would have been making train connections after the ferry ride between Ceylon and India. “The third-class passengers never get the connecting train; they always have to wait here and go on the next day,” said the Chief Collector of Customs. But the brothers appealed to responsible individuals for cooperation, then prayed to Jehovah. What happened? Why, the customs officials cared for their party separately, and almost before they knew it they were on the extremely crowded train. They had made the connection!

All benefited greatly from the assembly program. And how fine it was to associate with fellow believers from many lands! Several of the delegates were baptized at New Delhi, bringing Ceylon’s immersion total that year to an all-time high of 43.

DISCIPLE-MAKING ADVANCES

Brother C. A. Tareha was called to the branch office in November 1963 to become familiar with the routine, as Ray Matthews, the branch overseer, was preparing to attend the thirty-ninth class of Gilead School. Melroy Campbell and Brother A. Gnanasunderam, newly returned from Gilead, began working out of the Jaffna missionary home at about that time.

After Brother Matthews returned from Gilead in February 1965, more emphasis was laid on use of the vernacular languages in the Christian activities. The younger generation, educated either in Sinhalese or Tamil, could not otherwise be reached. Greater use of these languages was encouraged at all congregation meetings, in order to better equip Ceylon’s Kingdom proclaimers to make disciples. Of course, Christian publications were already available in the vernacular. For instance, The Watchtower was first published in Tamil in August 1956, and its first Sinhalese issue was produced in March 1958.

Almost all the parts on the district assembly program in December 1967 were translated into Sinhalese and Tamil, and the presentations were of a high standard. Assembly organization has become quite efficient over the years too, with all departments functioning well. Incidentally, Ceylonese people like their cup of tea in the afternoon, and so a tea break is a must at every assembly. Great quantities of cake and sandwiches are consumed with the tea.

One publication in particular has resulted in marked advancement of the disciple-making work. It is the book The Truth That Leads to Eternal Life. By December 1968, when a small shipment arrived, three chapters already had appeared in the Tamil Watchtower. That very month there was an all-time peak of 445 home Bible studies. With the Truth book a six-month Bible study arrangement was instituted here, as it was elsewhere. Soon reports indicated that new ones were responding quickly to this study arrangement.

“PEACE ON EARTH” ASSEMBLIES

In 1969, the missionaries and a small number of other publishers traveled abroad to attend the “Peace on Earth” International Assemblies. Two missionaries had been lost in death (B. L. Wooding and Frank Stabbing), but after the London assembly, Arthur and Gwynneth Morris, graduates of Gilead’s forty-seventh class, arrived in Colombo.

Most of Ceylon’s delegates to assemblies in various lands had returned by December, when the local “Peace on Earth” Assembly was held. Ten new disciples were baptized at that gathering. Some of them had embraced true Christianity due to the six-month Bible study course with the Truth, book.

GROWTH AMID DIFFICULTIES

April 1970 saw a new peak of 292 publishers. But each publisher still had, on an average, 42,774 persons of the island’s 12,490,000 to reach in witnessing. As they continued preaching to the populace, trouble arose.

Threat of an armed revolution in April 1971, with terrorist activity throughout the country, resulted in the imposing of a curfew. On April 9, when the brothers were about to commemorate Jesus Christ’s death, suddenly a full twenty-four-hour curfew was imposed. This made it impossible to hold meetings. Yet, some family groups faithfully held the celebration at home. In keeping with Scriptural provisions, arrangements were made for all congregations of God’s people to observe the Memorial thirty days later that year. (Compare Numbers 9:9-13.) Some did so in small groups, since the curfew still was in force from 9:00 p.m., making travel difficult. Even with such problems, however, the total attendance came to 615.

FRUITS OF PERSEVERANCE

Despite the problems encountered through the years, the publishers have endeavored to persevere in declaring the good news. Such steadfastness has borne fruit. True, nearly all those responding to Bible truth are nominal Christians. Yet, many who do not profess Christianity read the Society’s literature, and a few former Buddhists and Hindus, for instance, have become Jehovah’s witnesses.

The change from false to true worship can result in quite a transformation. To illustrate: For several years a Hindu native doctor attended meetings in Jaffna. Brother Nadarajah, who had left Hinduism himself, patiently conducted Bible studies with this man. When the doctor first came to the Kingdom Hall, his clothing was unkempt, Hindu “sacred” ash was smeared across his forehead, a red hibiscus was on one ear and most of his hair and beard had been pulled out because of a vow he had made. But each week he would be there, sitting upright in the front, a son on either side of him. Gradually, the power of truth could be seen. His clothing became cleaner, the ash disappeared, along with the flower, and his hair was allowed to grow normally, while the beard was completely shaved off. At home, the family shrine was broken down and other steps were taken so that this man could dedicate his life to Jehovah. Although he did not know English, the big Kingdom smile he exchanged with fellow believers after his baptism showed that he really knew that he was accepted as Brother Gopalan. He progressed quickly, becoming a special pioneer in November 1967. His wife and all his children also became Kingdom proclaimers.

GROWTH BRINGS DELIGHT

Here, as elsewhere, spiraling prices and meager incomes make it difficult to obtain life’s necessities. Also, higher bus and train fares work hardships on some in their preaching work and in traveling to meetings and assemblies. Doubtless these individuals appreciate the fact that an effort often is made to hold circuit assemblies in places where the smallest number of publishers have to travel.

Though there are various problems, Jehovah continues to promote growth, and with this the brothers are happy indeed. During the past service year they reached a peak of 529 Kingdom proclaimers, and the Memorial attendance for 1975 was 1,377. During the “Divine Sovereignty” District Assembly in the month of August they were delighted to have an attendance of 912, and another assembly was yet to be held. Now, looking ahead, they are confident that the fourteen existing congregations on the island will prosper as God keeps making things grow.​—1 Cor. 3:5-9.

It also brings them delight that more are sharing in the pioneer work. Likely, a number will yet become special pioneers, able to go to new areas and help to establish congregations. This seems essential, as there are well over ten million inhabitants of Sri Lanka who have not yet heard the good news.

During the first century, Jesus’ followers ‘reaped’ by gathering responsive Jews as his disciples. Similarly, for years those in Sri Lanka have been “gathering fruit for everlasting life.” But there is more to do and they joyously press on with their God-given work, confident that they will continue to enjoy divine blessing. It appears that here the fields still “are white for harvesting,” and there are thrilling prospects ahead in the Kingdom-preaching and disciple-making work.​—John 4:34-38.

[Picture on page 252]

Sri Lanka’s happy pioneers at the end of 1958

[Picture on page 255]

Branch office and missionary home in Colombo since 1967

Adding Luster to the Truth

Having just read the history of Jehovah’s witnesses in a few countries, we can see that the big thing is the presenting of the truth to all kinds of people. They know that a person’s prospects for eternal life depend on his having a knowledge of Jehovah and his Son. Jesus Christ stated this very clearly: “This means everlasting life, their taking in knowledge of you, the only true God, and of the one whom you sent forth, Jesus Christ.” (John 17:3) Fully appreciating this, Jehovah’s witnesses have stressed the study of the Bible, and Jehovah has blessed them.

Rightly so, those coming to a knowledge of the truth and associating with Jehovah’s witnesses ask, ‘What does God require of us?’ Jesus said: “The good news has to be preached first.” (Mark 13:10) And while individuals preach the good news they can adorn it or enhance its appeal by the way they live. As the prophet Micah says: “What is Jehovah asking back from you but to exercise justice and to love kindness and to be modest in walking with your God?” (Mic. 6:8) This way of life is really observed by the peoples of the nations, and this attracts some persons to the truth. As a result, there has been good growth among Jehovah’s witnesses over the years.

The Watch Tower Bible and Tract Society of Pennsylvania was incorporated back in 1884, ninety-one years ago. It had a small beginning, but soon thousands of people were attending their meetings. When world war broke out in 1914, great persecution fell upon Jehovah’s people all over the earth. From 1914 to 1918 the records show that the number of publishers of the Kingdom dropped from 5,140 to 4,136. However, in 1919 there was a great reawakening. Jehovah’s witnesses saw the importance of preaching the good news as never before. In 1922 a great call went out to ‘Advertise, advertise, advertise the King and Kingdom.’ By 1928 the annual report of the Watch Tower Society showed 44,080 persons preaching the good news. This was a surprise to many, because Christendom thought they had just about killed off Jehovah’s witnesses. But the Christian witnesses of Jehovah loved Jehovah and his kingdom and made this the paramount thing in their lives. In the next 20 years, by 1948, the number preaching the good news rose to 260,756, and by 1968, another 20 years elapsing, there were 1,221,504. Then what happened in the next seven years? That number nearly doubled, and the year’s report for 1975 shows there were 2,179,256 persons declaring the good news of the Kingdom the world over. Their fine conduct, their peacefulness, their honesty and trustworthiness, their good example have added luster to the truth of God’s Word.​—Titus 2:10, NE.

People in 210 lands are listening and Jehovah’s witnesses are taking pleasure in making disciples of peoples of all nations. From 1970 to 1975, there were 1,264,059 persons who dedicated their lives to God’s service and were baptized. That means that more than one half of all those preaching the good news today were baptized in the last six years. Why? Because this is Jehovah’s time for it. A “great crowd” is being gathered for survival through the “great tribulation.”​—Rev. 7:9, 10, 14.

Jehovah’s witnesses feel the urgency of the times. They are well aware that “in the last days critical times hard to deal with will be here.” (2 Tim. 3:1-5) Millions of people throughout the world are thoroughly disgusted with conditions. So are Jehovah’s witnesses, but they have faith. Bible prophecy shows them that these are the last days of this system of things. This past year Jehovah’s witnesses spent 382,296,208 hours preaching the good news and distributing millions of copies of Bibles, books, pamphlets and magazines so that peoples of all nations may know the only true God. The Watch Tower Society sent out missionaries, special pioneers and circuit and district overseers at a cost of $10,248,848.91 into all parts of the world to work along with the millions of congregation publishers to get this work done before the end comes. In addition, the Society has operated 96 branch offices, where 3,734 members serve. They produce literature, ship it, handle correspondence, care for Bethel homes and, in addition, share in the preaching of the good news on weekends. Their willingly and joyfully working together in love certainly has added luster to the truth.

The branch offices, in sending in their reports to the Society, have asked that the warm love of their Bethel families and of all the congregations in their territories be sent to their brothers everywhere around the world. So, just as Paul wrote to Titus we say to you: ‘All those with us send their greetings. Give our greetings to those who have affection for us in the faith. May the undeserved kindness be with all of you people.’​—Titus 3:15.

Your brothers and fellow servants,

WATCH TOWER BIBLE AND TRACT SOCIETY OF PENNSYLVANIA

Yeartext for 1976

“Awaiting these things, do your utmost to be found finally by him spotless and unblemished and in peace.”​—2 Pet. 3:14.

It seems that Christians are always in expectation. They are always looking forward to something. In connection with our year’s text the apostle Peter advised us to look for the whole universe visible to us to break up. Why? Because the day of the Lord is near. It will come, and it is going to come very unexpectedly, like a thief. So Peter, addressing Christians, said: “Think what sort of people you ought to be, what devout and dedicated lives you should live!”​—2 Pet. 3:11, NE.

As followers of Christ Jesus we want to walk in his footsteps and we know that Jesus gave a very fine “public declaration before Pontius Pilate.” Paul wrote Timothy about this and said: “I give you orders that you observe the commandment in a spotless and irreprehensible way.” (1 Tim. 6:13, 14) In the same letter he further admonished Timothy and all of us: “Guard what is laid up in trust with you, turning away from the empty speeches that violate what is holy.” (1 Tim. 6:20) In these days we must be alert. We cannot be sitting down doing nothing. We must be busy! If we are, then we must “go . . . and make disciples of people of all the nations, baptizing them in the name of the Father and of the Son and of the holy spirit.”​—Matt. 28:19.

If we went around spotty and blemished we would not look very suitable so as to fill the role of a disciple maker.

With all the trouble and distress in the world today it is certainly necessary for us to be at peace with one another. We must love one another and thus maintain that perfect bond of union. (Col. 3:14) If we keep ourselves spotless, unblemished and at peace, we will certainly be approved worshipers of the Sovereign Lord Jehovah and be able to remain in his spiritual paradise along with all our brothers and sisters who have dedicated their lives to do the will of God too. Now there are over 38,000 congregations of Jehovah’s witnesses around the world where God’s people are assembling every week. Here we encourage one another and build one another up spiritually. Are you there among this happy throng helping others? We should always keep in mind that “God recommends his own love to us in that, while we were yet sinners, Christ died for us.” (Rom. 5:8) Now are we going to show real love for him by living good clean lives?

Let us keep alert, awaiting the things that will come in the very near future. We must, with God’s help, keep ourselves spotless and unblemished and in peace toward one another and especially toward God, who loved us so much.